diff options
author | Norbert Preining <norbert@preining.info> | 2019-09-02 13:46:59 +0900 |
---|---|---|
committer | Norbert Preining <norbert@preining.info> | 2019-09-02 13:46:59 +0900 |
commit | e0c6872cf40896c7be36b11dcc744620f10adf1d (patch) | |
tree | 60335e10d2f4354b0674ec22d7b53f0f8abee672 /macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw |
Initial commit
Diffstat (limited to 'macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw')
28 files changed, 10891 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/CHANGES b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/CHANGES new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..73a77cc950 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/CHANGES @@ -0,0 +1,768 @@ +biblatex-dw 2016/12/06 v1.7 +Copyright (c) 2008-2016 Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de> + + Version history + --------------- + +v1.7 [2016/12/06] +This version of biblatex-dw needs at least biblatex 3.3 and was testet with +biblatex 3.6 and biber 2.6. +- New option "citeauthorname" (instead of "firstfullname") which can take the + values "normal" (\citeauthor and \textcite print the surname only, as in + standard biblatex), "firstfull" (at the first use of \citeauthor or \textcite, + the full name is printed, otherwise the surname only; thus, this is the + behaviour of the former option "firstfullname") and "full" (the full name is + always printed when using \citeauthor or \textcite). The default for this option + is "normal". +- Option "firstfullname" has been dropped (see above, option "citeauthorname"). +- Option "series" can now take the values "standard", "afteryear" and + "beforeedition". The latter is new and prints the series ahead of the edition. + The default for this option is "standard". +- BUGFIX: From version 3.3 of biblatex, \DeclareNameFormat has changed. This + version of biblatex-dw is now compatible with the new syntax. +- BUGFIX: In some circumstances, the option "inreference=full" was broken. This + should be fixed now. +- BUGFIX: In some cases, @review in combination with the xref functionality + suppressed the output of pages. This should be fixed. +- Compatibility with biblatex 2.9 regarding the list of shorthands. + +v1.6a [2013/09/22] +This version of biblatex-dw was tested with biblatex 2.7a and biber 1.7. + - New option "inreference" (authortitle-dw only) which can take the values + "normal" and "full": If set to "full", @inreference entries are printed always + in full, but are omitted from the bibliography. Note that when using + "xref=false", you have to cite the corresponding @reference entry manually + (e.g. with \nocite) if you wish to see the @reference entry in the + bibliography. The "inreference" option complies with both ibidtracker and + idemtracker. The default for this option is "normal". + - BUGFIX: With the option "addyear" a superfluous space was introduced in some + circumstances. This should be fixed now. + +v1.6 [2013/09/07] +This version of biblatex-dw was tested with biblatex 2.7a and biber 1.7. + - New option "addyear" (authortitle-dw only): If set to "true", the year of the + publication will be added after the title in citations. The year appears in + parentheses. The default for this option is "false". + - BUGFIX: If a title ended with a question mark or an exclamation mark, the + "seenote" string in footnote-dw was capitalised. This has been fixed. + - BUGFIX: There was a problem with @inbook entries in the bibliography when + using xref=true (the author of the book entry was not always shown). This is + now fixed. + - BUGFIX: Using annotation=true and/or library=true lead to a superfluous + linebreak and dot in those entries which held an annotation and/or library. + +v1.5 [2012/06/28] +This version of biblatex-dw was tested with biblatex 1.7. + - BUGFIX: The functionality of ibidpage=true was broken. This is now fixed. + - BUGFIX: With edbyidem=true (and xref=false), the first citation of an + @inbook entry where author and editor are the same, but the bookauthor + differs resulted in "ed. by idem", which is wrong. This is now fixed. + - BUGFIX: With edbyidem=false, the book author of @inbook entries + was not typeset in the appropriate format. This could lead to a + wrong output (e.g. "Lastname, Firstname" instead of "Firstname + Lastname"). This is now fixed. + - BUGFIX: With @inreference entries, the output could be + inconsistent with regard to the volume(s). This is now fixed. + - BUGFIX: Changes in font size for \annotationfont and \libraryfont + led to a wrong baselineskip. This is now fixed. + - BUGFIX: There was a small bug in @collection entries concerning the + punctuation after the labelname. This should be fixed now. + - BUGFIX: With shorthandinbib=true the \labelnamepunct was printed when there + was no author or editor present. This lead to superfluous punctuation and is + now fixed. + - BUGFIX: In some circumstances the final period of the bibliography items + (\finentry) was not printed. This is now fixed. + - In authortitle-dw, the \textcite command now also considers + the value of the firstfull option. That means, if a work + is cited for the first time via a \textcite command, the + result would be "<Name> (<full citation>)". + - New option "citeauthor" which can take the values "namefont", "namefontfoot" + and "normalfont". This option controls the name format for the \citeauthor + command. With "citeauthor=namefont" the same format as set by the option + "namefont" is used. This is the default behaviour. With "citeauthor=normalfont" + the normal font is always used for \citeauthor, regardless of the "namefont" + option. With "citeauthor=namefontfoot" the "namefont" format is used if the + \citeauthor command is inside a footnote, otherwise the normal font is used. + - The list of shorthands with option terselos=true is now even more terse: + the [main]subtitle and [main]titleaddon fields are now also omitted. + +v1.4 [2011/11/20] +This version of biblatex-dw was tested with biblatex 1.7 and +requires at least version 1.6 of biblatex. + - BUGFIX: With @review entries cited by \fullcite or + \footfullcite the reviewed work was not printed in full. + This is now fixed. + - BUGFIX: With "shorthandinbib=true" and "terselos=false", + the shorthand was printed twice in the list of + shorthands. This is now fixed. + - The \smartcite commands introduced by biblatex 1.2 are + now supported. + - The \textcite and \textcites commands are now also supported + by footnote-dw. + - New command \textcitesdelim: delimiter between author names + when using \textcites. The default is: + \addspace\bibstring{and}\space + - New option "seriesformat" which can take the values + "standard" and "parens". If set to "parens", the series + of a book etc. will be printed in parentheses, otherwise + without (as is the biblatex standard behaviour). The + default value for this option is "parens" (as was the + behaviour in earlier biblatex-dw versions). + - New option "editorstringfont" which can take the values + "normal" and "namefont". With "normal", the normal font + is used, with "namefont", the setting for the option + "namefont" is also used for the editor string (and + translator string etc.). The default value for this + option is "normal". + - New option "editionstring": If set to "true", the + bibliography string "edition" will be added to the + "edition" field, even if it is not an integer. Thus, + you can type, e.g., + edition = {2., aktualisierte} + in your bib file and you will get "2., aktualisierte + Aufl." (or, with option abbreviate=false: "2., + aktualisierte Auflage"). "editionstring=false" will give + biblatex’s default behaviour. The default for this option + is "false". + - New entry option "oldbookauthor" which is equivalent to + "oldauthor" but for the bookauthor (this is useful for + @inbook entries representing, e.g., an introduction to an + edition of a work by an author that should not be typeset + in the usual font for last names). This option can be set + on a per entry basis and can be disabled with the global + option "oldauthor=false". + - Improved options "namefont", "firstnamefont", "idemfont" + and "ibidemfont" which are now aware of the setting of + the biblatex option "punctfont". + - Small bugfix for the xref functionality. + +v1.3c [2011/02/06] +This version of biblatex-dw needs biblatex 1.1a. Please note +that you have to update biblatex as well if you would like +to use biblatex-dw 1.3c! + - BUGFIX: Under some circumstances, an error occurred + (command \cbx@tempa could not be found). This should be + fixed now. + - BUGFIX: Some of the German translations were broken due + to a change of internal commands in biblatex. This is now + fixed. + - The entry type @review is now supported. You can + specify a reviewed work via the xref field. See the + documentation for details. + - Some internal changes concerning \DeclareFieldFormat + directives. + +v1.3b [2010/11/21] +This version of biblatex-dw was tested against biblatex 1.0, +but it should also work with versions from biblatex 0.9d. +The following changes were made to biblatex-dw: + - BUGFIX: Using pagetotal=false and citepages=separate, the + herename was printed as soon as the pagetotal field was + present (although the pagetotal field itself was not + printed). This is now fixed, and the citepages option + pays attention to the pagetotal option. + - In order to match as closely as possible to biblatex + itself, the \citenamepunct command was renamed to + \nametitledelim. For compatibility reasons with earlier + versions of biblatex-dw, the \citenamepunct was kept. + Thus, it does not matter if you redefine \nametitledelim + or \citenamepunct, the effect will be the same; but note + that the \citenamepunct may be dropped in later versions + of biblatex-dw. + - In full citations \nametitledelim is used instead of + \labelnamepunct. + - Improvements regarding idem functionality in combination + with xref=true. + - Improved the documentation. + +v1.3a [2010/09/21] +This version of biblatex-dw supports biblatex 0.9d. Please +note that you have to update biblatex at least to version +0.9b if you would like to use biblatex-dw 1.3a! You will +also need to install the package logreq which is a new +requirement since biblatex 0.9b. Users might also need to +update their data due to some changes in biblatex 0.9a and +biblatex 0.9b. Please follow the hints for users given in +biblatex’s RELEASE notes for both of these versions. +The following changes were made to biblatex-dw: + - Option "omitpages" was renamed to "citepages" and + enhanced. As in the verbose standard styles, you can now + choose between "permit", "omit", "suppress" and + "separate". Other as in the biblatex styles, the standard + for this option in biblatex-dw is "separate". + - Option "herename" dropped. The same functionality can now + be achieved by using "citepages=separate". Note that the + bibliography string "herename" was also dropped, + "thiscite" is used instead. + - New option "shorthandinbib": if set to "true", the + shorthand of each entry will be typeset in the + bibliography before each item. The shorthand will be set + in brackets, separated by a space. You can customize this + behaviour by adjusting the following commands: + \DeclareFieldFormat{shorthandinbib}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}} + \newcommand*{\shorthandinbibpunct}{\addspace} + The default for "shorthandinbib" is "false". + - BUGFIX: The shorthandpunct could not be redefined by a + simple \renewcommand, but only as an argument of + \AtBeginDocument. This is now fixed, and a simple + \renewcommand is sufficient. + - BUGFIX: The shorthandpunct was also printed, when the + option "shorthandwidth" was not in use (this had only + effect, when the shorthandpunct was redefined). This is + now fixed. + - BUGFIX: When using authortitle-dw with "firstfull=true", + a \parencite had an erroneous space for the first + citation without a postnote. This is now fixed. + - BUGFIX: The new editorial roles introduced in biblatex + 0.9 were not fully supported. This is now fixed. + - BUGFIX: The option "firstfullname" did not work with + biblatex’s option "uniquename". This is now fixed. + - BUGFIX: When using hyperref, some links to the + bibliography were broken. This should now be fixed. + - BUGFIX: In @inbook entries the punctuation after a book + author was not the \labelnamepunct. This is now fixed. + +v1.3 [2010/03/11] + +This version of biblatex-dw supports biblatex 0.9. Please +note that you have to update biblatex as well if you would +like to use biblatex-dw 1.3! Users might need to update +their data due to some changes in biblatex, especially +concerned with date specifications. Please follow the hints +for users given in biblatex’s RELEASE notes. + +Further changes in this release: + - The options "isrn" and "issn" were dropped. Their + functionality can be achieved by the biblatex option + "isbn". + - BUGFIX: When using "idembibformat=dash", the @inreference + entries had a wrong punctuation inside the title. This is + now fixed. + - Option "pseudoauthor" changed: if set to true (and the + entry option "pseudoauthor" is used), the author of this + entry is printed. The new commands \bibleftpseudo and + \bibrightpseudo are used to enclose the author. These + commands are empty by default. If the global option + "pseudoauthor" is set to "false", the author of entries + with the entry option "pseudoauthor" are not printed at + all. The default value for the global option is "true" + (i.e. the behaviour is the same regardless of the entry + option "pseudoauthor"). + - New command \locationdatepunct for the punctuation + between location and year/date. The default is \addspace. + - New command \locationpublisherpunct for the punctuation + between location and publisher. The default is + \addcolon\space. + - New command \publisherdatepunct for the punctuation + between publisher and year/date. The default is + \addcomma\space. + +v1.2o [2010/02/14] + - BUGFIX: When using the options "xref=true" and + "useeditor=false", the editor was not printed in the + bibliography. This is now fixed. Also, some bugs + regarding the xref functionality in citations could be + fixed. + - BUGFIX: The editors in @incollection, @inproceedings and + @inreference entries were printed using the name format + "sortname" ("Lastname, Firstname") where it should have + been the name format "byeditor" ("Firstname Lastname"). + This is now fixed. + - New option "omiteditor": If one uses "useeditor=false" + and "omiteditor=true", the editor in citations will be + omitted. The same applies to the xref functionality in + the bibliography. With "useeditor=true", this option has + no effect. The standard for this option is "false". + - The limitation regarding the combination of "xref=true", + "edbyidem=true" and "useeditor=false" is no longer valid. + That means, it is not necessary to have the editor in the + child entry as well in order to get an "idem" string. + - Extended the documentation. + +v1.2n [2010/01/24] + - The option "edbeforetitle" was discarded. The same + functionality can be obtained by the option "useeditor". + In this context, some bugs could be resolved. + - New option "omitpages": if set to "true", the page range + of @article, @inbook, @incollection or @inproceedings + entries will be suppressed in full citations. + The standard value is "false". + - Extended the documentation regarding the xref + functionality. + +v1.2m [2010/01/18] + - BUGFIX: Changed the default of \citerevsdnamedelim which + used to be a \slash. Now it is empty, because otherwise + it produced two slashes in some circumstances. + - BUGFIX: In footnote-dw with "xref=true", the reference to + the first entry did not work if the first citation of a + parent was cited via a child. This is now fixed. + - BUGFIX: In footnote-dw the punctuation of @collection + entries was wrong when using a prenote in conjunction + with "useeditor=false" or when there was no editor. This + is now fixed. + - The biblatex option "singletitle" can now be used both + with authortitle-dw and footnote-dw. Using this option, a + work"s title is only printed if there is not more than + one work by the author or editor. + - New entry option "pseudoauthor". If set to true, the + author is put in brackets. This is useful for e.g. + editions of works whose authors are not named, but are + known. See the documentation for details. The entry + option does only have effect if the global option + "pseudoauthor" is set to "true". The default value is + "false". + +v1.2l [2009/10/19] + - BUGFIX: With footnote-dw, the references to the first + citations did not work, when refsections were used. This + is now fixed. + - BUGFIX: With xref=true, when no volume was present in an + @inreference entry as well as in its corresponding + @reference entry, the bibstring "vol." was printed. This + is now fixed. + - New option "shortjournal". If set to "true", the field + "shortjournal" is used instead of "journaltitle". This is + useful for journal abbreviations. The default is "false". + - New option "acronyms". If set to "true", shorthands (and + with "shortjournal=true" also the abbreviated journal + titles) are set with the command \mkbibacro, but only if + the entry option "acronym" is set to "true". The default + is "false". + - New option "pageref" (in footnote-dw only). If set to + "true", it adds the page to the footnote number pointing + to the full citation if it is located on a different + page. This option is the same as in the standard styles + "verbose-note" and "verbose-inote". The default is false. + - In footnote-dw, the pointer to the earlier citation is + suppressed if a shorthand exists and the option "citedas" + is true. Note that you can override the global option + "citedas" by setting the entry option "citedas". + +v1.2k [2009/08/22] + Adjustments to biblatex version 0.8e. Note that from this + version on biblatex 0.8e is required, so you have to update + biblatex as well if you would like to use biblatex-dw 1.2k! + - Compound abbreviations (introduced in biblatex-dw 1.2i) + are now separated by the new biblatex command + "\addabthinspace"; this affects only the German + localization in strings like "hg. v." + - The improved concatenation of roles is used. See + biblatex’s release notes for details. + - The new auxiliary macros for ordinals are used. See + biblatex’s release notes for details. + BUGFIXES + - BUGFIX: The option "ibidpage" did not work with + footnote-dw. This is now fixed. + Changed Entry Types + - @inreference + Up to now, this entry type was an alias for + @incollection. From now on, this entry type can be used + for articles in encyclopedias or dictionaries. For + details on how @inreference entries differ from @ + incollection entries, please consult the documentation. + The @reference type remains an alias for @collection. + New Options + - "isrn" and "pagetotal" + These options can take the values "true" and "false". + With these options you can decide whether you want to + have printed the corresponding fields or not. + The default for these options is "false". + - "edstringincitations" + If set to "true", the editor and translator strings are + shown in the citations (not only in the full citations). + The default is "true". + - "series=standard|afteryear" + If set to "afteryear", the series is printed after the + year. This affects the entry types @book, @inbook, + @collection, @incollection, @proceedings, @inproceedings + and @manual. + New Commands + - "seriespunct" + punctuation before the series (of a book etc.). This + punctuation is set inside the parentheses. You can set it + e.g. to "=\addspace" which is common in some fields. The + default is empty, i.e. the series is printed right after + the opening round bracket. + - "sernumstring" + punctuation between series (of a book etc.) and number. + The default is "\addspace". You can easily redefine it, + e.g.: + \renewcommand*{\sernumstring}{% + \addcomma\space\bibstring{volume}\addspace} + This would give "(Name of Series, vol. N)". + - "herenamepunct" + If the "herename" is used, the punctuation before the + herename is determined by "herenamepunct". The default is + \addcomma\space. + Localization Changes + - In German localization, the strings "withcommentator", + "withannotator" and "withintroduction" are shortened as + follows: + -> withcommentator: komm. v. + -> withannotator: erläut. v. + -> withintroduction: eingel. v. + The long versions stay the same as in standard biblatex. + +v1.2j [2009/08/16] + - This is just a bugfix release. The only files changed are + footnote-dw.cbx, CHANGES, README and LIESMICH. + - BUGFIX: Since biblatex version 0.8e, footnote-dw gave an + error (Undefined control sequence: \blx@addperiod). This + is now fixed; thus, biblatex-dw (or rather footnote-dw) + should work with the biblatex versions 0.8e, 0.8f, 0.8g + and 0.8h, but it will not work with earlier versions. + +v1.2i [2009/05/10] + - BUGFIX: When using option "usetranslator=true", the + translator string was not aware of the option + "editorstring". This is now fixed. + - Improved bibmacro "journal+issuetitle" which is now aware + of the option "edbeforetitle". + - The "typeeditor" field is now supported. It can take the + values "editor" and "compiler". This field determines the + editor string after the name of the editor(s). The + abbreviated forms are "ed." for "editor" and "comp." for + "compiler". In German, both strings are the same + ("Herausgeber" or "Hrsg."). + - In English, the "idem" string is now declined (idem, + eadem, idem in singular; eidem, eaedem, eadem in plural) + and no longer abbreviated, even if abbreviate=true is + used. + - Improved the handling of "origfields=true". + - In German, the string "reprint" (Nachdruck) is now + abbreviated as "Ndr.", not as "Nachdr." + - Compound abbreviations are now separated by a thin space + rather than a normal one. At the moment, this affects + only the German localization in strings like "hg. v." + +v1.2h [2009/03/29] + - BUGFIX: The "idem" functionality is now also aware of + page breaks. If the citation is the first on a page (or + double page in twoside mode), the "idem" is suppressed. + If you don’t want this behaviour, you can set the option + "pagetracker=false". + +v1.2g [2009/03/20] + - Option "journalnumber" replaces "journumafteryear". The + option was enhanced and can now take the values + "standard", "afteryear" and "date". The value "standard" + is the same as the old journumafteryear=false, + "afteryear" is the same as the old journumafteryear=true. + The new value "date" assures that the date is printed, + even if the field issue is given (this is not the case in + the standard styles). Additionally, "journalnumber=date" + prints the number before the date, if the date (at least + year and month) is given, but it prints the number after + the year, if only the year is given (i.e. if the date is + not further specified). See the documentation for + details. The default is "journalnumber=standard". + - Improved german-dw.lbx. + - Adjusted the documentation for screen reading. A printer + friendly version can still be compiled from the source. + +v1.2f [2009/02/15] + - Adjustments to biblatex version 0.8c. Note that from + this version on biblatex 0.8c is required, so you have to + update biblatex as well if you would like to use + biblatex-dw 1.2f! + -> The biblatex-dw option "idem" was replaced by the new + biblatex option "idemtracker". The standard setting is + "idemtracker=constrict". If you would like to switch + off the idem functionality, you can use + "idemtracker=false". For more information on the + "idemtracker" option see the biblatex manual. + - New options "doi", "eprint", "isbn" and "issn" which can + take the values "true" and "false". With these options + you can decide whether you want to have printed the + corresponding fields or not. The default for these + options is "false" (as was the standard before). + - New option "idemfont" which can take the values + "smallcaps", "italic", "bold" and "normal". The default + is none which means that the "idem" string is printed in + the font shape of "namefont". + - New option "ibidemfont" which can take the values + "smallcaps", "italic" and "bold". The default is none + which means that the "ibidem" string is printed in normal + font shape. + - New macro "jourvolstring" which introduces the volume of + an article entry. The default is a space (as it was the + case before), but you can adjust it to your needs, e.g.: + \renewcommand*{\jourvolstring}{\addspace vol\adddot\space} + - New macro "journumstring" which introduces the number in + article entries, if the option "journumafteryear" is set + to "true". The default for this macro is a comma, + followed by the bibstring "number" and a non-breakable + space. You can redefine it to your needs, e.g.: + \renewcommand*{\journumstring}{\addspace} + - If there is no volume in an article entry, but the month + field is set, the date is separated from the journal + title by a comma and a space, not only a space. + - Fixed some BUGS concerning the xref functionality. + - Reorganized some bibliography drivers. + - Enhanced the documentation. + +v1.2e [2008/12/19] + - Adjustments to biblatex version 0.8b. Note that from + this version on biblatex 0.8b is required, so you have to + update biblatex as well if you would like to use + biblatex-dw 1.2e! + -> The new biblatex option "usetranslator" is supported. + - BUGFIX: The option "firstfullname" introduced in version + 1.2d had a bug which is now fixed. + - BUGFIX: The "idem" functionality did not work with the + multicite commands. This is now fixed. + - New option "journumafteryear": If set to "true", the + "number" in article entries is printed after the year and + introduced by the bibstring "number". If set to "false", + the default behaviour is used, i.e. "Journaltitle + volume.number (year)". The default is "true". + -> If "journumafteryear" is set "false", the separator + between volume and number in @article entries is now + configurable with the new command "\jourvolnumsep". + The default is a dot (which is also the default in + biblatex). + - When the "volume" is missing, the parenthesis around the + year in @article entries is omitted. + - The multicite command \cites is now also always printed + as footnote in "footnote-dw". + - Some changes in the internal code. + - Extended the documentation and examples. + +v1.2d [2008/12/07] + - BUGFIX: In footnote-dw, the punctuation after the author/ + editor in all citations but the first one was always a + comma and not configurable by \citenamepunct. This is now + fixed. + - New option "firstfullname": when set to "true", the + commands \citeauthor and \textcite (with footnote-dw: + \citeauthor only) give the full name of authors/editors + when they have not been cited before, not only the last + name. The default is "false". + - Support for biblatex version 0.8a including + \MakeSentenceCase. + - Added lbx files with alternative strings for German and + additional strings for both German and English (these + strings were already included, but are now stored in the + language mapping files). + +v1.2c [2008/11/15] + - New option "idembibformat": When using "idembib=true", + you can choose whether you want to have an "idem" string + in the bibliography (idembibformat=idem) or a dash + (idembibformat=dash), as is the standard setting in + biblatex. The standard is "idembibformat=idem". + - Option "idembib" changed: Now "false" means that + subsequent entries of the same author are given with full + names, not a dash (as was the behaviour up to now). The + standard is "idembib=true". + - Improved xref support: The child entry does not only scan + for the "volume" field of the parent entry, but prints + also "location" and "year", if they differ from the + parent entry. + +v1.2b [2008/11/09] + - BUGFIX: With "xref=true", the first (full) citation did + not show the overall pages of @INBOOK, @INCOLLECTION and + @INPROCEEDINGS entries. This is now fixed. + - New option "nolocation". If set to "true", the location + and the publisher are omitted (even if you set + "nopublisher=false"). The default is "false", i.e. the + location is printed. + - The option "shorthandibid" can now also be used on a + per-entry basis. + - Improved xref support: If the "volume" field of a child + entry is set and the "volume" field of the corresponding + parent entry is not set, the volume of the child entry + will be printed immediately before the pages. + +v1.2a [2008/10/19] + - Improved option "edsuper" which also outputs non-integer + editions (though not as superscript, but rather similar + to a note.) + - The field "origpublisher" (new in biblatex 0.8) is now + also supported. + - New option "origfields" which can take the values "true" + (standard) and "false". With this option, you can now + decide, whether you want to have the fields + "origlocation", "origpublisher" and "origyear" to be + printed or not. + -> New option "origfieldsformat=parens|brackets|punct". + The default is "punct" which means that the new + punctuation mark "\origfieldspunct" (default: + \addcomma\space) is used to introduce the reprint + phrase. If you choose "parens" or "brackets", the + reprint phrase is put in parentheses or brackets, + respectively, and the \origfieldspunct is ignored. + - New option "shorthandwidth". With this option you can set + the width of the label in the list of shorthands to any + length (e.g. "3em" or "40pt"). This is useful if you have + very long shorthands. + -> New punctuation command "\shorthandpunct" which is + only exerted when you use the option "shorthandwidth". + Then it is set to a colon. You can redefine this + punctuation command with \renewcommand. + -> New length "\shorthandsep" which is only exerted if + you use the option "shorthandwidth". The length + "\shorthandsep" defines the spacing after the label in + the list of shorthands. + - Improved package warnings. + +v1.2 [2008/10/09] + - Adjustments to biblatex version 0.8. Note that from + version 1.2 on, biblatex-dw needs at least biblatex 0.8, + so you have to update biblatex as well if you would like + to use biblatex-dw 1.2! + -> The new biblatex option "firstinits" is supported. + -> The new macro \bibpagespunct is also supported. + - Added option "xref" which can be set to "true" or + "false". If you want to use the crossref functionality + (introduced in biblatex-dw version 1.1f), you now have to + set "xref=true". See the documentation for details. + - As biblatex 0.8 has changed the handling of the field + "edition", the option "edsuper" had to be adjusted. See + the documentation of biblatex-dw for details. + - Updated the documentation. + +v1.1h [2008/09/24] + - BUGFIX: When using the options "edbeforetitle" and + "edbyidem", the idem funcionality did not work. This is + now fixed. + - Updated documentation (see especially, if you are using + the crossref functionality) and examples. + +v1.1g [2008/09/05] + - The biblatex package option "mincrossrefs" is set to "1" + (instead of "2"). The reason is that otherwise entries + that are using the crossref functionality introduced in + biblatex-dw version 1.1f could be incomplete. + - If both "volumes" and "volume" are present, "volumes" is + now set before "volume". + +v1.1f [2008/08/10] + - BUGFIX: Corrected wrong punctuation when using "idembib= + false" in conjunction with an editor. + - Added crossref functionality (using biblatex’s field + "xref"). This works for authortitle-dw as well as + footnote-dw. For further information please have a look + into the package documentation. + +v1.1e [2008/06/13] + - BUGFIX: The option "edbeforetitle" caused a problem + when used together with the "idem" functionality + (which is the default). This is now fixed. + - Enhanced the "idem" functionality: If a citation with + shorthand precedes a citation of the same author or + editor without shorthand, the string "idem" is now + replaced by the author’s or editor’s name, since this + information cannot be gathered from the shorthand + citation and thus could mislead the reader. + +v1.1d [2008/06/05] + - BUGFIX: The global option "oldauthor" which was + introduced in version 1.1c caused an erroneous behaviour + when used together with "idembib=true" (which is the + default). This is now fixed. + - New option "editorstring" which can take the values + "parens", "brackets" and "normal"; the default is + "parens". This option sets the string "editor" + (abbreviated "ed.") in parentheses or in brackets, or + just puts the string (with a preceding comma) after the + editor name. + - New option "edbeforetitle" which can take the values + "true" and "false"; the default is "false". When set to + "true", the editor in @INCOLLECTION and @INPROCEEDINGS + entries will be typeset before the booktitle ("... in: + Editor (ed.): Booktitle ...") rather than afterwards + ("... in: Booktitle, ed. by Editor ..."). + - Small correction in the terse version of the List of + Shorthands concerning the punctuation after authors/ + editors. + - Added missing bibliography drivers for option "edbyidem". + +v1.1c [2008/05/29] + - BUGFIX: With the option "idem=false", the author of a + first citation who was cited immediately before with + another work lacked the forename. + - BUGFIX: The option "edbyidem=false" produced a + superfluous "ed. by" string. + - BUGFIX: Small punctuation issue with repeated citations + and "herename". + - New option "namefont" which can take the values + "smallcaps", "italic" and "bold". The default is none, + i.e. authors and editors are set in normal font shape. + With "useprefix=true", this option also affects the + name prefix. + - New option "firstnamefont" which can take the values + "smallcaps", "italic" and "bold". This also affects the + name prefix (with "useprefix=false") and the name + affix. + - The option "oldauthor" is now also available as global + option in order to disable the feature. If you set + "oldauthor=false" globally, every entry option + "oldauthor=true" is ignored. Thus, you can set the + fontname for every author with global options, + independent of entry options. + +v1.1b [2008/04/13] + - BUGFIX: When using \parencite with "footnote-dw", + additional parentheses (e.g. enclosing the string + "editor") were lost; they are now replaced by brackets. + - BUGFIX: In "footnote-dw", the normal \cite command + always produced a capital letter at the beginning. This + is fixed now. + - Fixed a small punctuation error in connection with + "herename". + - New command \titleaddonpunct for the punctuation before + titleaddon, booktitleaddon and maintitleaddon. The + default is a period now (not a comma, as before). + +v1.1a [2008/02/09] + - BUGFIX: When using the commands "mancite" or + "citereset", the "idem" functionality was not reset. + This is now fixed. + - New option "edsuper". If set to "true", the edition is + printed as superscript number (not as ordinal number) + straight ahead of the year. The default is "false". + - New option "firstfull" (only in "authortitle-dw"). If + set to "true", the first citation is a fullcite. The + default is "false". + - Option "citedas" is now also available for + "authortitle-dw" and used when "firstfull" is set to + "true". + +v1.1 [2008/02/01] + - BUGFIX: The "citedas" functionality did not work if the + first citation of an entry was introduced by "idem". + - New option "terselos" introduced for a terse version of + the list of shorthands (default is "true"). + - New option "herename" introduced to specify if the term + \enquote{here} should prelude the pages of a fullcite + (or, with "footnote-dw", also the first citation of an + entry) which has a non-empty \texttt{pages}-field. + - New option "nopublisher" introduced to suppress the + publisher. The default value is "true", but if you want + to have the publisher printed, you now can set the + option "nopublisher=false". + - If the field "origlocation" is given, it will be set + together with "origyear", whereas "location" and "year" + are appended in parentheses, preluded by the bibstring + "reprint". + - The options "annotation" and "library" are now also + usable with the style "footnote-dw". The annotations + and library information are only printed in the + bibliography (if there is one), not in the citations or + in the list of shorthands. + - Updated documentation. + +v1.01 [2008/01/20] + - BUGFIX: The "pagetracker" functionality did not work + properly with the style "footnote-dw" + - Excluded ISBN/ISSN and DOI also from entry types + booklet, inproceedings, manual, misc, periodical, + proceedings, and report + - Punctuation corrections for the same entry types + concerning the series+number + +v1.0 [2008/01/14] + - Initial release diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/LIESMICH b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/LIESMICH new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..efe17b60f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/LIESMICH @@ -0,0 +1,168 @@ +biblatex-dw 2016/12/06 v1.7 +Copyright (c) 2008-2016 Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de> + +************************************************************ + +Inhalt der Datei LIESMICH + 1. Kurzbeschreibung + 2. Installationshinweise + 3. Benutzung + 4. Dokumentation + 5. Versionsgeschichte + 6. Danksagung + 7. Lizenz + 8. Dateien + + + 1. Kurzbeschreibung + ------------------- + + biblatex-dw ist eine kleine Sammlung von styles für das + Paket biblatex von Philipp Lehman. Sie ist gedacht zum + Zitieren im geisteswissenschaftlichen Bereich und bietet + dafür einige Funktionen, die über die Standardfunktionen + von biblatex hinausgehen. biblatex-dw baut vollständig auf + biblatex auf und kann nicht ohne biblatex benutzt werden! + + Anregungen und Verbesserungsvorschläge sind jederzeit + willkommen. Wenn Sie einen Fehler finden, erstellen Sie + bitte einen Bug-Report (am besten inklusive Minimalbeispiel) + auf http://sourceforge.net/p/biblatex-dw/tickets/milestone/Bugs. + FÜr Verbesserungsvorschläge verwenden Sie ein Feature-Request unter + http://sourceforge.net/p/biblatex-dw/tickets/milestone/Features. + + + 2. Installationshinweise + ------------------------ + + biblatex-dw ist in den Distributionen MiKTeX und TeX Live + enthalten und kann mit deren Paketmanagern bequem + installiert werden. Wenn Sie stattdessen eine manuelle + Installation durchführen, so gehen Sie wie folgt vor: + Entpacken Sie die zip-Datei in den $LOCALTEXMF-Ordner ihres + Systems. Aktualisieren Sie anschließend die 'filename + database' ihrer TeX-Distribution. Für weitere Informationen + schauen Sie bitte in die Dokumentation Ihrer Distribution. + + + 3. Benutzung + ------------ + + Die hier angebotenen Zitierstile werden wie die Standard- + Stile beim Laden des Pakets biblatex eingebunden: + + \usepackage[style=authortitle-dw]{biblatex} + bzw. + \usepackage[style=footnote-dw]{biblatex} + + Für zusätzliche Optionen, die von den Stilen bereitgestellt + werden, wird auf die Dokumentation von biblatex-dw sowie + auf die Beispiele 'de-authortitle-dw' und 'de-footnote-dw' + im Ordner 'examples' verwiesen. + + + 4. Dokumentation + ---------------- + + Die deutschsprachige Dokumentation von biblatex-dw findet + sich in der Datei 'de-biblatex-dw.pdf'. Diese Datei ist für + den Bildschirm optimiert. Eine Druckversion lässt sich aber + leicht aus der Datei 'de-biblatex-dw.tex' generieren, indem + man die Zeile + \input{biblatex-dw-screen} + auskommentiert (also das Kommentarzeichen % davorstellt) + und stattdessen die Zeile + \input{biblatex-dw-print} + nicht auskommentiert (also das Kommentarzeichen % vor + dieser Zeile löscht). + Achtung: Möglicherweise sind die Schriften nicht auf Ihrem + System vorhanden. Für die Dokumentation wurden folgende + Schriften verwendet: + * Linux Libertine als Brotschrift + * Linux Biolinum (Teil des Libertine-Pakets) für + Überschriften + * BeraMono als Festbreitenschrift + Diese Schriften sind frei verfügbar. Wenn Sie die Schriften + nicht installiert haben oder nicht installieren wollen, + verwenden Sie einfach andere Schriften. Die entsprechenden + Einstellungen finden Sie in der Datei + 'biblatex-dw-preamble.tex'. + + + 5. Versionsgeschichte + --------------------- + + siehe Datei CHANGES + + + 6. Danksagung + ------------- + + Ohne biblatex gäbe es natürlich auch kein biblatex-dw, + deshalb gebührt mein Dank zuvorderst Philipp Lehman, auch + für die vielen Hilfestellungen und Hinweise, die er mir + immer wieder gegeben hat. Für Anregungen, Hinweise und + das Auffinden und Melden von Fehlern bedanke ich mich + außerdem bei folgenden Personen: + * Thomas Demmel * Simon Flossmann + * Till A. Heilmann * Dominic Kobelt + * Denis Maier * Rolf Niepraschk + * Philipp Pilhofer * Jan Hauke Rahm + * Ondrej Salvet * Johann Konrad Schwarz + * Salome Södergran * Jonas Stein + * Matthias Steinbrink * Philipp Stephani + * Bernhard Tempel * Herbert Voss + * Dominik Weber * Christian Weitert + * Christofer Zwanzig * Дмитрий Гордеев + + + 7. Lizenz + --------- + + Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project + Public Lizenz, entweder Version 1.3 oder (nach Ihrer Wahl) + jede spaetere Version, verteilt und/oder verändert werden. + Die neueste Version dieser Lizenz finden Sie unter + http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt. Version 1.3 (oder + eine neuere) ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX + Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter. + + Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Betreuungs-Status 'maintained' + (betreut). + + Der aktuelle Betreuer dieses Werkes ist Dominik Waßenhoven. + + + 8. Dateien + ---------- + + Dieses Werk (bzw. Paket) besteht aus folgenden Dateien: + + * LIESMICH % diese Datei (inkl. Lizenz) + * README % diese Datei in englisch + * CHANGES % Versionsgeschichte (englisch) + * standard-dw.bbx + * standard-dw.cbx + * authortitle-dw.bbx + * authortitle-dw.cbx + * footnote-dw.bbx + * footnote-dw.cbx + * english-dw.lbx % Englische Sprachdatei + * german-dw.lbx % Deutsche Sprachdatei + * biblatex-dw.pdf % englische Dokumentation + * biblatex-dw.tex % englische Dokumentation + * biblatex-dw-preamble.tex % Präambel der Dokumentation + * biblatex-dw-print.tex % Einstellungen für Druckversion + * biblatex-dw-screen.tex % Einst. für Bildschirmversion + * de-biblatex-dw.pdf % deutsche Dokumentation + * de-biblatex-dw.tex % deutsche Dokumentation + * de-authortitle-dw.pdf % deutsches Beispiel + * de-authortitle-dw.tex % deutsches Beispiel + * de-footnote-dw.pdf % deutsches Beispiel + * de-footnote-dw.tex % deutsches Beispiel + * en-authortitle-dw.pdf + * en-authortitle-dw.tex + * en-footnote-dw.pdf + * en-footnote-dw.tex + * examples-dw.bib + * de-examples-dw.bib % bib-Datei für die Beispiele diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/README b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/README new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e0535eadd2 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/README @@ -0,0 +1,161 @@ +biblatex-dw 2016/12/06 v1.7 +Copyright (c) 2008-2016 Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de> + +************************************************************ + +Contents of README + 1. Package description + 2. Installation + 3. Usage notes + 4. Documentation + 5. History + 6. Acknowledgements + 7. Licence + 8. Files + + + 1. Package description + ---------------------- + + biblatex-dw is a small collection of styles for the + biblatex package. It was designed for citations in the + Humanities and offers some features that are not provided + by the standard biblatex styles. biblatex-dw is dependend + on biblatex and cannot be used without it! + + Any suggestions concerning this package are highly + appreciated. If you should find an error, please file a + bug report at: + http://sourceforge.net/p/biblatex-dw/tickets/milestone/Bugs + If you think that a feature is missing, please file a feature + request at: + http://sourceforge.net/p/biblatex-dw/tickets/milestone/Features + + + 2. Installation + --------------- + + biblatex-dw is part of the distributions MiKTeX and + TeX Live. Thus, you can easily install it using the + respective package manager. If you would like to install + biblatex-dw manually, do the following: Extract the tds.zip + archive to the $LOCALTEXMF directory of your system. + Refresh your filename database. For further information, + please see the documentation of your LaTeX distribution. + + + 3. Usage notes + -------------- + + The styles are loaded as the biblatex standard styles: + + \usepackage[style=authortitle-dw]{biblatex} + or + \usepackage[style=footnote-dw]{biblatex} + + If you want to learn more about the styles and their + additional options, please consult the package + documentation as well as the examples 'en-authortitle-dw' + and 'en-footnote-dw' in the 'examples' folder. + + + 4. Documentation + ---------------- + + The English documentation of biblatex-dw can be found in + the file 'biblatex-dw.pdf'. This file is intended for + viewing on a computer screen. A printable version can be + compiled from the file 'biblatex-dw.tex'. You only have to + comment the line + \input{biblatex-dw-screen} + (i.e. put a % sign in front of it) and uncomment the line + \input{biblatex-dw-print} + (i.e. delete the % sign at the beginning of this line). + Note: The fonts may not be installed on your system. The + following fonts were used for the documentation: + * Linux Libertine in running text + * Linux Biolinum (part of the Libertine package) for + headings + * BeraMono as typewriter font + These fonts are freely available. If you do not have these + fonts installed in your system or do not want to install + them, you can easily use another font. The relevant + settings can be found in the file + 'biblatex-dw-preamble.tex'. + + + 5. History + ---------- + + see file CHANGES + + + 6. Acknowledgements + ------------------- + + First of all, I would like to thank Philipp Lehman not only + for his wonderful package 'biblatex', but also for his + helping hand and advice in creating these styles. + Furthermore, for numerous suggestions, contributions and + bug reports I would like to thank the following people: + * Thomas Demmel * Simon Flossmann + * Till A. Heilmann * Dominic Kobelt + * Denis Maier * Rolf Niepraschk + * Philipp Pilhofer * Jan Hauke Rahm + * Ondrej Salvet * Johann Konrad Schwarz + * Salome Södergran * Jonas Stein + * Matthias Steinbrink * Philipp Stephani + * Bernhard Tempel * Herbert Voss + * Dominik Weber * Christian Weitert + * Christofer Zwanzig * Дмитрий Гордеев + + + 7. Licence + ---------- + + This work may be distributed and/or modified under the + conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either + version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later + version. The latest version of this license is in + http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt and version 1.3 or + later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version + 2005/12/01 or later. + + This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. + + The Current Maintainer of this work is Dominik Waßenhoven. + + + 8. Files + -------- + + This work consists of the following files: + + * README % this file, including licence + * LIESMICH % the README in German + * CHANGES % version history + * standard-dw.bbx + * standard-dw.cbx + * authortitle-dw.bbx + * authortitle-dw.cbx + * footnote-dw.bbx + * footnote-dw.cbx + * english-dw.lbx % English language mapping file + * german-dw.lbx % German language mapping file + * biblatex-dw.pdf % English documentation + * biblatex-dw.tex % English documentation + * biblatex-dw-preamble.tex % Preamble for the documentation + * biblatex-dw-print.tex % Settings for printable version + * biblatex-dw-screen.tex % Settings for screen version + * de-biblatex-dw.pdf % German documentation + * de-biblatex-dw.tex % German documentation + * de-authortitle-dw.pdf + * de-authortitle-dw.tex + * de-footnote-dw.pdf + * de-footnote-dw.tex + * en-authortitle-dw.pdf % English example + * en-authortitle-dw.tex % English example + * en-footnote-dw.pdf % English example + * en-footnote-dw.tex % English example + * examples-dw.bib % bib for English examples + * de-examples-dw.bib diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw-preamble.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw-preamble.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..19bee12119 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw-preamble.tex @@ -0,0 +1,239 @@ +%!TEX encoding = UTF-8 Unicode + +% biblatex-dw +% Copyright (c) Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>, 2016 +% +% This file is the preamble for the documentation of +% biblatex-dw (both the English and the German version) + +%%%%% biblatex-dw Version %%%%% version of biblatex-dw %%%%% +\newcommand{\biblatexdwversion}{1.7} +\newcommand{\biblatexdwdate}{\printdate{2016-12-06}} +\newcommand{\mindestanforderung}{3.3}% minimum biblatex version +\newcommand{\testversion}{3.6}% tested biblatex version +\newcommand{\biberversion}{2.6}% tested biber version +\newcommand{\screenversion}{} +\newcommand{\TOC}{} +\newcommand{\lizenz}{} + +%%%%% Kodierung %%%%% Encoding %%%%% +\usepackage{fontspec,xltxtra,xunicode} + +%%%%% Inhaltsverzeichnis %%%%% Table of Contents %%%%% +\setcounter{tocdepth}{2} + +%%%%% Schriftarten %%%%% Fonts %%%%% +\usepackage[osf]{libertine} +\defaultfontfeatures{Mapping=tex-text} +\setmonofont[Scale=MatchLowercase]{Bitstream Vera Sans Mono} +\setkomafont{sectioning}{\sffamily}% Überschriften +\renewcommand{\headfont}{\normalfont\itshape}% Kolumnentitel + +%%%%% Fußnoten %%%%% Footnotes %%%%% +\deffootnote% + {2em}% Einzug des Fußnotentextes; bei dreistelligen Fußnoten evtl. vergrößern + {1em}% zusätzlicher Absatzeinzug in der Fußnote + {% + \makebox[2em]% Raum für Fußnotenzeichen: ebenso groß wie Einzug des FN-Textes + [r]% Ausrichtung des Fußnotenzeichens: [r]echts, [l]inks + {\libertineLF% keine Mediävalziffern als Fußnotenmarke + \thefootnotemark% + \hspace{1em}% Abstand zw. FN-Zeichen und FN-Text + }% + } +\renewcommand{\footnoterule}{}% keine Zeile zw. Text und Fußnoten + +%%%%% Kopf- und Fußzeilen %%%%% page header and footer %%%%% +\usepackage{scrpage2} +\pagestyle{scrheadings} +\clearscrheadfoot + +%%%%% Farben %%%%% Colors %%%%% +\usepackage{xcolor} +\definecolor{dkblue}{rgb}{0 0.1 0.5}% dark blue +\definecolor{dkred}{rgb}{0.85 0 0}% dark red +\definecolor{pyellow}{rgb}{1 0.97 0.75}% pale yellow + +%%%%% Kompakte Listen %%%%% Compact lists %%%%% +\usepackage{enumitem} +\setlist{noitemsep} +\setitemize{leftmargin=*,nolistsep} +\setenumerate{leftmargin=*,nolistsep} + +%%%%% Datumsformat %%%%% Date format %%%%% +\usepackage{isodate} +\numdate[arabic]% 15. 9. 2008 +\isotwodigitdayfalse% führende Nullen weglassen + +%%%%% Spracheinstellungen %%%%% Language settings %%%%% +\usepackage{babel} +\newcommand{\versionname}{Version} +\iflanguage{english}{\renewcommand{\versionname}{version}}{} +\iflanguage{german}{\monthyearsepgerman{\,}{\,}}{} +\iflanguage{ngerman}{\monthyearsepgerman{\,}{\,}}{} +\iflanguage{english}{\isodate}{} + +%%%%% Verschiedene Pakete %%%%% Miscellaneous packages +\usepackage{microtype}% optischer Randausgleich +\usepackage{dtk-logos}% Logos wie \BibTeX etc. +\usepackage{xspace} +\usepackage{textcomp}% Text-Companion-Symbole +\usepackage{manfnt}% für das Achtung-Symbol +\usepackage{marginnote} +\reversemarginpar + +%%%%% Auslassungspunkte %%%%% dots %%%%% +\let\ldotsOld\ldots +\renewcommand{\ldots}{\ldotsOld\unkern} + +%%%%% Zwischenraum vor und nach \slash %%%%% Spacing around \slash %%%%% +\let\slashOld\slash +\renewcommand{\slash}{\kern.05em\slashOld\kern.05em} + +%%%%% Anführungszeichen %%%%% quotation marks %%%%% +\usepackage[babel,german=guillemets]{csquotes} + +%%%%% Listings %%%%% listings %%%%% +\usepackage{listings} +\lstset{% + frame=none, +% backgroundcolor=\color{pyellow}, + language=[LaTeX]TeX, + basicstyle=\ttfamily\small, + commentstyle=\color{red}, + keywordstyle=, % LaTeX-Befehle werden nicht fett dargestellt + numbers=none,%left/right +% numberstyle=\tiny\lnstyle, +% numbersep=5pt, +% numberblanklines=false, + breaklines=true, +% caption=\lstname, + xleftmargin=5pt, + xrightmargin=5pt, + escapeinside={(*}{*)}, + belowskip=\medskipamount, + prebreak=\mbox{$\hookleftarrow$}% übernommen vom scrguide (KOMA-Script) +} + +%%%%% biblatex %%%%% biblatex %%%%% +\usepackage[% + bibencoding=utf8, + style=authortitle-dw, +% bernhard=true,% + journalnumber=date +]{biblatex} +\addbibresource{examples/examples-dw.bib} + +%%%%% Hyperref %%%%% Hyperref %%%%% +\usepackage{hyperref} +\hypersetup{% + colorlinks=true,% + linkcolor=dkblue,% Links + citecolor=dkblue,% Links zu Literaturangaben + urlcolor=dkblue,% Links ins Internet + pdftitle={biblatex-dw},% + pdfsubject={Dokumentation des LaTeX-Pakets biblatex-dw},% + pdfauthor={Dominik Waßenhoven},% + pdfstartview=FitH,% + bookmarksopen=true,% + bookmarksopenlevel=2,% + pdfprintscaling=None,% +} + +%%%%% Kurzbefehle %%%%% shortening commands %%%%% +\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}} +\newcommand{\option}[1]{\textcolor{dkblue}{#1}} +\newcommand{\wert}[1]{\textcolor{dkblue}{\enquote*{#1}}} +\newcommand{\paket}[1]{\textsf{#1}} +\newcommand{\xbx}[1]{\enquote{#1}} + +\makeatletter +\newcommand{\tmp@beschreibung}{} +\DeclareRobustCommand\beschreibung[2][]{% + \bgroup + \def\tmp@beschreibung{#1}% + \ifx\tmp@beschreibung\@empty + % leerer Fall + \label{#2}% + \marginpar{\footnotesize\sffamily\textcolor{dkblue}{#2}}% + \else + % unleerer Fall + \label{#1}% + \marginpar{\footnotesize\sffamily\textcolor{dkblue}{#2}}% + \fi + \egroup +} +\newcommand{\tmp@beschreibungcmd}{} +\DeclareRobustCommand\beschreibungcmd[2][]{% + \bgroup + \def\tmp@beschreibungcmd{#1}% + \ifx\tmp@beschreibungcmd\@empty + % leerer Fall + \label{#2}% + \marginpar{\footnotesize\sffamily\textcolor{dkblue}{\textbackslash #2}}% + \else + % unleerer Fall + \label{#1}% + \marginpar{\footnotesize\sffamily\textcolor{dkblue}{\textbackslash #2}}% + \fi + \egroup +} +\makeatother + +\newcommand{\bl}{\paket{biblatex}} +\newcommand{\bldw}{\paket{biblatex-dw}} + +% \optlist[nur bei xy]{Option}{Wert} -> Option (Wert) +% \optset[nur bei xy]{Option}{Wert} -> Option=Wert +% \opt{Option} +% \optnur[nur bei xy]{Option} +% \befehl{Befehlsname}{Definition}{Beschreibung} +% \befehlleer{Befehlsname}{Beschreibung} +\newcommand{\optlist}[3][]{\item[\option{#2}](#3) \emph{#1}\hfill% + {\footnotesize\sffamily\seite{\pageref{#2}}\\}} +\newcommand{\optset}[3][]{\item[\option{#2=#3}] \emph{#1}\\} +\newcommand{\opt}[1]{\item[\option{#1}]~\hfill% + {\footnotesize\sffamily\seite{\pageref{#1}}\\}} +\newcommand{\optnur}[2][]{\item[\option{#2}]\emph{#1}\hfill% + {\footnotesize\sffamily\seite{\pageref{#2}}\\}} +\newcommand{\befehl}[3]{\item[\option{\cmd{#1}}]\texttt{#2}\\{#3}} +\newcommand{\befehlmitverweis}[2]{\item[\option{\cmd{#1}}]~\hfill% + {\footnotesize\sffamily\seite{\pageref{#1}}}\\{#2}} +\newcommand{\befehlleer}[2]{\item[\option{\cmd{#1}}]\emph{(\iflanguage{english}{empty}{leer})}\\{#2}} +\newcommand{\biblstring}[3]{% + \item[\option{#1}]\texttt{#2}\hspace{0.4em}\textbullet\hspace{0.4em}\texttt{#3}} +\newcommand{\feldformat}[3]{\item[{\option{\cmd{DeclareFieldFormat\{{#1}\}\{}\cmd{#2\}}}}]~\\#3} +\newcommand{\eintragstyp}[3]{\item[{\texttt{@#1}}]#2 {\small(in \bl{}: + \iflanguage{ngerman}{wie}{same as} \texttt{@#3})}\hfill% + {\footnotesize\sffamily\seite{\pageref{@#1}}}} + +\newcommand{\achtung}{\marginnote{\footnotesize\dbend}} + +\newcounter{beispiel} +\newcommand{\beispiel}{% + \iflanguage{english}{Example}{Beispiel}} +\newcommand{\seite}[1]{% + \iflanguage{english}{page~#1}{Seite~#1}} + +\newcommand{\Mindestanforderung}{% + \iflanguage{english}% + {\textcolor{dkred}{needs at least version~\mindestanforderung{} of \bl{}}}% + {\textcolor{dkred}{benötigt mindestens Version~\mindestanforderung{} von \bl{}}}} + +\newcommand{\Testversion}{% + \iflanguage{english}% + {~and was tested with \bl{} version~\testversion{} and \paket{biber} version~\biberversion{}}% + {~und wurde mit Version~\testversion{} von \bl{} sowie Version~\biberversion{} von \paket{biber} getestet}} + +%%%%% Titelei %%%%% title page %%%%% +\author{Dominik Waßenhoven} +\title{biblatex-dw} +\date{Version~\biblatexdwversion, \biblatexdwdate} + +%%%%% Worttrennungen %%%%% Hyphenation %%%%% +\usepackage[htt]{hyphenat} +\hyphenation{ + Stan-dard-ein-stel-lun-gen +} + +\nonfrenchspacing
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw-print.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw-print.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2c54dddd09 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw-print.tex @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +%!TEX encoding = UTF-8 Unicode +% biblatex-dw +% Copyright (c) Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>, 2016 +% +% This file configures the documentation +% of biblatex-dw to be printed + +%%%%% KOMA-Script Optionen %%%%% KOMA-Script options %%%%% +\KOMAoptions{ + paper=a4 + ,headinclude=true +% ,fontsize=12pt,DIV=calc + ,fontsize=11pt,DIV=9 +} + +%%%%% Mindestanforderung %%%%% Minimum requirement +\renewcommand{\Mindestanforderung}{% + \iflanguage{english}% + {needs at least version~\mindestanforderung{} of \bl{}}% + {mindestens Version~\mindestanforderung{} von \bl{}}} + +%%%%% Kopf- und Fußzeilen %%%%% page header and footer %%%%% +\ihead{% + \iflanguage{english}% + {biblatex-dw documentation}% + {Dokumentation von biblatex-dw}} +\ohead{\versionname~\biblatexdwversion, \biblatexdwdate}% Kopf rechts +\cfoot{\pagemark} + +%%%%% Lizenzhinweis %%%%% note on licence %%%%% +\renewcommand{\lizenz}{% + \vfill + \begin{quote} + \small + \itshape + \iflanguage{english}{% + This manual is part of the \bldw\ package. It may be distributed and\slash + or modified under the conditions of the \enquote{\LaTeX\ Project Public + License}. For more details, please have a look at the + \enquote{\texttt{README}} file. + }{% + Dieses Handbuch ist Teil des Pakets \bldw. Es darf nach den Bedingungen + der \enquote{\LaTeX\ Project Public Licence} verteilt und\slash oder + verändert werden. Für weitere Informationen schauen Sie bitte in die Datei + \enquote{\texttt{LIESMICH}}. + }% + \end{quote} + \clearpage} + +%%%%% Inhaltsverzeichnis %%%%% Table of Contents %%%%% +\let\TOC\tableofcontents + +%%%%% Keine farbigen Links %%%%% No coloured links %%%%% +\hypersetup{% + colorlinks=false,% + %linkcolor=dkblue,% Links + %citecolor=dkblue,% Links zu Literaturangaben + %urlcolor=dkblue,% Links ins Internet + %pdftitle={biblatex-dw},% + %pdfsubject={Dokumentation des LaTeX-Pakets biblatex-dw},% + %pdfauthor={Dominik Waßenhoven},% + %pdfstartview=FitH,% +% bookmarksopen=true,% +% bookmarksopenlevel=0,% + %pdfprintscaling=None,% +} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw-screen.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw-screen.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d7002df124 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw-screen.tex @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +%!TEX encoding = UTF-8 Unicode +% biblatex-dw +% Copyright (c) Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>, 2016 +% +% This file configures the documentation +% of biblatex-dw to be viewed on a screen + +%%%%% Satzspiegel %%%%% type area %%%%% +% übernommen aus dem scrguide von Markus Kohm +% adopted from Markus Kohm's scrguide +\usepackage{geometry} +\geometry{papersize={140mm,210mm},% + includehead,includemp,reversemp,marginparwidth=2em,% + vmargin={2mm,4mm},hmargin=2mm}% + +%%%%% Kopf- und Fußzeilen %%%%% page header and footer %%%%% +% zu großen Teilen übernommen aus dem scrguide von Markus Kohm +% for the most part adopted from Markus Kohm's scrguide +\makeatletter + \setlength{\@tempdimc}{\oddsidemargin}% + \addtolength{\@tempdimc}{1in}% + \setheadwidth[-\@tempdimc]{paper}% +\makeatother +\ohead{\smash{% + \rule[-\dp\strutbox]{0pt}{\headheight}\pagemark\hspace{2mm}}}% +\ihead[% + {\smash{\colorbox{pyellow}{% + \makebox[\dimexpr\linewidth-2\fboxsep\relax][l]{% + \rule[-\dp\strutbox]{0pt}{\headheight}% + \makebox[2em][r]% + biblatex-dw, \versionname~\biblatexdwversion, \biblatexdwdate}}}}]% + {\smash{\colorbox{pyellow}{% + \makebox[\dimexpr\linewidth-2\fboxsep\relax][l]{% + \rule[-\dp\strutbox]{0pt}{\headheight}% + \makebox[2em][r]% + biblatex-dw, \versionname~\biblatexdwversion, \biblatexdwdate}}}}% + +%%%%% Hinweis zur Bildschirmversion %%%%% note on screen version %%%%% +\renewcommand{\screenversion}{% + \begin{quote} + \small + \color{dkred} + \sffamily + \iflanguage{english}{% + This is the screen version of the \bldw{} documentation. + If you would like to have a printable version, please have a look + at the \enquote{\texttt{README}} file. + }{% + Dies ist die Bildschirmversion der Dokumentation von \bldw{}. + Wenn Sie eine Druckversion haben möchten, schauen Sie bitte in die + Datei \enquote{\texttt{LIESMICH}}. + }% + \end{quote}} + +%%%%% Lizenzhinweis %%%%% note on licence %%%%% +\renewcommand{\lizenz}{% + \vfill + \begin{quote} + \small + \itshape + \iflanguage{english}{% + This manual is part of the \bldw\ package. It may be distributed and\slash + or modified under the conditions of the \enquote{\LaTeX\ Project Public + License}. For more details, please have a look at the + \enquote{\texttt{README}} file. + }{% + Dieses Handbuch ist Teil des Pakets \bldw. Es darf nach den Bedingungen + der \enquote{\LaTeX\ Project Public Licence} verteilt und\slash oder + verändert werden. Für weitere Informationen schauen Sie bitte in die Datei + \enquote{\texttt{LIESMICH}}. + }% + \end{quote}} + +%%%%% Kein Inhaltsverzeichnis %%%%% No Table of Contents %%%%% +\renewcommand{\TOC}{\clearpage}
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bc9bf9f977 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw.pdf diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ddb76a24d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw.tex @@ -0,0 +1,1364 @@ +%!TEX TS-program = xelatex +%!TEX encoding = UTF-8 Unicode + +% biblatex-dw +% Copyright (c) Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>, 2013 + +\documentclass[english]{scrartcl} +\input{biblatex-dw-preamble}% preamble +%\input{biblatex-dw-print}% printable version +\input{biblatex-dw-screen}% screen version + +%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% +%%%%% Begin of Document %%%%% +%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% +\begin{document} +\maketitle +\thispagestyle{empty} + +\abstract{\noindent \bldw{} is a small collection of styles for the + \bl{} package. It was designed for citations in the + Humanities and offers some features that are not provided + by the standard \bl{} styles. \bldw{} is dependent + on \bl{}~-- version~\biblatexdwversion{} \Mindestanforderung{}\Testversion. + Please note also the requirements of the \bl{} package itself.} + +\lizenz +\screenversion +\TOC + +\section{Introduction} +\subsection{Installation} +\bldw{} is part of the distributions MiK\TeX{}\footnote{Website: \url{http://www.miktex.org}.} +and \TeX{}~Live\footnote{Website: \url{http://www.tug.org/texlive}.}~-- thus, you +can easily install it using the respective package manager. If you would like to +install \bldw{} manually, do the following: +Extract the archive \texttt{biblatex-dw.tds.zip} to the \texttt{\$LOCALTEXMF} directory of + your system.\footnote{If you don't know what that is, have a look at +\url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=tds} or +\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/tds/tds.html}.} Refresh your filename database. +Here is some additional information from the UK \TeX\ FAQ: +\begin{itemize} + \item \href{% + http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=install-where}{% + Where to install packages} + \item \href{% + http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=inst-wlcf}{% + Installing files \enquote{where \LaTeXTeX\ can find them}} + \item \href{% + http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=privinst}{% + \enquote{Private} installations of files} +\end{itemize} + +\subsection{Usage} +The styles are loaded in the same way as the \bl{} standard styles: + +\begin{lstlisting} +\usepackage[style=authortitle-dw]{biblatex} +\end{lstlisting} +or +\begin{lstlisting} +\usepackage[style=footnote-dw]{biblatex} +\end{lstlisting} +The styles are built in a very entangled way which means that the combination of a \bldw\ style with another style is not possible without fail. +For an overview of the styles see the examples \enquote{en-authortitle-dw} + and \enquote{en-footnote-dw} in the \texttt{examples} folder. + +\subsection{Global options and entry options} +The options provided by \bl{} are also available with \bldw{}. +The additional options provided by \bldw{} are described on the next pages. +There is a general difference between global options and entry options: +global options are valid for all references of a document; they are set +either as optional arguments when loading \bl{} or in a separate config +file (\texttt{biblatex.cfg}). Entry options are set in the field +\texttt{options} of an entry in the bib file. Entry options can sometimes override +global options for the respective entry. + +\subsection{Frequently asked Questions (FAQ)} +I answered some frequently asked questions concerning \bl{} and \bldw{} and made them +available online:\\ +\url{http://biblatex.dominik-wassenhoven.de/faq.shtml?en} + +\subsection{Development} +\bldw{} is an open source project hosted at \href{http://sourceforge.net}{sourceforge.net}. The code (also of the latest, not released version) can be downloaded.\footnote{\url{http://sourceforge.net/p/biblatex-dw/code}.} At sourceforge.net you have also the possibility to file bug reports (if possible, including a minimal example)\footnote{\url{http://sourceforge.net/p/biblatex-dw/tickets/milestone/Bugs}.} and feature requests.\footnote{\url{http://sourceforge.net/p/biblatex-dw/tickets/milestone/Features}.} + +\section{The \xbx{authortitle-dw} style} +This style is based on the standard \xbx{authortitle} style. +Besides some changes in punctuation, there are the following differences: + +\subsection{Appearance in the bibliography} +\begin{itemize} + \item The\beschreibung{namefont} font shape of authors and editors can be set by the options + \option{namefont} and\beschreibung{firstnamefont} \option{firstnamefont} which can take the values + \wert{smallcaps}, \wert{italic}, \wert{bold} and \wert{normal}. + If you set \option{useprefix=true}, \option{namefont} affects also + the name prefix (i.\,e. \enquote{von}, \enquote{de} etc.). If \option{% + useprefix=false} is set (which is the default), the name prefix depends + on the option \option{firstnamefont} which in every case affects the + name suffix (the \enquote{junior} part). + \item If\beschreibung{oldauthor} you set the \option{namefont}, but nevertheless need some + of the names being typeset in upright shape (e.g. medieval or + antique authors), you can add \texttt{options\,=\,\{oldauthor=true\}} + to the respective entry of your + bib file. If you have to switch back to the normal appearance also + for entries with this \texttt{oldauthor} flag, you can set the global + option \option{oldauthor=false} in order to override the entry option. + \item There\beschreibung{oldbookauthor} is also the entry option \option{oldbookauthor} + which is the same as \option{oldauthor} but for the bookauthor. This is + useful for \texttt{@inbook} entries representing, e.g., an introduction to an + edition of a work by an author that should not be typeset in the usual font + for last names. This option can be set on a per entry basis and can be + disabled with the global option \option{oldauthor=false}. + \item The\beschreibung{idemfont} font shape of the \enquote{idem} string (see below) can be set by + the option \option{idemfont} which can take the values + \wert{smallcaps}, \wert{italic}, \wert{bold} and \wert{normal}. If you + do not use this option, the \enquote{idem} string is printed in the + same font shape as indicated by the option \option{namefont}. + \item The\beschreibung{ibidemfont} font shape of the \enquote{ibidem} string (see below) can be set by + the option \option{ibidemfont} which can take the values + \wert{smallcaps}, \wert{italic}, \wert{bold} and \wert{normal}. The + default value is \wert{normal}. + \item The\beschreibung{acronyms}\beschreibung{acronym} + \texttt{shorthands} and journal abbreviations (\texttt{shortjournal}) + can be set with the command \cmd{mkbibacro} (default for this command: + \textsc{smallcaps}). For that, you need to set the global option + \option{acronyms} to \wert{true} \emph{and} the entry option \option{acronym=true}. + If you want to customize the command \cmd{mkbibacro}, see section + \enquote{\nameref{mkbibacro-anpassen}} on page~\pageref{mkbibacro-anpassen}. + \item The\beschreibung{idembib} option \option{idembib} provides a possibility to substitute + identical authors\slash editors in subsequent entries in the + bibliography by an idem phrase. If set to \wert{false}, the names are + given also in subsequent entries of the same authors\slash editors. + Using \option{idembib=true}, the substitution is enabled. The format + is then set by the option\beschreibung{idembibformat} \option{idembibformat} which can take the + values \wert{idem} to get \enquote{idem} instead of the name(s) and + \wert{dash} to get a dash (---). In some languages, the idem phrase + is gender-specific. The gender for authors\slash editors has to be + given in the \texttt{gender} field of your bib file (see the \bl{} + documentation for details). The default value for \option{idembib} is + \wert{true}, the default value for \option{idembibformat} is + \wert{idem}. + \item When\beschreibung{edbyidem} \texttt{author} and \texttt{editor} are the same in + \texttt{@inbook}, \texttt{@incollection} or \texttt{@inreference} entries, the name is not + repeated but substituted by the string \enquote{idem}. This feature + is controled by the option \option{edbyidem} which can be set to + \wert{true} or \wert{false}; the default value is \wert{true}. + \item The\beschreibung{editorstring} option \option{editorstring} can take the values + \wert{parens}, \wert{brackets} and \wert{normal}; the default is + \wert{parens}. This option sets the string \enquote{editor} + (abbreviated \enquote{ed.}) in parentheses or in brackets. If you set + the option to \wert{normal}, the editor string is not + surrounded by parentheses or brackets. Instead, a comma is added after + the editor's name. + If \option{usetranslator=true} is used, the setting for + \option{editorstring} is also valid for the string + \enquote{translator} (abbreviated \enquote{trans.}). + \item The\beschreibung{editorstringfont} option \option{editorstringfont} + determines the font used for the editor string (and + translator string). With \wert{normal}, + the normal font is used, with \wert{namefont}, the setting for the option + \option{namefont} is also used for the editor string. The default value for this + option is \wert{normal}. + \item Using\beschreibung{pseudoauthor} the entry option \option{pseudoauthor}, the author can be put + in brackets or omitted. This is useful for editions of works whose authors + are not named, but are known, for instance. If the global option \option{pseudoauthor} + is set to \wert{true} (and the entry option \option{pseudoauthor} is used), the author of this + entry is printed. The new commands \cmd{bibleftpseudo} and \cmd{bibrightpseudo} + are used to enclose the author. These commands are empty by default. If you would like to enclose + the author by brackets, for instance, you have to redefine the commands: + \begin{lstlisting} +\renewcommand*{\bibleftpseudo}{\bibleftbracket} +\renewcommand*{\bibrightpseudo}{\bibrightbracket} + \end{lstlisting} + If the global option + \option{pseudoauthor} is set to \wert{false}, the author of entries + with the entry option \option{pseudoauthor} are not printed at + all. The default value for the global option is \wert{true} + (i.e. the behaviour is the same regardless of the entry + option \option{pseudoauthor}). + \item With\beschreibung{nopublisher} default settings, the \texttt{publisher} is not printed, only + \texttt{location} and \texttt{date}. If you would like to have the + publisher printed, you have to set the option + \option{nopublisher=false}. + \item You\beschreibung{nolocation} can also suppress the location with \option{nolocation=true}. In + this case, also the publisher is omitted (regardless of the setting of + \option{nopublisher}). The default setting is \wert{false}. + \item The\beschreibung{pagetotal} fields \texttt{doi}, \texttt{eprint}, \texttt{isbn}, \texttt{isrn}, + \texttt{issn} and \texttt{pagetotal} are not printed with the default + settings. They can however be switched on with the options + \option{doi=true}, \option{eprint=true}, \option{isbn=true} (which is also valid + for the fields \texttt{isrn} and \texttt{issn}) or \option{pagetotal=true}, + respectively. + \item The\beschreibung{origfields} option \option{origfields} lets you decide, whether you would like + to have the fields \texttt{origlocation}, \texttt{origpublisher} and + \texttt{origdate} printed or not; the standard is \wert{true}. If you + use the option and the field \texttt{origlocation} is set, the + \enquote{orig} fields will be printed. In this case, the fields + \texttt{location}, \texttt{publisher} and \texttt{date} are appended + in parentheses, preluded by the bibstring \texttt{reprint}. Note that + the fields \texttt{publisher} and \texttt{origpublisher} are only + printed, if the option \option{nopublisher=false} is given. + \achtung Note also that the \texttt{edition} field applies to the + original edition, as reprints are normally not released in more than + one edition, but re-issue a specific edition. If the option + \option{edsuper} is used, the edition is printed as superscript number + ahead of \texttt{origdate}. + \item With\beschreibung{origfieldsformat} the option \option{origfieldsformat}, which can take the values + \wert{parens}, \wert{brackets} and \wert{punct}, you can set the + appearance of the reprint details (with \option{origfields=true}). The + values \wert{parens} and \wert{brackets} put them in parentheses or + brackets, respectively. The default is \wert{punct}; this means that + the reprint details are introduced by the punctuation command + \cmd{origfieldspunct}, which is preset to a comma. + \item The punctuation before \texttt{titleaddon}, \texttt{booktitleaddon} + and \texttt{maintitleaddon} is controlled by the new command + \cmd{titleaddonpunct}. The default is a period. + \item With\beschreibung{edsuper} \option{edsuper=true}, + the edition is printed as superscript number (not as ordinal number) + just before the year. The default value for this option is + \wert{false}.\\ + \achtung Note that this works only, if you have integers in the field + \texttt{edition}, and nothing but integers. Information like + \enquote{5th, revised and expanded edition} in the \texttt{edition} + field will be printed as usual, not as a superscript number. + Additionally, a warning will appear. If you would like to use the + option \option{edsuper} for one of your documents, you should ensure + that you put only integers into the \texttt{edition} field and use the + field \texttt{note} for more detailed information on editions. + \item With\beschreibung{editionstring} \option{editionstring=true}, the + bibliography string \enquote{edition} will be added to the + \texttt{edition} field, even if it is not an integer. Thus, + you can type, e.g., + \begin{lstlisting} +edition = {2., revised} + \end{lstlisting} + in your bib file and you will get \enquote{2., revised ed.} + \option{editionstring=false} will give the additional bibliography + string only if there is an integer in the \texttt{edition} field + (which is \bl's standard behaviour). + The default for this option is \wert{false}. + \item If\beschreibung{shortjournal} the option \option{shortjournal} is set to \wert{true}, the + field \texttt{shortjournal} is used instead of \texttt{journaltitle}. + This is useful for journal abbreviations. + \item If the \texttt{volume} field is not present for a journal, the + \texttt{year} is \emph{not} printed in parenthesis: \enquote{Journal + name 2008}. But if the \texttt{month} field is set (or the \texttt{date} field + contains a month, e.g. \texttt{2008-03}), the date is + separated from the journal title by an additional comma. + \item The\beschreibung{journalnumber} option \option{journalnumber} allows you to adjust the position of + a journal's \texttt{number}: with \wert{standard}, the behaviour of the + standard styles is used, but you can configure the separator between + \texttt{volume} and \texttt{number} with the new command + \cmd{jourvolnumsep} (default: \cmd{adddot}). With \wert{afteryear} the + number is printed after the \texttt{year} and introduced by the + command \cmd{journumstring}: \enquote{Journal name 28 (2008), no.~2}. + The value \wert{date} assures that the date is printed, even if the + field \texttt{issue} is given (this is not the case in the standard + styles). + Additionally, \option{journalnumber=date} prints the number before the + date, if the date (at least year and month) is given, but it prints + the number after the year, if only the year is given (i.e. if the date + contains only a year). See section~\ref{journalnumberdate} on + page~\pageref{journalnumberdate} for details. The default for + \option{journalnumber} is \wert{standard}. + \item The command \cmd{journumstring} introduces the journal number. + The standard is \wert{, no.~}. The command can be redefined, + e.g.: + \begin{lstlisting} +\renewcommand*{\journumstring}{\addspace} + \end{lstlisting} + \item The command \cmd{jourvolstring} introduces the journal volume. + The standard is a space. The command can be redefined, e.g.: + \begin{lstlisting} +\renewcommand*{\jourvolstring}{% + \addspace vol\adddot\space} + \end{lstlisting} + \item The\beschreibung{series} option \option{series} affects the position of the \texttt{series} + field, possible values are \wert{afteryear}, \wert{beforeedition} and \wert{standard}. This affects the entry types \texttt{@book}, \texttt{@inbook}, + \texttt{@collection}, \texttt{@incollection}, \texttt{@proceedings}, + \texttt{@inproceedings} and \texttt{@manual}. + If set to \wert{afteryear} or \wert{beforeedition}, the series will be put after the year or before the edition. + The standard value for this option is \wert{standard}, the series will be printed before the location. + \item The\beschreibung{seriesformat} option \option{seriesformat} can + take the values \wert{standard} and \wert{parens}. If set to + \wert{parens}, \texttt{series} and \texttt{number} (of a book etc.) + will be printed in parentheses, otherwise without (as is the biblatex + standard behaviour). The default value for this option is \wert{parens}. + \item The command \cmd{seriespunct} is the punctuation before the + \texttt{series} (of a book etc.). With \option{seriesformat=parens}, + this punctuation is set inside the + parentheses. You can set it e.g. to \wert{=\cmd{addspace}} which is + common in some fields. The default is empty, i.e.\ the series is + printed right after the opening round bracket. + \item The command \cmd{sernumstring} is the punctuation between the + \texttt{series} (of a book etc.) and its \texttt{number}. The default + is \wert{\cmd{addspace}}. You can easily redefine it, e.g.: + \begin{lstlisting} +\renewcommand*{\sernumstring}{% + \addcomma\space\bibstring{volume}\addspace} + \end{lstlisting} + This would give \enquote{(Name of Series, vol. N)}. + \item Using\beschreibung{shorthandinbib} option \option{shorthandinbib=true}, + the shorthands are printed in the bibliography, enclosed by brackets, preceding + the respective entry. The appearance is controlled by the field format + \enquote{shorthandinbib} which can of course be redefined. If you want to get + rid of the default brackets, for instance, you should do the following: + \begin{lstlisting} +\DeclareFieldFormat{shorthandinbib}{#1} + \end{lstlisting} + In this case there will only be a space between shorthand and bibliography entry, + so that you should redefine the punctuation as well which is printed by the + command \cmd{shorthandinbibpunct}. You could alter it to print, for example, an equal + sign, but you should use \cmd{nopunct} in order to avoid superfluous punctuation: + \begin{lstlisting} +\renewcommand*{\shorthandinbibpunct}{% + \addspace=\nopunct\addspace} + \end{lstlisting} + \item The\beschreibung{annotation} option \option{annotation} is introduced. If it is set to + \wert{true}, the field \texttt{annotation} will be printed in + \textit{\small small italic} typeface at the end of the entry. The + default value for this option is \wert{false}. + You can alter the appearance by redefining the following command: + \begin{lstlisting} +\renewcommand{\annotationfont}{\small\itshape} + \end{lstlisting} + \item The\beschreibung{library} option \option{library} is introduced. If it is set to + \wert{true}, the field \texttt{library} will be printed in + {\small\sffamily small sans serif} typeface at the end of the entry. + The default value for this option is \wert{false}. + You can alter the appearance by redefining the following command: + \begin{lstlisting} +\renewcommand{\libraryfont}{\small\sffamily} + \end{lstlisting} + \item If both \option{annotation} and \option{library} are set to + \wert{true}, the contents of the \texttt{annotation} field is placed + before the contents of the \texttt{library} field. + \item In\beschreibung{@inreference} + normal \bl{}, the entry type \texttt{@inreference} is an alias for + \texttt{@incollection} entries. In \bldw{}, this entry type can be used + for articles in encyclopedias or dictionaries. The output is similar to + that of an \texttt{@incollection}, but there are some differences: + \begin{itemize} + \item The title is enclosed in quotes. + \item The bibliography string \enquote{inrefstring} (standard: + \enquote{article}\slash\enquote{art.}) is put in front + of the title. + \item The location is not printed. + \item With a \texttt{volume} present, the output is e.g. \enquote{in: + Encyclopedia 2 (1990), p. 120.} + \end{itemize} + The \texttt{@reference} entry type still is an alias to \texttt{@collection}. + Thus, you can use either \texttt{@collection} or \texttt{@reference} for + a work of reference. + \item Using the\beschreibung{inreference} option \option{inreference=full}, + \texttt{@inreference} entries are printed always in full, but are omitted + from the bibliography. Note that when using \option{xref=false}, you have to + cite the corresponding \texttt{@reference} entry manually (e.g. with \cmd{nocite}) + if you wish to include the \texttt{@reference} entry in the bibliography. The + \option{inreference} option complies with both \option{ibidtracker} and + \option{idemtracker}. The default for this option is \wert{normal}. + + \item In\beschreibung{@review} + normal \bl{}, the entry type \texttt{@review} is an alias for + \texttt{@article} entries. In \bldw{}, this entry type can be used + for reviews. The output is similar to \texttt{@article}, with the + following differences: + \begin{itemize} + \item The title is enclosed in quotes. + \item The bibliography string \enquote{reviewof} (standard: + \enquote{Review of}) is put in front of the title. + \item Instead of manually entering the data for the reviewed work in the \texttt{title} + field of the \texttt{@review} entry, it is also possible to add a reference in the field + \texttt{xref}. The entry with the \BibTeX\ key given in the \texttt{xref} field + will be cited. Using this approach, options like \option{namefont} or + \option{firstfull} are considered also for the reviewed work. + \end{itemize} +\end{itemize} + +\subsection{Appearance in citations} +\begin{itemize} + \item In citations of the same author\slash editor as the + immediately preceding citation the name is replaced by + the string \enquote{idem} unless the citation is the first + one on the current page. This feature is controled by the + \bl{} option \option{idemtracker} which is set to \wert{constrict}. If + you would like to switch off the idem functionality, you can use + \option{idemtracker=false}. For more information on the + \option{idemtracker} option see the \bl{} manual. + \item Immediately repeated citations are replaced by the string + \enquote{ibidem} unless the citation is the first one on + the current page. This behaviour can be suppressed with + the \bl{} option \option{ibidtracker=false}. In this case, + the \enquote{idem} functionality + is still active as long as you do not set the option + \option{idemtracker=false}. + \item The\beschreibung{shorthandibid} option \option{shorthandibid} controls whether + immediately repeated citations with a \texttt{shorthand} + should also be replaced by the string \enquote{ibidem} or + not. Possible values are \wert{true} and \wert{false}, + the default value is \wert{true}. Note that this option has + no effect if you set the option \option{ibidtracker=false}. + Note also that this behaviour can be overridden + for each entry by using \texttt{options\,=\,\{shorthandibid=true\}} or + \texttt{options\,=\,\{shorthandibid=false\}}, respectively. + \item With\beschreibung{addyear} the option \option{addyear}, the year of the + publication will be added after the title. The year appears in + parentheses. The default for this option is \wert{false}. + \item With\beschreibung{omiteditor} \option{useeditor=false} and \option{omiteditor=true}, the editor + in citations will be omitted. The same applies to the short citations in + the bibliography, if the xref functionality is in use. With + \option{useeditor=true}, the option \option{omiteditor} has + no effect. The default for this option is \wert{false}. + \item With\beschreibung[edstringincitations]{edstring\-incitations} + the option \option{edstringincitations=true}, the editor and + translator strings are shown in citations (not only in the full + citations). The appearance depends on how the option \option{editorstring} + is set. The default value for this option is \wert{true}. + \item If you use the \cmd{textcite} command with an entry that + lacks author and editor, \bl{} will give you a warning + and output the entry's key in bold face. + \item The\beschreibung{firstfull} option \option{firstfull} delivers a full citation for the first + occurence of an entry. The default value for this option is + \wert{false}. + \item If\beschreibung{citedas} a \texttt{shorthand} is given and the option \option{firstfull} + is set to \wert{true}, the addition \enquote{henceforth + cited as~\ldots} will be added to the citation. This behaviour can + be influenced by the option \option{citedas}, which can take + the values \wert{true} or \wert{false}; the default + is \wert{true}. Note that this behaviour can also be overridden + for each entry by using \texttt{options\,= \{citedas=true\}} or + \texttt{options\,=\,\{citedas=false\}}, respectively. + \item The\beschreibung{citepages} + option \option{citepages} allows you to suppress pages or page ranges + in full citations, if the field \texttt{pages} is given: + \option{citepages=permit} allows duplicates, i.e. the \texttt{pages} + field as well as the \texttt{postnote} are printed; + with \option{citepages=suppress} the \texttt{pages} field of the full citations + will be suppressed in any case, thus only the \texttt{postnote} is printed; + \option{citepages=omit} omits the \texttt{pages} only if the \texttt{postnote} + is a number; + \option{citepages=separate} always prints the \texttt{pages} field, but separates + the \texttt{postnote} by using the string \enquote{here}, if it is a number. + In this case, the \emph{bibliography string} \enquote{thiscite} is used. + The standard value for this option is \wert{separate}. + A small illustrating example which uses the following \cmd{cite} commands: + \begin{lstlisting} +\cite{key} +\cite[a note]{key} +\cite[125]{key} + \end{lstlisting} + % + \option{citepages=permit}: + \begin{quote} + Author: Title, in: Book, pp.\,100--150. + + Author: Title, in: Book, pp.\,100--150, a note. + + Author: Title, in: Book, pp.\,100--150, p.\,125. + \end{quote} + % + \option{citepages=suppress}: + \begin{quote} + Author: Title, in: Book. + + Author: Title, in: Book, a note. + + Author: Title, in: Book, p.\,125. + \end{quote} + % + \option{citepages=omit}: + \begin{quote} + Author: Title, in: Book, pp.\,100--150. + + Author: Title, in: Book, pp.\,100--150, a note. + + Author: Title, in: Book, p.\,125. + \end{quote} + % + \option{citepages=separate}: + \begin{quote} + Author: Title, in: Book, pp.\,100--150. + + Author: Title, in: Book, pp.\,100--150, a note. + + Author: Title, in: Book, pp.\,100--150, here p.\,125. + \end{quote} + \item The\beschreibung{citeauthor} \option{citeauthor} option controls the name format for + the \cmd{citeauthor} command; it can take the values \wert{namefont}, + \wert{namefontfoot} and \wert{normalfont}. With \option{citeauthor=namefont} the + same format as set by the option \option{namefont} is used. This is the default + behaviour. With \option{citeauthor=normalfont} the normal font is always used for + \cmd{citeauthor}, regardless of the \option{namefont} option. With + \option{citeauthor=namefontfoot} the \option{namefont} format is used if the + \cmd{citeauthor} command is inside a footnote, otherwise the normal font is used. + \item The\beschreibung{citeauthorname} option \option{citeauthorname} controls the + appearance of names when using the the commands \cmd{citeauthor} and \cmd{textcite}. + With \option{citeauthorname=firsfull}, the name is given in full when cited for the + first time; from the second citation onwards, only the last name is printed. This + works also with different citations from the same author, regardless whether you + only use \cmd{citeauthor} or \cmd{textcite} or both. With + \option{citeauthorname=full} the name is always given in full, with + \option{citeauthorname=normal} only the given name is printed. + The default value for this option is \wert{normal}. + \item If\beschreibung{singletitle} you use the \bl{} option \option{singletitle=true}, the title of + a cited work is only printed if there is more than one work of the same + author. See the biblatex documentation for details. +\end{itemize} + +\subsection{List of Shorthands} +\begin{itemize} + \item The\beschreibung{terselos} list of shorthands contains only author (or editor), title and, + if necessary, booktitle or maintitle. This information should be + sufficient in order to find the full bibliographical data in the + bibliography. This feature is controled by the + option \option{terselos} which can be set to \wert{true} or + \wert{false}; the default value is \wert{true}. + \item Using\beschreibung{shorthandwidth} the option \option{shorthandwidth}, you can define the width of + the labels in the list of shorthands. This is especially useful when + you have very long shorthands. The option can take any length + definition for example \wert{40pt} or \wert{3em}. \achtung If you use + the option \option{shorthandwidth}, the spacing after the label is + reduced and a colon is inserted after every label. The punctuation + mark can be redefined with the command \cmd{shorthandpunct} and the + spacing is assigned by the new length \cmd{shorthandsep}. The standard + values (as soon as \option{shorthandwidth} is used) are: + \begin{lstlisting} +\renewcommand{\shorthandpunct}{\addcolon} +\setlength{\shorthandsep}{3pt plus 0.5pt minus 0.5pt} + \end{lstlisting} +\end{itemize} + +\section{The \xbx{footnote-dw} style} + +This style is similar to \xbx{verbose-inote}. It is based on the +\xbx{authortitle-dw} style. Thus, you can use all options defined in +\xbx{authortitle-dw}; the only exceptions are the options \option{addyear}, +\option{firstfull} and \option{inreference}. +Apart from that, there are the following differences between \xbx{footnote-dw} and +\xbx{authortitle-dw}: +\medskip +\begin{itemize} + \item Citations are \emph{only} possible inside footnotes. Citations + which are not inside footnotes will automatically be turned into + a \cmd{footcite}. The only exception is \cmd{textcite} which will + give the author's name in the text and a footnote citation; when used inside + a footnote, \cmd{textcite} will give the author's name, followed by the + citation in parenthesis. + \item The first citation will give a full reference, following citations + will only use \texttt{author} and \texttt{shorttitle} (or + \texttt{title}, if no \texttt{shorttitle} is given) with the + addition \enquote{see n.~\enquote{N}}, where \enquote{N} is + the number of the footnote where the first citation occured. + \item The\beschreibung{pageref} option \option{pageref} known from \bl's \xbx{verbose-note} and + \xbx{ver\-bose-inote} styles is also available. When set to \wert{true}, + the page number is added to the footnote number pointing to the full + citation if it is located on a different page. This option defaults to + \wert{false}. + \item When using \cmd{parencite} outside a footnote, the parentheses + will be dropped and a \cmd{footcite} will be used instead. Inside + footnotes, the \cmd{parencite} command will work as expected. The + addition \enquote{see n.~\ldots} will be surrounded by brackets + instead of parentheses. + \item If one or both of the options \option{annotation} and \option{library} + are set to \wert{true}, the annotations and library information + are only printed in the bibliography (if there is one), but not in the + first citations and in the list of shorthands. +\end{itemize} + +\section{Crossref functionality} +\label{xreffunctionality} +\subsection{How it works} +The\beschreibung{xref} crossref functionality of \bldw{} provides a possibility for +dependent papers to refer to a parent entry. In order to use it, you +have to create a parent entry of the type \texttt{@book}, \texttt{@collection} +or \texttt{@proceedings}. Each child entry belonging to this parent entry can +refer to its \BibTeX\ key using the field \texttt{xref}. This works for entries +of the type \texttt{@inbook}, \texttt{@incollection} and \texttt{@inproceedings}. + +Here is a small example: +\begin{lstlisting} +@collection{parent, + editor = {(*\emph{Editor}*)}, + title = {(*\emph{Book Title}*)}, + location = {(*\emph{Location}*)}, + date = {2008} +} +@incollection{child, + author = {(*\emph{Author}*)}, + title = {(*\emph{Title of the Contribution}*)}, + xref = {parent}% reference +} +\end{lstlisting} +When an \texttt{@incollection} entry is cited and the option \option{xref} is set +to \wert{true}, the cited entry takes data of the entry with +the \BibTeX\ key \texttt{parent}. If it is available, the \texttt{shorthand} +is used. Otherwise, the fields \texttt{author}\slash\texttt{editor} and \texttt{title} +(or \texttt{shorttitle}, if available) are printed. Thus, the reader is +referred to the corresponding parent entry in the bibliography and in this way +is provided with all relevant data. + +With multiple child entries, it would be possible to have the data entered only +once (and thus, also the possibility to have typos would be reduced). But you +have to keep in mind that you then \emph{always} have to use this crossref +mechanism. If you need a document with all data in every single entry, the corresponding +information (\texttt{editor}, \texttt{booktitle} etc.) would be missing. It is +therefore better to enter all relevant data for \texttt{@incollection}, \texttt{@inbook} +and \texttt{@inproceedings} entries including the \BibTeX{} key of the parent +entry in the \texttt{xref} field. + +The behaviour of the \texttt{xref} field is affected by the package option +\option{mincrossrefs}, which has the default setting \wert{2}. That means, if only +one article of a collection is cited, the collection would not be included in the +bibliography (if it is not cited explicitly) and thus the article would be incomplete. +For that reason, the option \option{mincrossrefs} is set to \wert{1} when using +\option{xref=true}. + +The default setting does not use this crossref functionality. You can also switch +it off with \option{xref=false}. In both cases, the \texttt{xref} field takes effect +only insofar as the parent entry is only included in the bibliography if at least +two of his child entries are cited (\option{mincrossrefs=2}). You can of course set +the value for \option{mincrossrefs} to whatever you want or need. + +\achtung{}The reference only works with the field \texttt{xref}. The field \texttt{crossref} +does \emph{not} work together with this crossref functionality! Instead of simply +copying the missing fields from the parent entry into the child entry, as it is +done in standard \BibTeX\ and its crossref method, the crossref functionality +presented here uses a special citation which provides the relevant data of the +parent entry. + +\subsection{Peculiarities} +\subsubsection{\xbx{footnote-dw} specifics} +The crossref functionality also works with \xbx{footnote-dw}. When using the option +\option{xref=true}, citing the parent entry for the first time sets a \cmd{label} +for the parent entry. It does not matter if the parent entry is cited itself or via +a child entry. When a (second) child entry is cited, a short citation of the parent +entry is given along with a reference to the footnote of the first citation in which the +parent entry appeared. + +\subsubsection{Multi-volume \enquote{parents}} +If a parent enry is a multi-volume work, the child entry normally refers to +a specific volume of the parent entry, not to the entire work. In order to +take that into account, \bldw{} checks if the \texttt{volume} field is given +in the child entry. If so, it checks if the parent entry has a \texttt{volume}, +too. Only if the parent entry has no \texttt{volume} specified, the volume of +the child entry is printed immediately before the pages.% +\footnote{The reason why it is not checked if the content of both \texttt{volume} +fields are the same is the following: As soon as the \texttt{volume} field of +the parent entry is given, it represents a single volume of a multi-volume work. +If we now have a child entry with a different \texttt{volume}, it can be considered +as a fault. At least no scenario came to my mind where a child entry needs a different +volume as the correpsonding parent entry.} In this case, it will also be checked +if the data in the \texttt{date} field match. If they don't match (e.g. when the +multi-volume work was published in several years), the year will be printed +additionally. Moreover, it will finally be checked if the data in the field +\texttt{location} (or \texttt{address}) match. If they don't match (e.g. when the +multi-volume work was published at different places, but the single volume referred to +by the child entry was published only at one place), the location will be printed +immediately before the year. + +\section{Survey of options} +\subsection{Global options} +Global options are valid for all references of a document; they are set +either as optional arguments when loading \bl{} or in a separate config +file (\texttt{biblatex.cfg}). The value in parentheses shows the default. + + \optlist{acronyms}{false} + Only if set to \wert{true}, the entry option \option{acronym} will be regarded. + \optlist[\xbx{authortitle-dw} only]{addyear}{false} + If set to \wert{true}, the year of the publication will be set after the title + in citations, appearing in parentheses. + \optlist{annotation}{false} + The field \texttt{annotation} is printed at the end of the bibliography + item. + \optlist{citeauthor}{namefont} + Specifies the font shape of the authors' names when the \cmd{citeauthor} + command is used. Possible values are \wert{namefont}, \wert{normalfont} and + \wert{namefontfoot}. + \optlist{citeauthorname}{normal} + Controls the name output when using \cmd{citeauthor} or \cmd{textcite}. With + \wert{firstfull} the full name is printed at first citation, at all + subsequent citations only the last name is printed. With \wert{full} the full name is + always printed, whereas \wert{normal} always gives the given name only. + \optlist{citedas}{true} + The first citation (in \xbx{authortitle-dw} only if the option + \option{firstfull} is used) is followed by the string + \enquote{henceforth cited as} whenever a \texttt{shorthand} is given. + \optlist{citepages}{separate} + Specifies if the pages of a fullcite or of the first citation (\xbx{authortitle-dw}: + only with option \option{firstfull}) of an entry with \texttt{pages} field + will be printed or not. + \optlist{edbyidem}{true} + \enquote{ed. by idem} instead of \enquote{ed. by \emph{Editor}}. + \optlist{editionstring}{false} + Adds the string \enquote{ed.} to the edition, regardless of the content of the + \texttt{edition} field. + \optlist{editorstring}{parens} + Sets the editor string (with \option{usetranslator=true} also the + translator string) in parentheses (\wert{parens}) or brackets + (\wert{brackets}). If set to \wert{normal}, the editor string is + put after the editor's name and preceded by a comma. + \optlist{editorstringfont}{normal} + The editor\slash translator strings are typeset either in normal font (\wert{normal}) or + in the font used by \option{namefont} (\wert{namefont}). + \optlist{edstringincitations}{true} + In citations, the editor string (with \option{usetranslator=true} + also the translator string) is put after the editor's name (and the + translator's name, where appropriate). + \optlist{edsuper}{false} + The edition is printed as superscript number straight ahead of the year. + \optlist[\xbx{authortitle-dw} only]{firstfull}{false} + The first citation is printed with full reference. + \optlist{firstnamefont}{normal} + Specifies the font shape of the first names of authors and editors as well + as of name affixes and (if \option{useprefix} is set to \wert{false}) of + name prefixes. Possible values are \wert{smallcaps}, \wert{italic}, + \wert{bold} and \wert{normal} (which is the default and means that the + normal font shape is used). + \optlist{ibidemfont}{normal} + Specifies the font shape of the \enquote{ibidem} string. + Possible values are \wert{smallcaps}, \wert{italic}, \wert{bold} and + \wert{normal} (which is the default and means that the normal font shape + is used). + \optlist{idembib}{true} + \enquote{Idem} or \enquote{---} instead of names for the same + authors\slash editors of subsequent entries in the bibliography. + \optlist{idembibformat}{idem} + Only for \option{idembib=true}: With \wert{idem} the names are substituted + by \enquote{Idem}, with \wert{dash} they are substituted by + a\,---\,well\,---\,dash (\enquote{---}). + \optnur[no default]{idemfont} + Specifies the font shape of the \enquote{idem} string. + Possible values are \wert{smallcaps}, \wert{italic}, \wert{bold} and + \wert{normal}. If this option is not set, the font shape indicated by the + option \option{namefont} is used (this is the default behaviour). + \optlist[\xbx{authortitle-dw} only]{inreference}{normal} + If set to \wert{full}, \texttt{@inreference} entries are printed in full + in the citations, but are omitted from the bibliography. + \optlist{journalnumber}{standard} + Position of a journal's \texttt{number}: with \wert{standard} as in the + standard styles, with \wert{afteryear} after the \texttt{year}, introduced + by the bibliography string \enquote{number} (\enquote{no.}), and with + \wert{date} dependent on the date settings (see + section~\ref{journalnumberdate} on page~\pageref{journalnumberdate}). + \optlist{library}{false} + The field \texttt{library} is printed at the end of the bibliography item. + \optlist{namefont}{normal} + Specifies the font shape of the last names of authors and editors as well + as of name prefixes (if \option{useprefix} is set to \wert{true}). + Possible values are \wert{smallcaps}, \wert{italic}, \wert{bold} and + \wert{normal} (which is the default and means that the normal font shape + is used). + \optlist{nopublisher}{true} + The publisher is not printed. + \optlist{nolocation}{false} + If set to \wert{true}, the location is not printed. In this case, the + publisher is omitted, too, even if \option{nopublisher} is set to + \wert{false}. + \optlist{oldauthor}{true} + If set to \wert{false}, the entry options \option{oldauthor} and + \option{oldbookauthor} are ignored. + \optlist{omiteditor}{false} + If set to \wert{true}, the editor is omitted in citations. + \optlist{origfields}{true} + With \option{origfields=true}, the fields \texttt{origlocation} and + \texttt{origdate} (as well as \texttt{origpublisher}, if + \option{nopublisher=false} is given) are printed. + \optlist{origfieldsformat}{punct} + Specifies the appearance of the reprint details (with + \option{origfields=true}): in parentheses, in brackets, or introduced by + \cmd{origfieldspunct} (preset to a comma). + \optlist[\xbx{footnote-dw} only]{pageref}{false} + In addition to the footnote number of the first citation, the page number + is referenced. + \optlist{pagetotal}{false} + Whether the field \texttt{pagetotal} is printed or not. + \optlist{pseudoauthor}{true} + If set to \wert{false}, the author of entries with entry option + \option{pseudoauthor} are \emph{not} printed. + \optlist{series}{standard} + Position of a work's \texttt{series}: with \wert{standard} as in the + standard styles, with \wert{afteryear} after the \texttt{year}, with \wert{beforeedition} before the \texttt{edition}. + \optlist{seriesformat}{parens} + Format of a work's \texttt{series}: with \wert{standard} as in the + standard styles, with \wert{parens} in parentheses. + \optlist{shorthandibid}{true} + Immediately repeated citations of entries with \texttt{shorthand} are + replaced by \enquote{ibid.} + \optlist{shorthandinbib}{false} + If set to \wert{true}, the shorthands will be printed ahead of the bibliography + entries. + \optnur[no default]{shorthandwidth} + Defines the width of the label in the list of shorthands. Additionally, + after every label the length \cmd{shorthandsep} (the default is 3pt) and + the command \cmd{shorthandpunct} (the default is a colon) are executed. + \optlist{shortjournal}{false} + With \option{shortjournal=true} the field \texttt{shortjournal} is used + instead of \texttt{journaltitle}. If \texttt{shortjournal} is not set, + the field \texttt{journaltitle} (and, if available, \texttt{journalsubtitle}) + is used. + \optlist{singletitle}{false} + If set to \wert{true}, the title in citations is omitted, unless there is more + than one work of the same author. This does not apply to full citations. + \optlist{terselos}{true} + A terse version of the list of shorthands is used. + \optlist{xref}{false} + The crossref functionality is used and the option \option{mincrossrefs} is set + to \wert{1}. See section~\ref{xreffunctionality} on page~\pageref{xreffunctionality} + for details. + +\subsection{Entry options} +Entry options are set in the field \texttt{options} of an entry in the bib file. +They may override global options for the respective entry. + \opt{acronym} + The \texttt{shorthands}, with \option{shortjournal=true} also the abbreviated + journal titles (\texttt{shortjournal}), are set with the command \cmd{mkbibacro}, + if the global option \option{acronyms} is set to \wert{true}. + \opt{citedas} + The string \enquote{henceforth cited as} in first citations + (\xbx{authortitle-dw}: with option \option{firstfull} only) of entries + with a \texttt{shorthand} is enforced (\wert{true}) or suppressed + (\wert{false}). + \opt{oldauthor} + The \texttt{author} is not set in the font shape chosen by \option{namefont}, + if the global option \option{oldauthor} is set to \wert{true}. + \opt{oldbookauthor} + The \texttt{bookauthor} is not set in the font shape chosen by \option{namefont}, + if the global option \option{oldauthor} is set to \wert{true}. + \opt{pseudoauthor} + The author is printed between \cmd{bibleftpseudo} and \cmd{bibright\-pseudo}, + if the global option \option{pseudoauthor} is set to \wert{true}. With the + global option \option{pseudoauthor=false}, the author of entries with the + entry option \option{pseudoauthor=true} are not printed at all. + \opt{shorthandibid} + Independent of the global option \option{shorthandibid}, the shorthand of + this entry is replaced by \enquote{ibidem} (\wert{true}) or is not + replaced (\wert{false}). + +\subsection{\texorpdfstring{\bl}{biblatex} options} +The following list shows \bl{} options which are set to a specific value by \bldw{}. You can find more information on these options in the \bl{} documentation. + + \optset{autocite}{footnote} + The command \cmd{autocite} is replaced by \cmd{footcite}. + \optset{citetracker}{true} + The \emph{citation tracker} which checks if a work was already cited before + is activated globally. + \optset{doi}{false} + Whether the field \texttt{doi} is printed or not. + \optset{eprint}{false} + Whether the field \texttt{eprint} is printed or not. + \optset{ibidtracker}{constrict} + In immediately repeated citations of the same work, the citation is + replaced by \enquote{ibid.}; text and footnotes are treated separately. + \optset{idemtracker}{constrict} + In immediately repeated citations of the same author, the author's name is + replaced by \enquote{idem}; text and footnotes are treated separately. + \optset{isbn}{false} + Whether the fields \texttt{isbn}, \texttt{isrn} and \texttt{issn} are printed or not. + \optset{loccittracker}{false} + The \emph{\enquote{loccit} tracker} which checks if the location of a cited + work is the same as the location last cited (of the same work) is switched + off. + \optset{opcittracker}{false} + The \emph{\enquote{opcit} tracker} which checks if the work is the same as + the one which was last cited by the same author is switched off. + \optset{pagetracker}{true} + The \emph{page tracker} is switched on; with oneside documents it checks + for single pages, with twoside documents it checks for double pages + (spreads). The internal tests \cmd{iffirstonpage} and \cmd{ifsamepage} + use this option. + +\subsection{The option \option{journalnumber=date}} +\label{journalnumberdate} +Better than wasting a lot of words in trying to describe the option, I will +rather give some examples which show the \BibTeX\ entry and the corresponding +output with \option{journalnumber=date}. The examples were provided by +Bernhard Tempel; they are in German, but I think the essentials should be +clear to the English reader as well. + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + volume = {91}, + number = {65}, + issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03-06}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Fingiert:1939} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939a, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + volume = {91}, + number = {65}, + issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Fingiert:1939a} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Gerstmann:2007a, + author = {Gerstmann, Günter}, + title = {Gerhart Hauptmann-Aktivitäten in Hohenhaus}, + journal = {Schlesischer Kulturspiegel}, + date = {2007}, + volume = {42}, + number = {1}, + pages = {13}, + issue = {Januar--März}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Gerstmann:2007a} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{GMG:1939, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + volume = {91}, + number = {65}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03-06}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{GMG:1939} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Guilford:1950, + author = {Guilford, J[oy] P[aul]}, + title = {Creativity}, + journal = {The American Psychologist}, + date = {1950-09}, + volume = {5}, + number = {9}, + pages = {444--454}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Guilford:1950} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Page:1997, + author = {Page, Penny Booth}, + title = {E.\,M. Jellinek and the evolution of alcohol studies}, + subtitle = {A critical essay}, + journal = {Addiction}, + date = {1997}, + volume = {92}, + number = {12}, + pages = {1619-1637}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Page:1997} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939b, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + number = {65}, + issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03-06}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Fingiert:1939b} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939c, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + volume = {91}, + issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Fingiert:1939c} + + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Ewers:1906, + author = {Ewers, Hanns Heinz}, + title = {Rausch und Kunst}, + journal = {Blaubuch}, + date = {1906}, + volume = {1}, + pages = {1726-1730}, + issue = {4. Quartal}, +} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Ewers:1906} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939d, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + volume = {91}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03-19}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Fingiert:1939d} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939e, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + volume = {91}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Fingiert:1939e} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Landolt:2000, + author = {Landolt, H. P. and Borbély, A. A.}, + title = {Alkohol und Schlafstörungen}, + journal = {Therapeutische Umschau}, + date = {2000}, + volume = {57}, + pages = {241-245}, +} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Landolt:2000} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Chapiro:1930, + author = {Chapiro, Joseph}, + title = {Das neueste Werk Gerhart Hauptmanns}, + subtitle = {\enquote{Die Spitzhacke}}, + journal = {Neue Freie Presse}, + number = {23773}, + pages = {1-3}, + issue = {Morgenblatt}, + date = {1930-11-19}, +} +\end{lstlisting} +\foreignlanguage{german}{\fullcite{Chapiro:1930}} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939f, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + number = {65}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Fingiert:1939f} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Barski:2007, + author = {Barski, Jacek and Mahnken, Gerhard}, + title = {Museumsverbund Gerhart Hauptmann}, + subtitle = {Ein deutsch-polnisches Kulturprojekt mit Weitblick}, + journal = {Kulturpolitische Mitteilungen}, + date = {2007}, + number = {119}, + pages = {62}, + issue = {IV}, +} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Barski:2007} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Essig:2005, + author = {Essig, Rolf-Bernhard}, + title = {Mit liebender Schafsgeduld}, + subtitle = {Erhart Kästner im Dienste Gerhart Hauptmanns}, + journal = {Süddeutsche Zeitung}, + number = {237}, + pages = {16}, + date = {2005-10-14}, +} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Essig:2005} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Kluwe:2007, + author = {Kluwe, Sandra}, + title = {Furor poeticus}, + subtitle = {Ansätze zu einer neurophysiologisch fundierten Theorie der literarischen Kreativität am Beispiel der Produktionsästhetik Rilkes und Kafkas}, + journal = {literaturkritik.de}, + date = {2007-02}, + number = {2}, + url = {http://literaturkritik.de/public/rezension.php?rez_id=10438}, +} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Kluwe:2007} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Burckhardt:2006, + author = {Burckhardt, Barbara}, + title = {Frauen sind einfach klüger, starke Frauen}, + subtitle = {Michael Thalheimers \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger Thalia Theater und Schirin Khodadadians Kasseler Räuber}, + journal = {Theater heute}, + date = {2006}, + number = {5}, + pages = {14-18}, +} +\end{lstlisting} +\foreignlanguage{german}{\fullcite{Burckhardt:2006}} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Ossietzky:1922, + author = {Ossietzky, Carl von}, + title = {Moritz Heimann \enquote{Armand Carrel} Staatstheater}, + journal = {Berliner Volks-Zeitung}, + date = {1922-03-30}, + issue = {Abend-Ausg\adddot} +} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Ossietzky:1922} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939g, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + issue = {Abend-Ausgabe}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Fingiert:1939g} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Weiss:1960, + author = {Weiss, Grigorij}, + title = {Auf der Suche nach der versunkenen Glocke}, + subtitle = {Johannes R. Becher bei Gerhart Hauptmann}, + journal = {Sinn und Form}, + date = {1960}, + pages = {363--385}, + issue = {Zweites Sonderheft Johannes R. Becher}, +} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Weiss:1960} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Hofer:2006, + author = {Hofer, Hermann}, + title = {Der Schrei der Verwundeten}, + subtitle = {Erschütternd: Gerhart Hauptmanns \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger Thalia Theater}, + journal = {Lübecker Nachrichten}, + date = {2006-03-14}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Hofer:2006} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Kammerhoff:2006, + author = {Kammerhoff, Heiko}, + title = {Rose Bernd}, + journal = {Szene Hamburg}, + date = {2006-04}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Kammerhoff:2006} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939h, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Fingiert:1939h} + +\section{Commands, bibliography strings, entry types, field formats} +\subsection{Additional commands} +The following list shows additional commands introduced by \bldw{}, along with their standard definitions. These commands can be customized with \cmd{renewcommand}. + +% \befehl{}{}{} + \befehl{annotationfont}{\cmd{small}\cmd{itshape}}{Font of the field + \texttt{annotation}.} + \befehl{bibfinalnamedelim}{% + \cmd{ifnum}\cmd{value}\{liststop\}\textgreater 2\%\\ + \hspace*{8.1em}\cmd{finalandcomma}\cmd{fi}\%\\ + \hspace*{8.1em}\cmd{addspace}\cmd{bibstring\{and\}}\cmd{space}}{Final + delimiter between names in the bibliography. Compare \bl's + \cmd{finalnamedelim}.} + \befehlleer{bibleftpseudo}{Punctuation after the author when using + \option{pseudoauthor=true}.} + \befehl{bibmultinamedelim}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Delimiter between + names in the bibliography. Compare \bl's \cmd{multinamedelim}.} + \befehl{bibrevsdnamedelim}{\cmd{addspace}}{Additional delimiter between + first and second name in the bibliography when the scheme + \enquote{Surname, Firstname, Firstname Surname} is given. The comma is not + meant! Compare \bl's \cmd{revsdnamedelim}.} + \befehlleer{bibrightpseudo}{Punctuation before the author when using + \option{pseudoauthor=true}.} + \befehl{citefinalnamedelim}{\cmd{slash}}{Final delimiter between names in + citations. Compare \bl's \cmd{finalnamedelim}.} + \befehl{citemultinamedelim}{\cmd{slash}}{Delimiter between names in + citations. Compare \bl's \cmd{multinamedelim}.} + \befehlleer{citerevsdnamedelim}{Additional delimiter between + first and second name in citations when the scheme + \enquote{Surname, Firstname, Firstname Surname} is given. The comma is not + meant! Compare \bl's \cmd{revsdnamedelim}.} + \befehl{journumstring}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}\cmd{bibstring\{number\}}% + \cmd{addnbspace}}{Punctuation\slash string ahead of the journal number.} + \befehl{jourvolnumsep}{\cmd{adddot}}{Punctuation between journal volume and + journal number (with \option{journumafteryear=false}).} + \befehl{jourvolstring}{\cmd{addspace}}{Punctuation\slash string ahead of the + journal volume.} + \befehl{libraryfont}{\cmd{small}\cmd{sffamily}}{Font of the field + \texttt{library}.} + \befehl{locationdatepunct}{\cmd{addspace}}{Punctuation between \texttt{location} + and year (\texttt{year}\slash \texttt{date}) when \option{nopublisher=true} is + in use or the publisher is missing.} + \befehl{locationpublisherpunct}{\cmd{addcolon}\cmd{space}}{Punctuation between \texttt{location} + and \texttt{publisher} when \option{nopublisher=false} is in use.} + \befehl{origfieldspunct}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Punctuation ahead of + the reprint, if the options \option{origfields=true} and + \option{origfieldsformat=punct} are set.} + \befehl{publisherdatepunct}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Punctuation between \texttt{publisher} + and year (\texttt{year}\slash \texttt{date}) when \option{nopublisher=false} is in use.} + \befehlleer{seriespunct}{Punctuation before the \texttt{series}, inside the + parentheses.} + \befehl{sernumstring}{\cmd{addspace}}{Punctuation\slash string between the + \texttt{series} and its \texttt{number}.} + \befehl{shorthandinbibpunct}{\cmd{addspace}}{Punctuation after a shorthand in the + bibliography, if \option{shorthandinbib} is used.} + \befehl{shorthandpunct}{\cmd{addcolon}}{Punctuation after a shorthand in the list + of shorthands, if \option{shorthandwidth} is used.} + \befehl{shorthandsep}{3pt plus 0.5pt minus 0.5pt}{Length between the + shorthand and its description, if \option{shorthandwidth} is used.} + \befehl{textcitesdelim}{\cmd{addspace}\cmd{bibstring\{and\}}\cmd{space}}{Delimiter between + multiple authors when using \cmd{textcites}.} + \befehl{titleaddonpunct}{\cmd{addperiod}\cmd{space}}{Punctuation ahead of + \texttt{titleaddon}, \texttt{booktitleaddon} and + \texttt{maintitle\-addon}.} + \befehl{titleyeardelim}{\cmd{addspace}}{Delimiter between + \texttt{title} and \texttt{year}, if \option{addyear=true} is set.} + +\subsection{Redefined commands} +The following list shows the commands which are defined by \bl{} +and redefined by \bldw{}. These commands can be customized with \cmd{renewcommand}. + \befehl{labelnamepunct}{\cmd{addcolon}\cmd{space}}{Punctuation after names in the bibliography.} + \befehl{nametitledelim}{\cmd{addcolon}\cmd{space}}{Delimiter between name and title in citations.} + \befehl{newunitpunct}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Punctuation after units in the bibliography.} + \befehl{subtitlepunct}{\cmd{addperiod}\cmd{space}}{Punctuation between title and subtitle.} + +\subsection{Additional bibliography strings} +The following list shows the additional bibliography strings introduced by \bldw{}. +There is always a long and a short version. It depends on the \bl{} option \option{abbreviate} which version is used. + +\begin{labeling}{mmmmmmm} + \biblstring{idemdat}{eidem}{eidem} + \biblstring{idemdatsf}{eidem}{eidem} + \biblstring{idemdatsm}{eidem}{eidem} + \biblstring{idemdatsn}{eidem}{eidem} + \biblstring{idemdatpf}{eisdem}{eisdem} + \biblstring{idemdatpm}{eisdem}{eisdem} + \biblstring{idemdatpn}{eisdem}{eisdem} + \biblstring{idemdatpp}{eisdem}{eisdem} + \biblstring{inrefstring}{article\cmd{addspace}}{art\cmd{adddotspace}} +\end{labeling} +The bibliography strings can be redefined as follows (but note that you cannot +define a long and a short version): +\begin{lstlisting} +\DefineBibliographyStrings{english}{% + thiscite = {at}, + inrefstring = {}} +\end{lstlisting} + +\subsection{Redefined bibliography strings} +The following list shows the bibliography strings which are defined by \bl{} +and redefined by \bldw{}. There is always a long and a short version. +It depends on the \bl{} option \option{abbreviate} which version is used. +\begin{labeling}{mmmmmmm} +% \biblstring{}{}{} + \biblstring{thiscite}{here}{here} +\end{labeling} + +\subsection{Entry types} +The following entry types are used in a different way than in \bl. + \eintragstyp{inreference}{Article in an encyclopedia or dictionary}{incollection} + \eintragstyp{review}{Review~-- the reviewed work can be referenced with \texttt{xref}}{article} + +\subsection{Additional field formats} +The following list shows additional field formats defined by \bldw{}. + +\feldformat{shorthandinbib}{mkbibbrackets\{\#1\}}{Format of the shorthands + when using \option{shorthandinbib=true}.} + +\section{Further hints} +The following hints are ideas for advanced users to further customize +the styles beyond the options that \bldw{} provides. + +\subsection{Delimiter between names} +Other than \bl{}, \bldw\ distinguishes between delimiters that are used in +citations and delimiters that are used in the bibliography. \bl{} has only +\cmd{multinamedelim} (between multiple authors), \cmd{finalnamedelim} (before +the last author) and \cmd{revsdnamedelim} (additional character(s) in +\enquote{Lastname, Firstname\textbar\ and Firstname2 Lastname2}: the \textbar\ +indicates the place for the \cmd{revsdnamedelim}). + +\bldw{}, however, has \cmd{bibmultinamedelim}, \cmd{bib\-final\-name\-delim} +and \cmd{bibrevsdnamedelim} for the bibliography as well as +\cmd{citemultinamedelim}, \cmd{citefinalnamedelim} and +\cmd{citerevsdna\-medelim} for the citations. Furthermore, \cmd{multinamedelim}, +\cmd{finalnamedelim} and \cmd{revsdnamedelim} are used in the list of +shorthands. Thus, you can achieve different results. The standard definitions +are as follows: + +\begin{lstlisting}[commentstyle=] +\newcommand*{\multinamedelim}{\addcomma\space} +\newcommand*{\finalnamedelim}{% + \ifnum\value{liststop}>2 \finalandcomma\fi + \addspace\bibstring{and}\space} +\newcommand*{\revsdnamedelim}{} + +\newcommand*{\bibmultinamedelim}{\addcomma\space} +\newcommand*{\bibfinalnamedelim}{% + \ifnum\value{liststop}>2 \finalandcomma\fi + \addspace\bibstring{and}\space}% +\newcommand*{\bibrevsdnamedelim}{\addspace} + +\newcommand*{\citemultinamedelim}{\slash} +\newcommand*{\citefinalnamedelim}{\slash} +\newcommand*{\citerevsdnamedelim}{} +\end{lstlisting} +When you have multiple authors, they are separated by a slash (/) in citations, +but by comma or (before the last author) by \enquote{and} in the bibliography +and in the list of shorthands. The definitions for the bibliography and for +the list of shorthands are the same as with standard \bl{}. You can customize +these definitions with \cmd{renewcommand*}. + +\subsection{Appearance of Shorthands (\cmd{mkbibacro})} +\label{mkbibacro-anpassen} + +In \bl{}, acronyms (e.g. \enquote{\textsc{URL}}) are set in small caps. +It uses the command \cmd{mkbibacro} which is defined as: +\begin{lstlisting} +\newcommand*{\mkbibacro}[1]{% + \ifcsundef{\f@encoding/\f@family/\f@series/sc} + {#1} + {\textsc{\MakeLowercase{#1}}}} +\end{lstlisting} +That means: If small caps are available in the used font, acronyms are set +in small caps, otherwise in normal shape. + +Typographically, it is better (at least in my view) to use upper case letters +which are slightly letterspaced and scaled down. The letterspacing can be +done with the package \paket{microtype} (if \paket{pdftex} or \paket{pdf\/latex} +are used). The scaling is provided by the package \paket{scalefnt}. Thus, the +command \cmd{mkbibacro} could be redefined in the following way: +\begin{lstlisting} +\usepackage{scalefnt} +\usepackage{microtype} +\renewcommand{\mkbibacro}[1]{% + \textls[55]{\scalefont{0.95}#1}\isdot} +\end{lstlisting} +The values for \cmd{textls} and \cmd{scalefont} can of course be customized to +your desires or needs. + +If a \texttt{shorthand} is an acronym (e.g.\ \enquote{EB} for \emph{Encyclopædia Britannica}), +you can add \texttt{options\,=\,\{acronym=true\}} to the entry and use the global +option \option{acronyms=true}. Then the shorthand will be typeset using the +command \cmd{mkbibacro}. The same applies to abbreviated journals (e.g. +\enquote{PP} for \emph{Past and Present}) using the field \texttt{shortjournal\,=\,\{PP\}} +and \texttt{options\,=\,\{acronym=true\}}. + +\end{document} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/de-biblatex-dw.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/de-biblatex-dw.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0121beb0eb --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/de-biblatex-dw.pdf diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/de-biblatex-dw.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/de-biblatex-dw.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..02af0f9b2c --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/de-biblatex-dw.tex @@ -0,0 +1,1506 @@ +%!TEX TS-program = xelatex +%!TEX encoding = UTF-8 Unicode + +% biblatex-dw +% Copyright (c) Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>, 2016 +% +% Diese Datei enthält die deutschsprachige Dokumentation von biblatex-dw + +\documentclass[ngerman]{scrartcl} +\input{biblatex-dw-preamble}% Präambel +%\input{biblatex-dw-print}% Druckversion +\input{biblatex-dw-screen}% Bildschirmversion + +%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% +%%%%% Anfang des Dokuments %%%%% +%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% +\begin{document} +\maketitle +\thispagestyle{empty} + +\abstract{\noindent \bldw{} ist eine kleine Sammlung von Zitierstilen + für das Paket \bl{} von Philipp Lehman. Sie ist gedacht zum + Zitieren und Bibliographieren im geisteswissenschaftlichen Bereich + und bietet dafür einige Funktionen, die über die Standardfunktionen + von \bl{} hinausgehen. \bldw{} baut vollständig auf + \bl{} auf~-- die Version~\biblatexdwversion{} + \Mindestanforderung{}\Testversion. Bitte achten Sie auch auf die + Mindestanforderungen von \bl{} selbst.} + +\lizenz +\screenversion +\TOC + +\section{Einleitung} +\subsection{Installation} +\bldw{} ist in den Distributionen MiK\TeX{}\footnote{Webseite: \url{http://www.miktex.org}.} +und \TeX{}~Live\footnote{Webseite: \url{http://www.tug.org/texlive}.} enthalten und +kann mit deren Paketmanagern bequem installiert werden. Wenn Sie stattdessen eine +manuelle Installation durchführen, so gehen Sie wie folgt vor: +Entpacken Sie die Datei \texttt{biblatex-dw.tds.zip} in den \texttt{\$LOCALTEXMF}"=Ordner ihres +Systems.\footnote{Falls Sie nicht wissen, was das ist, können Sie sich unter +\url{http://projekte.dante.de/DanteFAQ/TDS} bzw. +\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/tds/tds.html} informieren.} Aktualisieren Sie +anschließend die \emph{filename database} ihrer \TeX"=Distribution. +Weitere Informationen: +\begin{itemize} + \small + \item \url{http://projekte.dante.de/DanteFAQ/PaketInstallation} + \item \url{http://projekte.dante.de/DanteFAQ/Verschiedenes#67} +\end{itemize} + +\subsection{Benutzung} +Die hier angebotenen Zitierstile werden wie die Standard-Stile +beim Laden des Pakets \bl{} eingebunden: + +\begin{lstlisting} +\usepackage[style=authortitle-dw]{biblatex} +\end{lstlisting} +bzw. +\begin{lstlisting} +\usepackage[style=footnote-dw]{biblatex} +\end{lstlisting} +Die Stile sind so konstruiert, dass sie stark miteinander verschränkt sind. +Das bedeutet, dass die Kombination eines \bldw"=Stiles mit einem anderen Stil +nicht unbedingt möglich sein wird. +Für einen ersten Überblick über die Stile stehen die Beispiele \enquote{de-authortitle-dw} +und \enquote{de-footnote-dw} im Ordner \texttt{examples} zur Verfügung. + +\subsection{Globale Optionen und Eintragsoptionen} +Die Optionen, die \bl{} zur Verfügung stellt, können auch mit \bldw{} verwendet +werden. Die von den \bldw"=Stilen zusätzlich bereitgestellten Optionen +werden im Folgenden erläutert. Dabei ist grundsätzlich zu unterscheiden +zwischen globalen Optionen und Eintragsoptionen: Globale Optionen gelten für alle +Literaturverweise im Dokument; sie werden entweder als Option beim Laden von \bl{} +oder in einer Konfigurationsdatei (\texttt{biblatex.cfg}) gesetzt. Eintragsoptionen +werden für jeden einzelnen Eintrag im Feld \texttt{options} gesetzt. Manche der +Eintragsoptionen überschreiben für den jeweiligen Eintrag eventuell gesetzte globale Optionen. + +\subsection{Fragen und Antworten (FAQ)} +In der deutschen \TeX"=FAQ, die auf den Internetseiten der Deutschen Anwendervereinigung +\TeX\ e.\,V. (\DANTE) eingesehen werden kann, sind auch einige häufig gestellte Fragen +zu \bl{} und \bldw{} beantwortet, abzurufen unter folgender Adresse:\\ +\href{http://projekte.dante.de/DanteFAQ/LiteraturverzeichnisMitBiblatex}% + {http://projekte.dante.de/DanteFAQ/LiteraturverzeichnisMitBiblatex} + +Außerdem habe ich für \enquote{\DTK}, die Mitgliederzeitschrift +von \DANTE, einen einführenden Artikel zu \bl{} geschrieben, den ich auch als PDF +zum Herunterladen anbiete:\\ +\href{http://biblatex.dominik-wassenhoven.de/dtk.shtml}% + {http://biblatex.dominik-wassenhoven.de/dtk.shtml} + +\subsection{Entwicklung} +\bldw{} wird quelloffen entwickelt und bei \href{http://sourceforge.net}{sourceforge.net} gehostet. Der Code (auch der jeweils aktuellen, noch nicht veröffentlichten Version) steht zum Download zur Verfügung.\footnote{\url{http://sourceforge.net/p/biblatex-dw/code}.} Auf sourceforge.net gibt es auch die Möglichkeit, Fehler zu melden und Verbesserungsvorschläge zu machen. Wenn Sie einen Fehler finden, erstellen Sie bitte einen Bug-Report (am besten inklusive Minimalbeispiel).\footnote{\url{http://sourceforge.net/p/biblatex-dw/tickets/milestone/Bugs}.} Für Verbesserungsvorschläge verwenden Sie ein Feature-Request.\footnote{\url{http://sourceforge.net/p/biblatex-dw/tickets/milestone/Features}.} + +\section{Der Stil \xbx{authortitle-dw}} + +Dieser Stil basiert auf dem Standardstil \xbx{authortitle}. +Neben einigen Änderungen in der Zeichensetzung gibt es folgende Unterschiede: + +\subsection{Bibliographie} +\begin{itemize} + \item Die\beschreibung{namefont} + Schriftart der Autoren und Herausgeber kann mit den Optionen% + \beschreibung{firstnamefont} + \option{namefont} und \option{firstnamefont} auf \wert{normal}, + \wert{smallcaps} + (Kapitälchen), \wert{italic} (kursive Schrift) oder \wert{bold} + (fetter Schnitt) eingestellt werden. + Wenn die Option \option{useprefix=true} gesetzt ist, wirkt sich + \option{namefont} auch auf das Namenspräfix aus (also \enquote{von}, + \enquote{de} etc.). + Mit \option{useprefix=false} (der Standardeinstellung) hängt das + Namenspräfix von der Option \option{firstnamefont} ab, die in jedem + Fall + das Namenssuffix (den \enquote{Junior}"=Teil) beeinflusst. + \item Wird\beschreibung{oldauthor} + die Option \option{namefont} benutzt, aber es sollen dennoch + einige Namen nicht in der gewählten Schriftform gesetzt werden (z.\,B. + mittelalterliche oder antike Autoren), kann im entsprechenden + Eintrag der bib-Datei das Feld \texttt{options\,=\,\{oldauthor=true\}} + oder \texttt{options\,=\,\{oldauthor\}} gesetzt werden. Sollen diese + mit \texttt{oldauthor} gekennzeichneten Einträge in derselben Schrift + gesetzt werden wie die anderen Einträge, kann man die Eintragsoption + mit der globalen Option \option{oldauthor=false} überschreiben. + \item Es\beschreibung{oldbookauthor} gibt auch die Eintragsoption \option{oldbookauthor}, + die dieselbe Funktionalität wie \option{oldauthor} für das Feld \texttt{bookauthor} + bereitstellt. Dies ist nützlich für \texttt{@inbook}"=Einträge, die beispielsweise + eine Einleitung zur Edition eines Werkes bieten, dessen Autor nicht in der normalen + Schrift gesetzt werden soll. Diese Option lässt sich mit der globalen Option + \option{oldauthor=false} ausschalten. + \item Die\beschreibung{idemfont} + Schriftart von \enquote{Ders.}\slash\enquote{Dies.} (siehe unten) + kann mit der Option \option{idemfont} auf \wert{normal}, + \wert{smallcaps} (Kapitälchen), \wert{italic} (kursive Schrift) oder + \wert{bold} (fetter Schnitt) eingestellt werden. Wird die Option nicht + verwendet, so wird der Schriftschnitt der Option \option{namefont} + benutzt. Das ist auch das Standardverhalten. + \item Die\beschreibung{ibidemfont} + Schriftart von \enquote{ebenda}\slash\enquote{ebd.} (siehe unten) + kann mit der Option \option{ibidemfont} auf \wert{normal}, + \wert{smallcaps} (Kapitälchen), \wert{italic} (kursive Schrift) oder + \wert{bold} (fetter Schnitt) eingestellt werden. Der Standard ist + \wert{normal}. + \item Die\beschreibung{acronyms} + Siglen (\texttt{shorthand} und \texttt{shortjournal}) können mit + dem\beschreibung{acronym} + Befehl \cmd{mkbibacro} gesetzt werden (Standard für diesen Befehl: + \textsc{smallcaps}). Dazu setzt man die globale Option \option{acronyms=true} + \emph{und} im entsprechenden Eintrag der bib-Datei das Feld + \texttt{options = \{acronym=true\}}. Zur Anpassung des Befehls + \cmd{mkbibacro} siehe auch den Abschnitt \enquote{\nameref{mkbibacro-anpassen}} + (S.~\pageref{mkbibacro-anpassen}). + \item Mit\beschreibung{idembib} + der Option \option{idembib} können aufeinanderfolgende Einträge + desselben Autors\slash{}Herausgebers in der Bibliographie durch + \enquote{Ders.} bzw. \enquote{Dies.} oder durch einen langen Strich + (---) ersetzt werden. Setzt man die Option auf \wert{false}, werden + die Namen auch in aufeinanderfolgenden Einträgen gleicher Autoren\slash + Herausgeber ausgegeben. Mit \option{idembib=true} wird die Ersetzung + eingeschaltet. Das Format lässt sich dann durch die Option\beschreibung{idembibformat} + \option{idembibformat} einstellen; sie kann die Werte \wert{idem} + (\enquote{Ders.}\slash\enquote{Dies.}) und \wert{dash} (---) annehmen. + Das Geschlecht, das bei der Verwendung von \wert{idem} in manchen + Sprachen + wichtig ist, wird im Feld \texttt{gender} festgelegt (siehe dazu die + \bl"=Dokumentation). Der Standard für \option{idembib} ist + \wert{true}, + der Standard für \option{idembibformat} ist \wert{idem}. + \item Wenn\beschreibung{edbyidem} + Autor und Herausgeber bei \texttt{@inbook}"~, \texttt{@incollection}"~ oder + \texttt{@inreference}"=Einträgen dieselben sind, werden ihre Namen nicht + wiederholt, sondern durch \enquote{hg.\,v.\,ders.}, + \enquote{hg.\,v.\,dems.} etc. ersetzt. Das Geschlecht wird im Feld + \texttt{gender} festgelegt (siehe dazu die \bl{}"=Dokumentation). + Diese Funktion wird durch die Option \option{edbyidem} kontrolliert, + die die Werte \wert{true} oder \wert{false} annehmen kann; + der Standard ist \wert{true}. + \item Die\beschreibung{editorstring} + Option \option{editorstring} kann die Werte \wert{parens}, + \wert{brackets} und \wert{normal} annehmen; der Standard ist + \wert{parens}. Diese Option setzt den Ausdruck \enquote{Herausgeber} + (abgekürzt \enquote{Hrsg.}) in runde Klammern (parens) oder in eckige + Klammern (brackets). Wenn die Option den Wert \wert{normal} hat, wird + der Ausdruck \enquote{Hrsg.} nicht von Klammern umgeben. Stattdessen + wird er an den Namen des Herausgebers und ein anschließendes Komma + angehängt. + Bei Verwendung von \option{usetranslator=true} trifft die Einstellung + von \option{editorstring} auch auf den Ausdruck \enquote{Übersetzer} + (abgekürzt \enquote{Übers.}) zu. + \item Die\beschreibung{editorstringfont} Option \option{editorstringfont} + bestimmt die Schriftart, die für den Ausdruck \enquote{Herausgeber} + (abgekürzt \enquote{Hrsg.}) benutzt wird. Mit \wert{normal} wird die + Standardschrift des Dokuments benutzt, \wert{namefont} übernimmt die + Einstellung der Option \option{namefont}. + Bei Verwendung von \option{usetranslator=true} trifft die Einstellung + von \option{editorstringfont} auch auf den Ausdruck \enquote{Übersetzer} + (abgekürzt \enquote{Übers.}) zu. Der Standard für diese Option + ist \wert{normal}. + \item Mit\beschreibung{pseudoauthor} + der Eintragsoption \option{pseudoauthor} kann man Autorennamen + in eckige Klammern einschließen oder ganz unterdrücken. Das ist beispielsweise nützlich für + Editionen von Werken, deren Autoren nicht genannt werden, aber bekannt + sind. Wenn die globale Option \option{pseudoauthor} auf \wert{true} gesetzt + (und die Eintragsoption \option{pseudoauthor} benutzt) wird, dann wird der + Autor ausgegeben. Dabei wird er von den Befehlen \cmd{bibleftpseudo} und \cmd{bibrightpseudo} + eingerahmt. Diese Befehle sind standardmäßig leer. Wenn man den Autor beispielsweise in eckigen + Klammern haben möchte, muss man die Befehle umdefinieren: + \begin{lstlisting} +\renewcommand*{\bibleftpseudo}{\bibleftbracket} +\renewcommand*{\bibrightpseudo}{\bibrightbracket} + \end{lstlisting} + Wenn die globale Option \option{pseudoauthor} auf \wert{false} gesetzt wird, werden Autoren + von Einträge mit der Eintragsoption \option{pseudoauthor} gar nicht ausgegeben. Der Standard für + die globale Option ist \wert{true}. + \item In\beschreibung{nopublisher} + der Standardeinstellung wird der Verlag (\texttt{publisher}) nicht + ausgegeben, sondern nur Ort (\texttt{location}) und Jahr + (\texttt{date}). Will man den Verlag ausgeben, muss man die Option + \option{nopublisher=false} setzen. + \item Mit\beschreibung{nolocation} + \option{nolocation=true} kann man auch die Ausgabe des Ortes + unterdrücken. In diesem Fall wird auch der Verlag nicht ausgegeben + (unabhängig von der + Einstellung von \option{nopublisher}). Der Standard ist \wert{false}. + \item Die Felder \texttt{doi}, \texttt{eprint}, \texttt{isbn}, \texttt{isrn}, + \texttt{issn}\beschreibung{pagetotal} und \texttt{pagetotal} werden mit den Standardeinstellungen + nicht ausgegeben. Sie können aber mit den Optionen \option{doi=true}, + \option{eprint=true}, \option{isbn=true} (gilt auch für \texttt{isrn} + und \texttt{issn}) bzw. \option{pagetotal=true} berücksichtigt werden. + \item Mit\beschreibung{origfields} + der Option \option{origfields} kann man entscheiden, ob man die + Felder \texttt{origlocation}, \texttt{origpublisher} und + \texttt{origdate} ausgeben lassen möchte oder nicht. Der Standard ist + \wert{true}. Wenn die Option genutzt wird und das Feld + \texttt{origlocation} gesetzt ist, werden die \enquote{orig}"=Felder + ausgegeben. In diesem Fall werden dann die Felder \texttt{location}, + \texttt{publisher} und \texttt{date} in Klammern angefügt, eingeleitet + durch den \emph{bibliography string} \texttt{reprint} (\enquote{Nachdr.} oder + \enquote{Nachdruck}). Dabei werden die Felder \texttt{publisher} und + \texttt{origpublisher} nur ausgegeben, + wenn die Option \option{nopublisher=false} eingestellt ist. + \achtung Beachten Sie, dass die Edition eines Werks sich immer auf die + ursprüngliche Ausgabe bezieht, da Nachdrucke normalerweise nicht in + mehreren Auf"|lagen erscheinen, sondern eine spezifische Auf"|lage + erneut veröffentlichen. Wenn die Option \option{edsuper} benutzt wird, + erscheint die Auf"|lage also als hochgestellte Zahl vor + \texttt{origdate}. + \item Mit\beschreibung{origfieldsformat} + der Option \option{origfieldsformat}, die die Werte \wert{parens}, + \wert{brackets} und \wert{punct} annehmen kann, lässt sich einstellen, + wie die Angaben zum Nachdruck (bei \option{origfields=true}) ausgegeben + werden. Mit \wert{parens} oder \wert{brackets} werden sie in runden + bzw. eckigen Klammern gesetzt. Der Standard ist \wert{punct}; dabei + werden die Angaben durch das Zeichen \cmd{origfieldspunct} + eingeleitet, das auf ein Komma voreingestellt ist. + \item Die Zeichensetzung vor dem Titelzusatz (\texttt{titleaddon}, + \texttt{booktitleaddon} und \texttt{maintitleaddon}) wird durch den + neuen Befehl \cmd{titleaddonpunct} gesteuert. Der Standard ist ein + Punkt. + \item Wird\beschreibung{edsuper} + die Option \option{edsuper} auf \wert{true} gesetzt, erscheint + die Auf"|lage (\texttt{edition}) als hochgestellte Zahl (nicht als + Ordnungszahl) direkt vor dem Jahr. Der Standardwert für diese Option + ist \wert{false}.\\ + \achtung Beachten Sie, dass die Option \option{edsuper} nur dann + funktioniert, + wenn im Feld \texttt{edition} \emph{nur} eine Zahl steht. Angaben wie + \enquote{5., aktualisierte und ergänzte Aufl.} werden wie sonst auch + normal ausgegeben. Gleichzeitig wird in diesem Fall eine Warnung + ausgegeben. + Will man von der Option \option{edsuper} Gebrauch machen, wird deshalb + dringend geraten, in das Feld \texttt{edition} weiterhin nur Zahlwerte + einzugeben und für ausführliche Angaben zu Auf"|lagen das Feld + \texttt{note} zu verwenden. + \item Mit\beschreibung{editionstring} \option{editionstring=true} wird + der \emph{bibliography string} \enquote{edition} zur Edition (Feld + \texttt{edition}) automatisch hinzugefügt, auch wenn es sich dabei + nicht um eine Zahl handelt. Man kann also beispielsweise in der bib-Datei + \begin{lstlisting} +edition = {2., aktualisierte} + \end{lstlisting} + schreiben und erhält \enquote{2., aktualisierte Aufl.} + Setzt man die Option auf \wert{false}, wird nur dann der \emph{bibliography string} + hinzugefügt, wenn in \texttt{edition} nur eine Zahl angegeben wird + (\bl"=Standard"=Verhalten). + Der Standard für diese Option ist \wert{false}. + \item Mit\beschreibung{shortjournal} + der Option \option{shortjournal=true} wird statt \texttt{journaltitle} + das Feld \texttt{shortjournal} verwendet. Das ist sehr nützlich für + Zeitschriftensiglen, die man bei Bedarf einsetzen kann. + \item Fehlt bei Zeitschriften die Bandangabe (\texttt{volume}), wird die + Jahreszahl \emph{nicht} in Klammern gesetzt: + \enquote{Zeitschriftenname 2008}. Falls dagegen das Feld \texttt{month} + gesetzt ist (oder das Feld \texttt{date} den entsprechenden Inhalt aufweist, z.\,B. + \texttt{2008-03}), wird das Datum vom Zeitschriftennamen durch ein + zusätzliches Komma getrennt. + \item Mit\beschreibung{journalnumber} + der Option \option{journalnumber} lässt sich die Position der + Heftnummer (\texttt{number}) bei Zeitschriften variieren. Mit dem + Wert \wert{afteryear} wird sie nach dem Jahr + ausgegeben, eingeleitet durch den Befehl \cmd{journumstring} (siehe + unten), also \enquote{Zeitschriftenname 28 (2008), Nr.~2}. Setzt man + die Option auf \wert{standard}, wird das Standardverhalten + wiederhergestellt, wobei das Zeichen zwischen \texttt{volume} und + \texttt{number} mit dem neuen Befehl \cmd{jourvolnumsep} + (Standard: \cmd{adddot}) einstellbar ist. Zusätzlich gibt es noch + die Möglichkeit, \option{journalnumber} auf \wert{date} zu setzen. + Damit wird gewährleistet, dass das Datum auch dann ausgegeben wird, + wenn das Feld \texttt{issue} definiert ist (das ist in den + Standard"=Stilen nicht der Fall). Außerdem wird die Heftnummer vor + dem Datum ausgegeben, wenn zumindest Jahr (\texttt{year}) und Monat + (\texttt{month}) angegeben sind (\texttt{date = \{YYYY-MM\}} ist natürlich + ebenfalls möglich). Wenn nur das Jahr gegeben ist, + wird die Heftnummer nach dem Jahr ausgegeben. Für nähere Einzelheiten + zur Option \option{journalnumber=date} siehe + Abschnitt~\ref{journalnumberdate} auf + Seite~\pageref{journalnumberdate}. Der Standard für + \option{journalnumber} ist \wert{true}. + \item Mit dem neuen Befehl \cmd{journumstring} wird die Heftnummer von + Zeitschriften eingeleitet. Der Standard ist \wert{, Nr.~}. Der + Befehl kann leicht an die eigenen Bedürfnisse angepasst werden, + z.\,B.: + \begin{lstlisting} +\renewcommand*{\journumstring}{\addspace} + \end{lstlisting} + \item Mit dem neuen Befehl \cmd{jourvolstring} wird die Bandnummer von + Zeitschriften eingeleitet. Der Standard ist ein Leerzeichen. Der + Befehl kann leicht an die eigenen Bedürfnisse angepasst werden, + z.\,B.: + \begin{lstlisting} +\renewcommand*{\jourvolstring}{% + \addspace Jg\adddot\space} + \end{lstlisting} + \item Die\beschreibung{series} + Option \option{series} bestimmt die Position der Reihe (Feld + \texttt{series}), möglich sind die Werte \wert{afteryear}, \wert{beforeedition} und \wert{standard}. Das betrifft die Typen \texttt{@book}, + \texttt{@inbook}, \texttt{@collection}, \texttt{@incollection}, + \texttt{@proceedings}, \texttt{@inproceedings} und \texttt{@manual}. Bei \wert{afteryear} wird die Reihe nach dem Jahr ausgegeben, bei \wert{beforeedition} vor der Auf"|lage. + Der Standardwert für diese Option ist \wert{standard}, die Reihe wird dann vor dem Ort ausgegeben. + \item Die\beschreibung{seriesformat} Option \option{seriesformat} kann + die Werte \wert{standard} und \wert{parens} annehmen. Mit + \wert{parens} werden Reihe und Nummer eines Werkes (\texttt{series} und + \texttt{number}) von Klammern umgeben, ansonsten ohne Klammern (wie es + in den Standard"=Stilen der Fall ist). Der Standard für diese Option ist + \wert{parens}. + \item Der Befehl \cmd{seriespunct} bestimmt die Zeichensetzung vor dem + Reihentitel (Feld \texttt{series}). Bei \option{seriesformat=parens} + wird das Zeichen innerhalb der Klammer gesetzt. + Es kann z.\,B. auf \wert{=\cmd{addspace}} eingestellt + werden, was in manchen Fächern üblich ist. Standardmäßig ist dieser + Befehl leer, d.\,h. der Reihentitel wird direkt nach der öffnenden + runden Klammer gesetzt. + \item Der Befehl \cmd{sernumstring} bestimmt die Zeichensetzung zwischen dem + Reihentitel (Feld \texttt{series}) und der dazugehörigen Nummer (Feld + \texttt{number}). Der Standardwert ist \wert{\cmd{addspace}}. Er kann + leicht angepasst werden, z.\,B.: + \begin{lstlisting} +\renewcommand*{\sernumstring}{% + \addcomma\space\bibstring{volume}\addspace} + \end{lstlisting} + Das würde \enquote{(Reihentitel, Bd. N)} ergeben. + \item Mit\beschreibung{shorthandinbib} der Option \option{shorthandinbib} + lassen sich die Siglen (\texttt{shorthand}) im Literaturverzeichnis + ausgeben. Mit \option{shorthandinbib=true} werden sie direkt vor dem + entsprechenden Eintrag in eckigen Klammern ausgegeben. Das Erscheinungsbild + wird durch das Feldformat \enquote{shorthandinbib} festgelegt. Will man + die Klammern weglassen, definiert man das Feldformat folgendermaßen: + \begin{lstlisting} +\DeclareFieldFormat{shorthandinbib}{#1} + \end{lstlisting} + Da in diesem Fall nur ein Leerzeichen zwischen Sigle und Literatureintrag + steht, sollte man auch die Zeichensetzung nach der Sigle umdefinieren. Dafür + ist der Befehl \cmd{shorthandinbibpunct} zuständig, dem man etwa ein + Gleichheitszeichen zuweisen könnte; dabei sollte man aber \cmd{nopunct} + verwenden, um überflüssige Zeichen nach der Sigle zu vermeiden: + \begin{lstlisting} +\renewcommand*{\shorthandinbibpunct}{% + \addspace=\nopunct\addspace} + \end{lstlisting} + \item Setzt\beschreibung{annotation} + man die Option \option{annotation} auf + \wert{true}, wird das Feld \texttt{annotation} in + \textit{\small kleiner kursiver} Schrift am Ende des Eintrags + ausgegeben. Der Standardwert für diese Option ist \wert{false}. + Das Erscheinungsbild kann mit dem folgenden Befehl angepasst werden: + \begin{lstlisting} +\renewcommand{\annotationfont}{\small\itshape} + \end{lstlisting} + \item Setzt\beschreibung{library} + man die Option \option{library} auf + \wert{true}, wird das Feld \texttt{library} in + {\small\sffamily kleiner serifenloser} Schrift am Ende des Eintrags + ausgegeben. Der Standardwert für diese Option ist \wert{false}. + Das Erscheinungsbild kann mit dem folgenden Befehl angepasst werden: + \begin{lstlisting} +\renewcommand{\libraryfont}{\small\sffamily} + \end{lstlisting} + \item Werden sowohl \option{annotation} als auch \option{library} auf + \wert{true} gesetzt, so wird der Inhalt des Feldes \texttt{annotation} + vor dem Inhalt des \texttt{library}-Feldes ausgegeben. + \item In\beschreibung{@inreference} + \bl{} ist der Eintragstyp \texttt{@inreference} ein Alias für + \texttt{@incollection}. In \bldw{} kann dieser Eintragstyp für + Artikel in Nachschlagewerken verwendet werden. Die Ausgabe ist ähnlich + wie bei \texttt{@incollection}, aber es gibt ein paar Unterschiede: + \begin{itemize} + \item Der Titel wird in Anführungszeichen gesetzt. + \item Der \textit{bibliography string} \enquote{inrefstring} (Standard: + \enquote{Artikel}\slash\enquote{Art.}) wird vor dem Titel ausgegeben. + \item Der Ort (Feld \texttt{location}) wird nicht ausgegeben. + \item Gibt es eine Bandangabe (Feld \texttt{volume}), so sieht die Ausgabe + z.\,B. folgendermaßen aus: \enquote{in: Lexikon 2 (1990), S. 120.} + \end{itemize} + Der Eintragstyp \texttt{@reference} bleibt ein Alias zu \texttt{@collection}. + Damit kann also sowohl \texttt{@collection} als auch \texttt{@reference} für + Nachschlagewerke (Lexika, Wörterbücher etc.) verwendet werden. + \item Mit\beschreibung{inreference} der Option \option{inreference=full} werden + \texttt{@inreference}"=Einträge in Literaturverweisen immer vollständig ausgegeben, + dafür aber nicht in die Bibliographie aufgenommen. Beachten Sie, dass bei Benutzung + der Option \option{xref=false} der korrespondierende \texttt{@reference}"=Eintrag + manuell zitiert werden muss (z.\,B. mit \cmd{nocite}), wenn er in der Bibliographie + erscheinen soll. Die Option \option{inreference} befolgt die Einstellungen sowohl + von \option{ibidtracker} als auch \option{idemtracker}. Der Standardwert für diese + Option ist \wert{normal}. + \item In\beschreibung{@review} + \bl{} ist der Eintragstyp \texttt{@review} ein Alias für + \texttt{@article}. In \bldw{} kann dieser Eintragstyp für + Rezensionen verwendet werden. Die Ausgabe ist ähnlich wie bei + \texttt{@article}, mit folgenden Unterschieden: + \begin{itemize} + \item Der Titel wird in Anführungszeichen gesetzt. + \item Der \emph{bibliography string} \enquote{reviewof} (Standard: + \enquote{Rezension zu}\slash\enquote{Rez. zu}) wird vor dem + Titel ausgegeben. + \item Statt einer manuellen Angabe des rezensierten Werkes im \texttt{title}"=Feld + des \texttt{@review}"=Eintrags kann man auch einen Verweis im Feld + \texttt{xref} machen. Der Eintrag mit dem dort angegebenen \BibTeX"=Key + wird dann zitiert. Diese Vorgehensweise hat den Vorteil, das Einstellungen + wie \option{namefont} oder \option{firstfull} auch für das rezensierte Werk + gelten. + \end{itemize} +\end{itemize} + +\subsection{Zitate im Text} +\begin{itemize} + \item Folgen zwei unterschiedliche Zitate desselben Autors\slash + Heraus\-gebers direkt aufeinander, wird der Name im zweiten Zitat durch + \enquote{Ders.} oder \enquote{Dies.} ersetzt, sofern das Zitat nicht + das erste der aktuellen Seite ist. Das Geschlecht wird im Feld + \texttt{gender} festgelegt (siehe dazu die \bl"=Dokumentation). + Diese Funktion wird durch die \bl"=Option \option{idemtracker} + kontrolliert, die auf \wert{constrict} gesetzt ist. Wer sie abschalten + möchte, verwendet \option{idemtracker=false}. Für weitere Informationen + zu dieser Option wird auf die \bl"=Dokumentation verwiesen. + \item Direkt aufeinanderfolgende Zitate werden durch \enquote{ebd.} ersetzt, + sofern das Zitat nicht das erste der aktuellen Seite ist. + Dieses Verhalten lässt sich mit der \bl{}"=Option \option{ibidtracker} + unterdrücken. In diesem Fall bleibt die \enquote{idem}-Funktionalität + erhalten, solange nicht die Option \option{idemtracker} auf \wert{false} + gesetzt wird. + \item Die\beschreibung{shorthandibid} + Option \option{shorthandibid} kontrolliert, ob direkt + aufeinanderfolgende Zitate mit einer Sigle (\texttt{shorthand}) + ebenfalls durch \enquote{ebd.} ersetzt werden sollen oder nicht. + Mögliche Werte für diese Option sind \wert{true} und \wert{false}, + der Standard ist \wert{true}. Diese Option hat keinerlei Effekt, + wenn die Option \option{ibidtracker} auf \wert{false} gesetzt wird.\\ + Diese Funktion kann auch für jeden Eintrag separat eingestellt werden + mit \texttt{options\,=\,\{short""hand""ibid=""true\}} oder + \texttt{options\,=\,\{short""hand""ibid""=false\}}. Die globale + Einstellung wird dann für den entsprechenden Eintrag ignoriert. + \item Mit\beschreibung{addyear} der Option \option{addyear} wird das Jahr + der Publikation nach dem Titel angefügt. Das Jahr erscheint dabei in + Klammern. Der Standard für diese Option ist \wert{false}. + \item Wenn\beschreibung{omiteditor} + man die Option \option{useeditor} auf \wert{false} setzt, kann man + mit \option{omiteditor=true} erreichen, dass der Herausgeber in + Literaturverweisen unterdrückt wird. Dasselbe gilt auch für Kurzverweise + in der Bibliographie, sofern man \option{xref=true} verwendet. + Mit \option{useeditor=true} hat die Option \option{omiteditor} keine + Auswirkung. Der Standard für diese Option ist \wert{false}. + \item Mit\beschreibung[edstringincitations]{edstring\-incitations} + der Option \option{edstringincitations=true} werden Herausgeber + (\texttt{edi\-tor}) und Übersetzer (\texttt{translator}) bei jedem + Literaturverweis mit den entsprechenden Kürzeln versehen, nicht nur + bei Vollzitaten. Das Erscheinungsbild richtet sich dabei nach der + Einstellung der Option \option{editorstring}. Der Standardwert für + diese Option ist \wert{true}. + \item Wenn der Befehl \cmd{textcite} mit einem Eintrag benutzt wird, der + weder einen Autor (\texttt{author}) noch einen Herausgeber (\texttt{editor}) + hat, gibt \bl{} eine Warnung aus und setzt den \BibTeX{}-Key des + Eintrags in fetter Schrift in den Text. + \item Mit\beschreibung{firstfull} + der Option \option{firstfull} kann man für das erste Zitat die + volle Literaturangabe ausgeben lassen. Der Standard für diese Option ist + \wert{false}. + \item Wenn\beschreibung{citedas} + es eine Sigle (\texttt{shorthand}) gibt, wird bei \option{firstfull=true} + dem Erstzitat der Zusatz \enquote{im Folgenden zit. als~\ldots} angefügt. + Dies kann durch die Option \option{citedas} beeinflusst werden. + Sie kann die Werte \wert{true} oder \wert{false} annehmen; + der Standard ist \wert{true}. + Diese Funktion kann auch für jeden Eintrag separat eingestellt werden mit + \texttt{options\,=\,\{citedas=true\}} oder + \texttt{options\,=\,\{citedas=false\}}. Die globale Einstellung + wird dann für den entsprechenden Eintrag ignoriert. + \item Mit\beschreibung{citepages} + der Option \option{citepages} lassen sich die Seitenangaben in Vollzitaten + unterdrücken, wenn das Feld \texttt{pages} vorhanden ist: + \option{citepages=permit} erlaubt Duplikate, d.\,h. sowohl \texttt{pages} + als auch \texttt{postnote} werden ausgegeben; + mit \option{citepages=suppress} wird das \texttt{pages}"=Feld des Vollzitats + in jedem Fall unterdrückt, es wird also nur die \texttt{postnote} ausgegeben (falls vorhanden); + \option{citepages=omit} unterdrückt die Ausgabe von \texttt{pages} nur, wenn + in der \texttt{postnote} eine Seitenzahl angegeben ist; + \option{citepages=separate} gibt das \texttt{pages}"=Feld immer aus, trennt + die \texttt{postnote} aber mit dem Begriff \enquote{hier} ab, falls es sich + um eine Seitenzahl handelt. Dazu wird der \emph{bibliography string} \enquote{thiscite} + verwendet, der sich natürlich umdefinieren lässt. + Der Standard für diese Option ist \wert{separate}. + Dazu ein Beispiel, das die folgenden Zitierbefehle verwendet: + \begin{lstlisting} +\cite{BibTeX-Key} +\cite[eine Anmerkung]{BibTeX-Key} +\cite[125]{BibTeX-Key} + \end{lstlisting} + % + \option{citepages=permit}: + \begin{quote} + Autor: Titel, in: Buch, S.\,100--150. + + Autor: Titel, in: Buch, S.\,100--150, eine Anmerkung. + + Autor: Titel, in: Buch, S.\,100--150, S.\,125. + \end{quote} + % + \option{citepages=suppress}: + \begin{quote} + Autor: Titel, in: Buch. + + Autor: Titel, in: Buch, eine Anmerkung. + + Autor: Titel, in: Buch, S.\,125. + \end{quote} + % + \option{citepages=omit}: + \begin{quote} + Autor: Titel, in: Buch, S.\,100--150. + + Autor: Titel, in: Buch, S.\,100--150, eine Anmerkung. + + Autor: Titel, in: Buch, S.\,125. + \end{quote} + % + \option{citepages=separate}: + \begin{quote} + Autor: Titel, in: Buch, S.\,100--150. + + Autor: Titel, in: Buch, S.\,100--150, eine Anmerkung. + + Autor: Titel, in: Buch, S.\,100--150, hier S.\,125. + \end{quote} + \item Die\beschreibung{citeauthor} Option \option{citeauthor} bestimmt das Format für den + Befehl \cmd{citeauthor}; sie kann die Werte \wert{namefont}, \wert{namefontfoot} und + \wert{normalfont} annehmen. Mit \option{citeauthor=namefont} wird das Format + benutzt, das mit der Option \option{namefont} eingestellt wurde. Dies ist die + Standardeinstellung. Mit \option{citeauthor=normalfont} wird immer die normale + Schrift für \cmd{citeauthor} benutzt, unabhängig von der Einstellung der Option + \option{namefont}. Mit \option{citeauthor=namefontfoot} wird das + \option{namefont}"=Format benutzt, wenn der \cmd{citeauthor}"=Befehl in einer + Fußnote steht, ansonsten wird die normale Schrift benutzt. + \item Mit\beschreibung{citeauthorname} + der Option \option{citeauthorname} hat man die Möglichkeit, die Namensform + beim Zitieren eines Autors\slash Herausgebers mit dem Befehl \cmd{citeauthor} + oder mit dem Befehl \cmd{textcite} zu steuern. \option{citeauthorname=firstfull} + bewirkt, dass beim ersten Zitieren der volle Name ausgegeben wird und bei allen + weiteren Zitaten nur der Nachname. Das funktioniert auch bei unterschiedlichen + Literaturverweisen desselben Autors, so dass auch dann der volle Name nur beim + ersten Verweis ausgegeben wird. Dabei ist es egal, ob man nur \cmd{citeauthor}, + nur \cmd{textcite} oder beide Befehle gemischt einsetzt. Mit + \option{citeauthorname=full} wird immer der volle Name ausgegeben, mit + \option{citeauthorname=normal} wird immer nur der Nachname ausgegeben. + Der Standard für diese Option ist \wert{normal}. + \item Mit\beschreibung{singletitle} + der \bl"=Option \option{singletitle=true} wird der Titel eines Werkes + nur dann ausgegeben, wenn mehr als ein Werk desselben Autors vorhanden ist. + Für weitere Informationen sehen Sie bitte in der \bl"=Dokumentation nach. +\end{itemize} + +\subsection[Sigelverzeichnis]{Sigelverzeichnis \emph{(List of Shorthands)}} +\begin{itemize} + \item Das\beschreibung{terselos} + Sigelverzeichnis enthält in der Standardeinstellung lediglich + Autor (oder Herausgeber), Titel und gegebenenfalls Buchtitel bzw. bei + mehrbändigen Werken den Gesamttitel. Diese Angaben sollten ausreichen, + um die vollständigen Daten in der Bibliographie zu finden. Dieses + Verhalten wird durch die Option \option{terselos} gesteuert, die + die Werte \wert{true} und \wert{false} annehmen kann; der Standard + ist \wert{true}. + \item Mit\beschreibung{shorthandwidth} + der Option \option{shorthandwidth} kann man die Breite der Label + im Sigelverzeichnis angeben. Das ist vor allem nützlich, wenn man sehr + lange Sigel hat. Die Option kann alle gängigen Längenwerte annehmen, + also beispielsweise \wert{40pt} oder \wert{3em}. \achtung Wenn man die + Option \option{shorthandwidth} benutzt, wird der Abstand nach dem Label + reduziert und gleichzeitig ein Doppelpunkt nach dem Label angefügt. + Das Trennzeichen lässt sich durch den Befehl \cmd{shorthandpunct} + umdefinieren, der Abstand wird durch die neue Länge \cmd{shorthandsep} + festgelegt. Die Standardwerte (sobald \option{shorthandwidth} benutzt + wird) sind: + \begin{lstlisting} +\renewcommand{\shorthandpunct}{\addcolon} +\setlength{\shorthandsep}{3pt plus 0.5pt minus 0.5pt} + \end{lstlisting} +\end{itemize} + +\section{Der Stil \xbx{footnote-dw}} + +Dieser Stil ähnelt dem Stil \xbx{verbose-inote}. Er basiert auf +\xbx{authortitle-dw}, so dass auch alle Optionen, die von \xbx{authortitle-dw} definiert +werden, mit \xbx{footnote-dw} benutzt werden können, mit Ausnahme der Optionen +\option{addyear}, \option{firstfull} und \option{inreference}. Daneben gibt es folgende +Unterschiede: +\medskip +\begin{itemize} + \item Zitate sind \emph{nur} innerhalb von Fußnoten möglich. Zitate + außerhalb von Fußnoten werden automatisch zu einem \cmd{footcite} + geändert. Einzige Ausnahme ist \cmd{textcite}, das im Text den + Namen und ein Zitat in der Fußnote ausgibt; verwendet man + \cmd{textcite} in einer Fußnote, wird der Name ausgegeben und + das Zitat in Klammern dahinter gesetzt. + \item Das erste Zitat eines Eintrags gibt die volle Literaturangabe aus, + alle weiteren Zitate desselben Eintrags werden nur durch den + Autor (\texttt{author}) und den Kurztitel (\texttt{shorttitle}) + repräsentiert, bzw. durch den Titel (\texttt{title}), falls kein + Kurztitel definiert wurde. Ergänzt wird die Angabe durch den + Zusatz \enquote{wie Anm.~\enquote{N}}, wobei \enquote{N} für + die Nummer der Fußnote steht, in der das Werk zuerst zitiert + wurde. + \item Die\beschreibung{pageref} + Option \option{pageref}, die es auch in den \bl"=Stilen + \xbx{verbose-note} und \xbx{ver\-bose-inote} gibt, ist ebenfalls + verfügbar. Setzt man sie auf \wert{true}, wird die Seite, auf der + das erste Zitat erscheint, zur Fußnotennummer, die auf das erste + Zitat verweist, hinzugefügt, sofern es sich nicht auf derselben + Seite befindet. Der Standard ist \wert{false}. + \item Wird \cmd{parencite} außerhalb einer Fußnote benutzt, werden keine + Klammern gesetzt, sondern stattdessen der Befehl \cmd{footcite} + ausgeführt. Innerhalb einer Fußnote funktioniert \cmd{parencite} + wie erwartet. Der Zusatz \enquote{wie Anm.~\ldots} wird dann von + eckigen Klammern eingeschlossen, nicht von runden Klammern. + \item Sind die Optionen \option{annotation} und \option{library} (oder eine + von ihnen) auf \wert{true} gesetzt, werden die Anmerkungen + (\texttt{annotation}) und Bibliotheksinformationen (\texttt{library}) + nur in der Bibliographie ausgegeben (falls eine vorhanden ist), nicht + aber im Erstzitat und in der Sigelliste. +\end{itemize} + +\section{Die Querverweis-Funktionalität} +\label{xreffunctionality} +\subsection{Funktionsweise} +Mit\beschreibung{xref} der Querverweis"=Funktionalität von \bldw{} können unselbständige +Schriften auf einen \enquote{Eltern"=Eintrag} verweisen. +Dazu wird in der bib-Datei ein Eltern"=Eintrag des Typs \texttt{@book}, \texttt{@collection} +oder \texttt{@proceedings} angelegt. Jeder \enquote{Kind"=Eintrag}, der sich auf diesen +Eltern"=Eintrag bezieht, verweist mit dem Feld \texttt{xref} auf den \BibTeX"=key des +Eltern"=Eintrags. Das funktioniert für Einträge der Typen \texttt{@inbook}, +\texttt{@incollection} und \texttt{@inproceedings}. + +Zur Veranschaulichung ein kleines Beispiel: +\begin{lstlisting} +@collection{parent, + editor = {(*\emph{Herausgeber}*)}, + title = {(*\emph{Buchtitel}*)}, + location = {(*\emph{Ort}*)}, + date = {2008} +} +@incollection{child, + author = {(*\emph{Autor}*)}, + title = {(*\emph{Titel des Beitrags}*)}, + xref = {parent}% Verweis +} +\end{lstlisting} +Wenn nun der \texttt{@incollection}"=Eintrag zitiert und die Option \option{xref} auf +\wert{true} gesetzt wird, werden automatisch +Daten aus dem Eintrag mit dem \BibTeX"=key \texttt{parent} übernommen. Dabei wird das Feld +\texttt{shorthand} genutzt, sofern es vorhanden ist. Ansonsten werden die Felder +\texttt{author}\slash\texttt{editor} und \texttt{title} (bzw. \texttt{shorttitle}, +falls vorhanden) ausgegeben. Damit wird der Leser auf den entsprechenden Eltern"=Eintrag +im Literaturverzeichnis verwiesen und hat alle relevanten Daten, ohne dass sie +mehrfach aufgeführt werden. + +Bei mehreren Kind"=Einträgen wäre es möglich, die Daten nicht mehrfach in die +\BibTeX-Datei einzugeben (was auch die Möglichkeit von Tippfehlern reduzieren könnte). +Allerdings sollte man sich bewusst sein, dass man dann \emph{immer} auf die +Verweistechnik angewiesen ist. Sollte man einmal ein Dokument benötigen, in dem +immer vollständige Einträge vorhanden sein sollen, würden die entsprechenden Daten +(\texttt{editor}, \texttt{booktitle} etc.) fehlen. Deshalb ist es besser, auch +bei \texttt{@incollection}, \texttt{@inbook} und \texttt{@inproceedings} immer +die vollständigen Daten einzugeben und auf den Eltern"=Eintrag selbst mit dem +\texttt{xref}"=Feld zu verweisen. + +Das \texttt{xref}"=Feld beachtet die Paketoption \option{mincrossrefs}, +die in der Standardeinstellung auf \wert{2} steht. Das heißt, wenn aus einem +Sammelband nur ein einziger Beitrag zitiert wird, würde der Sammelband selbst nicht in das +Literaturverzeichnis aufgenommen werden (es sei denn, er würde selbst explizit +zitiert) und die Literaturangabe des Beitrags wäre nicht vollständig. Aus diesem Grund +wird bei \option{xref=true} die Option \option{mincrossrefs} auf \wert{1} gesetzt. + +In der Standardeinstellung (oder mit \option{xref=false}) wird diese Verweistechnik +nicht genutzt. Das \texttt{xref}-Feld kommt in diesem Fall nur insoweit zum Tragen, dass ein +Eltern"=Eintrag nur dann als eigenständiger Eintrag im Literaturverzeichnis aufgeführt +wird, wenn mindestens zwei seiner Kind"=Einträge zitiert wurden (\option{mincrossrefs=2}). +Der Wert für \option{mincrossrefs} lässt sich natürlich individuell anpassen. + +\achtung{}Der Verweis funktioniert nur mit dem \texttt{xref}"=Feld. Mit dem Feld +\texttt{crossref} arbeitet diese Verweistechnik \emph{nicht} zusammen! Anders als +bei der Benutzung des Feldes \texttt{crossref} in herkömmlichem \BibTeX{} +werden die fehlenden Felder nämlich nicht einfach in den Kind"=Eintrag importiert. +Stattdessen wird ein spezieller Zitierbefehl ausgeführt, der die entsprechenden +Daten des Eltern"=Eintrags liefert. + +\subsection{Besonderheiten} +\subsubsection{Verwendung mit \xbx{footnote-dw}} +Die Querverweis"=Funktionalität arbeitet auch mit dem Stil \xbx{footnote-dw} zusammen. +Wenn man die Option \option{xref=true} verwendet, wird beim ersten Zitat des +Eltern"=Eintrags ein \cmd{label} gesetzt. Dabei spielt es keine Rolle, ob der +Eltern"=Eintrag selbst oder durch einen Kind"=Eintrag zitiert wurde. Sobald ein +(zweiter) Kind"=Eintrag zitiert wird, wird ein Kurzzitat des Eltern"=Eintrags mit einem Verweis +auf die Fußnote des ersten Zitats, in dem der Eltern"=Eintrag vorkam, ausgegeben. + +\subsubsection{Mehrbändige \enquote{Eltern}} +Wenn ein Eltern"=Eintrag ein mehrbändiges Werk ist, bezieht sich der +Kind"=Eintrag normalerweise auf einen bestimmten Band des Eltern"=Eintrags und +nicht auf den gesamten Eintrag. Um das zu berücksichtigen, wird zunächst +überprüft, ob im Kind-Eintrag das Feld \texttt{volume} vorhanden ist. Wenn dies +der Fall ist, wird überprüft, ob im Eltern"=Eintrag das Feld \texttt{volume} +ebenfalls vorhanden ist. Nur wenn das nicht der Fall ist, wird die Bandangabe +des Kind"=Eintrags unmittelbar vor der Seitenangabe ausgegeben.% +\footnote{Der Grund, warum auf das bloße Vorhandensein +des \texttt{volume}"=Feldes und nicht auf die Übereinstimmung geprüft wird, ist folgender: +Sobald das Feld \texttt{volume} des Eltern"=Eintrags vorhanden ist, handelt es sich +um einen Einzelband eines mehrbändigen Werkes. Ist nun beim Kind"=Eintrag ein anderer +Band im \texttt{volume}"=Feld angegeben, wird es sich um einen Fehler handeln. Mir ist +jedenfalls kein Szenario eingefallen, bei dem ein Kind"=Eintrag eine andere Bandangabe +erforderte als der dazugehörige Eltern"=Eintrag.} In diesem Fall wird gleichzeitig +geprüft, ob die Angaben im Feld \texttt{date} übereinstimmen. Ist dies nicht der Fall +(wenn etwa das mehrbändige Werk über mehrere Jahre erschienen ist), wird zusätzlich +zur Bandangabe auch das Erscheinungsjahr ausgegeben. Außerdem wird dann schließlich +auch noch überprüft, ob die Angaben im Feld \texttt{location} (oder \texttt{address}) +übereinstimmen. Tun sie das nicht (etwa wenn das mehrbändige Werk an unterschiedlichen +Orten erschienen ist, der konkrete Band, auf den sich der Kind"=Eintrag bezieht, aber nur +in einem Ort), wird vor dem Erscheinungsjahr auch noch der Erscheinungsort ausgegeben. + +\section{Die Optionen im Überblick} + +\subsection{Globale Optionen} +Globale Optionen gelten für alle Literaturverweise im Dokument; sie werden entweder +als Option beim Laden von \bl{} oder in einer Konfigurationsdatei (\texttt{biblatex.cfg}) +gesetzt. Der Wert in Klammern gibt den Standard an. + \optlist{acronyms}{false} + Nur wenn man die Option auf \wert{true} setzt, wird die Eintragsoption + \option{acronym} beachtet. + \optlist[nur \xbx{authortitle-dw}]{addyear}{false} + Setzt man die Option auf \wert{true}, wird in Literaturverweisen nach dem Titel + das Jahr in Klammern hinzugefügt. + \optlist{annotation}{false} + Das Feld \texttt{annotation} wird am Ende des Eintrags in der + Bibliographie ausgegeben. + \optlist{citeauthor}{namefont} + Legt den Schriftschnitt der Autorennamen bei Verwendung des Befehls \cmd{citeauthor} + fest. Mögliche Werte sind \wert{namefont}, \wert{normalfont} und + \wert{namefontfoot}. + \optlist{citeauthorname}{normal} + Legt fest, ob bei \cmd{citeauthor} oder \cmd{textcite} nur der Nachname oder der volle + Name ausgegeben wird. Mögliche Werte sind \wert{normal} (nur Nachname), \wert{full} + (immer voller Name) und \wert{firstfull} (beim ersten Zitat voller Name, danach nur + Nachname). + \optlist{citedas}{true} + Bei Einträgen mit \texttt{shorthand} wird dem Erstzitat (bei + \xbx{authortitle-dw} nur mit der Option \option{firstfull}) ein + \enquote{im Folgenden zit. als~\ldots} angefügt. + \optlist{citepages}{separate} + Legt fest, ob bei einem Voll- oder Erstzitat (bei \xbx{authortitle-dw} nur mit der + Option \option{firstfull}) eines Eintrags mit \texttt{pages}"=Feld die Seitenangaben + ausgegeben werden oder nicht. + \optlist{edbyidem}{true} + \enquote{hg.\,v.\,dems.} statt \enquote{hg.\,v. \emph{Herausgeber}}. + \optlist{editionstring}{false} + Setzt den Ausdruck \enquote{Aufl.} immer hinter die Edition, unabhängig vom Inhalt + des Feldes \texttt{edition}. + \optlist{editorstring}{parens} + Setzt den Ausdruck \enquote{Hrsg.} (und bei \option{usetranslator=true} + auch \enquote{Übers.}) in runde Klammern (\wert{parens}) oder + in eckige Klammern (\wert{brackets}). Mit dem Wert \wert{normal} wird der + Ausdruck \enquote{Hrsg.} nach dem Namen des Herausgebers und einem + angehängten Komma angefügt. + \optlist{editorstringfont}{normal} + Schriftart, die für den Ausdruck \enquote{Hrsg.} (und bei \option{usetranslator=true} + auch \enquote{Übers.}) benutzt wird: normale Schrift (\wert{normal}) oder + die Schrift, die mit der Option \option{namefont} gewählt wurde (\wert{namefont}). + \optlist{edstringincitations}{true} + Setzt im Zitat den Ausdruck \enquote{Hrsg.} (und bei \option{usetranslator=true} + auch \enquote{Übers.}) hinter den Herausgeber bzw. Übersetzer. + \optlist{edsuper}{false} + Die Auf"|lage (\texttt{edition}) wird als hochgestellte Zahl direkt vor + dem Jahr ausgegeben. + \optlist[nur \xbx{authortitle-dw}]{firstfull}{false} + Beim ersten Zitat wird die volle Literaturangabe ausgegeben. + \optlist{firstnamefont}{normal} + Legt den Schriftschnitt der Vornamen von Autoren und Editoren fest, ebenso + von Namensaffixen und (mit der Option \option{useprefix=false}) + Namenspräfixen. + Mögliche Werte sind \wert{smallcaps} (Kapitälchen), \wert{italic} (kursiv), + \wert{bold} (fett) und \wert{normal} (Voreinstellung~-- das heißt, + der normale Schriftschnitt wird verwendet). + \optlist{ibidemfont}{normal} + Legt den Schriftschnitt von \enquote{ebenda}\slash\enquote{ebd.} fest. + Mögliche Werte sind \wert{smallcaps} (Kapitälchen), \wert{italic} (kursiv), + \wert{bold} (fett) und \wert{normal} (Voreinstellung~-- das heißt, + der normale Schriftschnitt wird verwendet). + \optlist{idembib}{true} + \enquote{Ders.}\slash\enquote{Dies.} oder \enquote{---} statt Namen bei + aufeinanderfolgenden Einträgen derselben Autoren\slash Herausgeber in der + Bibliographie. + \optlist{idembibformat}{idem} + Nur bei Benutzung von \option{idembib=true}: Mit \wert{idem} werden die + Namen durch \enquote{Ders.}\slash\enquote{Dies.} ersetzt, mit \wert{dash} + durch einen langen Strich (\enquote{---}). + \optnur[kein Standard gesetzt]{idemfont} + Legt den Schriftschnitt von \enquote{Ders.}\slash\enquote{Dies.} fest. + Mögliche Werte sind \wert{smallcaps} (Kapitälchen), \wert{italic} (kursiv), + \wert{bold} (fett) und \wert{normal}. Wird die Option nicht gesetzt, so + wird der Schriftschnitt von der Option \option{namefont} übernommen (das + ist auch die Voreinstellung). + \optlist[nur \xbx{authortitle-dw}]{inreference}{normal} + Mit \wert{inreference=full} werden \texttt{@inreference}"=Einträge in Literaturverweisen + vollständig ausgegeben, aber nicht in die Bibliographie aufgenommen. + \optlist{journalnumber}{standard} + Position der Heftnummer (\texttt{number}) einer Zeitschrift: bei + \wert{standard} wie in den Standard"=Stilen, bei \wert{afteryear} nach dem + Jahr (\texttt{year}\slash \texttt{date}), eingeleitet durch den \emph{bibliography string} \enquote{number} + (\enquote{Nr.}), und bei \wert{date} in Abhängigkeit von den Datumsangaben + (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{journalnumberdate} auf + Seite~\pageref{journalnumberdate}). + \optlist{library}{false} + Das Feld \texttt{library} wird am Ende des Eintrags in der Bibliographie + ausgegeben. + \optlist{namefont}{normal} + Legt den Schriftschnitt der Nachnamen von Autoren und Editoren fest, + ebenso von Namenspräfixen (mit der Option \option{useprefix=true}). + Mögliche Werte sind \wert{smallcaps} (Kapitälchen), \wert{italic} (kursiv), + \wert{bold} (fett) und \wert{normal} (Voreinstellung~-- das heißt, + der normale Schriftschnitt wird verwendet). + \optlist{nopublisher}{true} + Der Verlag wird nicht ausgegeben. + \optlist{nolocation}{false} + Setzt man die Option auf \wert{true}, wird der Ort nicht ausgegeben. + Außerdem wird dann auch der Verlag nicht ausgegeben, + selbst wenn \option{nopublisher} auf \wert{false} gesetzt wird. + \optlist{oldauthor}{true} + Setzt man die Option auf \wert{false}, werden die Eintragsoptionen + \option{oldauthor} und \option{oldbookauthor} ignoriert. + \optlist{omiteditor}{false} + Unterdrückt die Ausgabe des Herausgebers in Literaturverweisen. + \optlist{origfields}{true} + Mit \option{origfields=true} werden die Felder \texttt{origlocation} und + \texttt{origdate} (sowie \texttt{origpublisher}, wenn + \option{nopublisher=false} eingestellt ist) ausgegeben. + \optlist{origfieldsformat}{punct} + Mit dieser Option kann man einstellen, wie die Angaben zum Nachdruck (mit + \option{origfields=true}) ausgegeben werden sollen: in runden + (\wert{parens}) oder eckigen (\wert{brackets}) Klammern, oder eingeleitet + durch \cmd{origfieldspunct} (Voreinstellung ist ein Komma). + \optlist[nur \xbx{footnote-dw}]{pageref}{false} + Zusätzlich zur Fußnotennummer wird auch auf die Seitenzahl des ersten Zitats + verwiesen. + \optlist{pagetotal}{false} + Das Feld \texttt{pagetotal} wird ausgegeben oder die Ausgabe unterdrückt. + \optlist{pseudoauthor}{true} + Setzt man die Option auf \wert{false}, werden Autoren von Einträgen mit der Eintragsoption + \option{pseudoauthor} \emph{nicht} ausgegeben. + \optlist{series}{standard} + Position der Reihe (\texttt{series}) eines Werkes: bei \wert{standard} wie + in den Standard"=Stilen, bei \wert{afteryear} nach dem Jahr und bei \wert{beforeedition} vor der Auf"|lage + (\texttt{year}\slash \texttt{date}). + \optlist{seriesformat}{parens} + Format der Reihe (\texttt{series}) eines Werkes: bei \wert{standard} wie in + den Standard"=Stilen, bei \wert{parens} in Klammern. + \optlist{shorthandibid}{true} + Direkte Folgezitate von Einträgen mit \texttt{shorthand} werden durch + \enquote{ebd.} ersetzt. + \optlist{shorthandinbib}{false} + Setzt man die Option auf \wert{true}, werden die Siglen (\texttt{shorthand}) + im Literaturverzeichnis direkt vor dem Eintrag ausgegeben. + \optnur[kein Standard gesetzt]{shorthandwidth} + Legt die Breite der Label im Sigelverzeichnis \emph{(List of Shorthands)} + fest. Gleichzeitig werden nach jedem Label \cmd{shorthandsep} + (standardmäßig 3pt) und \cmd{shorthandpunct} (standardmäßig ein + Doppelpunkt) ausgeführt. + \optlist{shortjournal}{false} + Mit \option{shortjournal=true} wird das Feld \texttt{shortjournal} statt des + \texttt{journaltitle} ausgewertet. Falls \texttt{shortjournal} nicht + vorhanden ist, wird \texttt{journaltitle} (und ggf. \texttt{journalsubtitle}) + verwendet. + \optlist{singletitle}{false} + Setzt man die Option auf \wert{true}, wird der Titel in Literaturverweisen + unterdrückt, falls nicht mehr als ein Werk desselben Autors vorhanden ist. + Vollzitate sind davon ausgenommen. + \optlist{terselos}{true} + Es wird ein knapperes Sigelverzeichnis \emph{(List of Shorthands)} + ausgegeben. + \optlist{xref}{false} + Die Querverweis"=Funktionalität wird verwendet und die Option \option{mincrossrefs} + auf den Wert \wert{1} gesetzt. Genaueres dazu findet sich + im Abschnitt~\ref{xreffunctionality} auf Seite~\pageref{xreffunctionality}. + +\subsection{Optionen für einzelne Einträge} +Eintragsoptionen werden für jeden einzelnen Eintrag im Feld \texttt{options} gesetzt. +Sie überschreiben für den jeweiligen Eintrag eventuell gesetzte globale Optionen. + \opt{acronym} + Die Siglen (\texttt{shorthand}, bei \option{shortjournal=true} auch + \texttt{shortjournal}) werden mit dem Befehl \cmd{mkbibacro} gesetzt, + sofern die globale Option \option{acronyms} aktiviert ist. + \opt{citedas} + Bei Einträgen mit \texttt{shorthand} nach dem Erstzitat (bei + \xbx{authortitle-dw} nur mit der Option \option{firstfull}) das + angefügte \enquote{im Folgenden zit. als~\ldots} erzwingen (\wert{true}) + bzw. unterdrücken (\wert{false}). + \opt{oldauthor} + Der Autor (Feld \texttt{author}) wird nicht in dem mit \option{namefont} gewählten Schriftschnitt + gesetzt, sofern die globale Option \option{oldauthor} aktiviert ist. + \opt{oldbookauthor} + Der Buchautor (Feld \texttt{bookauthor}) wird nicht in dem mit \option{namefont} gewählten Schriftschnitt + gesetzt, sofern die globale Option \option{oldauthor} aktiviert ist. + \opt{pseudoauthor} + Der Autor wird von \cmd{bibleftpseudo} und \cmd{bibrightpseudo} umgeben, + sofern die globale Option \option{pseudoauthor} auf \wert{true} gesetzt ist. + Bei globaler Option \option{pseudoauthor=false} wird der Autor von Einträgen + mit der Eintragsoption \option{pseudoauthor=true} gar nicht ausgegeben. + \opt{shorthandibid} + Bei Einträgen mit Sigle (\texttt{shorthand}) wird~-- unabhängig von der + globalen Option \option{shorthandibid}~-- bei direkt aufeinanderfolgenden + Wiederholungszitaten die Sigle durch \enquote{ebd.} ersetzt (\wert{true}) + bzw. nicht ersetzt (\wert{false}). + +\subsection{\texorpdfstring{\bl"=}{biblatex-}Optionen} +Im Folgenden werden Optionen aufgeführt, die von \bl{} zur Verfügung gestellt und von \bldw{} lediglich auf einen bestimmten Wert voreingestellt werden. Nähere Informationen zu diesen Optionen sind der \bl"=Dokumentation zu entnehmen. + + \optset{autocite}{footnote} + Für den Befehl \cmd{autocite} wird ein \cmd{footcite} ausgeführt. + \optset{citetracker}{true} + Der \emph{citation tracker}, der überprüft, ob ein Werk bereits zitiert + wurde, wird global aktiviert. + \optset{doi}{false} + Das Feld \texttt{doi} wird ausgegeben oder die Ausgabe unterdrückt. + \optset{eprint}{false} + Das Feld \texttt{eprint} wird ausgegeben oder die Ausgabe unterdrückt. + \optset{ibidtracker}{constrict} + Bei direkten Folgezitaten desselben Werks wird \enquote{ebd.} ausgegeben. + Dabei werden Text und Fußnoten unabhängig voneinander behandelt. + \optset{idemtracker}{constrict} + Bei direkten Folgezitaten desselben Autors wird dessen Name durch + \enquote{ders.} ersetzt. Dabei werden Text und Fußnoten unabhängig + voneinander behandelt. + \optset{isbn}{false} + Die Felder \texttt{isbn}, \texttt{isrn} und \texttt{issn} werden + ausgegeben oder die Ausgabe unterdrückt. + \optset{loccittracker}{false} + Der \emph{\enquote{loccit} tracker}, der überprüft, ob die Stelle eines + Werks dieselbe ist wie die des zuletzt von diesem Autor zitierten Werks, + wird ausgeschaltet. + \optset{opcittracker}{false} + Der \emph{\enquote{opcit} tracker}, der überprüft, ob das Werk dasselbe + ist wie das letzte von diesem Autor zitierte Werk, wird ausgeschaltet. + \optset{pagetracker}{true} + Der \emph{page tracker} wird eingeschaltet; bei einseitigen Dokumenten + prüft er auf einzelne Seiten, bei zweiseitigen Dokumenten auf + Doppelseiten. Die internen Tests \cmd{iffirstonpage} und \cmd{ifsamepage} + machen Gebrauch von dieser Einstellung. +% \optset[footnote-dw]{uniquename}{false} +% Es werden immer Vor- und Nachnamen ausgegeben. + +\subsection{Die Option \option{journalnumber=date}} +\label{journalnumberdate} +Anstatt viele Worte zu verlieren, um zu beschreiben, wie die Option +funktioniert, werden im Folgenden einfach entsprechende Beispiele +gezeigt. Dabei erscheint zunächst immer der \BibTeX"=Eintrag und darunter die +entsprechende Ausgabe mit \option{journalnumber=date}. Die Beispiele wurden +von Bernhard Tempel zusammengestellt. + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + volume = {91}, + number = {65}, + issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03-06}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Fingiert:1939} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939a, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + volume = {91}, + number = {65}, + issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Fingiert:1939a} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Gerstmann:2007a, + author = {Gerstmann, Günter}, + title = {Gerhart Hauptmann-Aktivitäten in Hohenhaus}, + journal = {Schlesischer Kulturspiegel}, + date = {2007}, + volume = {42}, + number = {1}, + pages = {13}, + issue = {Januar--März}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Gerstmann:2007a} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{GMG:1939, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + volume = {91}, + number = {65}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03-06}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{GMG:1939} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Guilford:1950, + author = {Guilford, J[oy] P[aul]}, + title = {Creativity}, + journal = {The American Psychologist}, + date = {1950-09}, + volume = {5}, + number = {9}, + pages = {444--454}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Guilford:1950} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Page:1997, + author = {Page, Penny Booth}, + title = {E.\,M. Jellinek and the evolution of alcohol studies}, + subtitle = {A critical essay}, + journal = {Addiction}, + date = {1997}, + volume = {92}, + number = {12}, + pages = {1619-1637}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Page:1997} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939b, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + number = {65}, + issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03-06}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Fingiert:1939b} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939c, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + volume = {91}, + issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Fingiert:1939c} + + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Ewers:1906, + author = {Ewers, Hanns Heinz}, + title = {Rausch und Kunst}, + journal = {Blaubuch}, + date = {1906}, + volume = {1}, + pages = {1726-1730}, + issue = {4. Quartal}, +} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Ewers:1906} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939d, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + volume = {91}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03-13}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Fingiert:1939d} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939e, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + volume = {91}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Fingiert:1939e} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Landolt:2000, + author = {Landolt, H. P. and Borbély, A. A.}, + title = {Alkohol und Schlafstörungen}, + journal = {Therapeutische Umschau}, + date = {2000}, + volume = {57}, + pages = {241-245}, +} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Landolt:2000} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Chapiro:1930, + author = {Chapiro, Joseph}, + title = {Das neueste Werk Gerhart Hauptmanns}, + subtitle = {\enquote{Die Spitzhacke}}, + journal = {Neue Freie Presse}, + number = {23773}, + pages = {1-3}, + issue = {Morgenblatt}, + date = {1930-11-19}, +} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Chapiro:1930} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939f, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + number = {65}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Fingiert:1939f} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Barski:2007, + author = {Barski, Jacek and Mahnken, Gerhard}, + title = {Museumsverbund Gerhart Hauptmann}, + subtitle = {Ein deutsch-polnisches Kulturprojekt mit Weitblick}, + journal = {Kulturpolitische Mitteilungen}, + date = {2007}, + number = {119}, + pages = {62}, + issue = {IV}, +} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Barski:2007} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Essig:2005, + author = {Essig, Rolf-Bernhard}, + title = {Mit liebender Schafsgeduld}, + subtitle = {Erhart Kästner im Dienste Gerhart Hauptmanns}, + journal = {Süddeutsche Zeitung}, + number = {237}, + pages = {16}, + date = {2005-10-14}, +} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Essig:2005} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Kluwe:2007, + author = {Kluwe, Sandra}, + title = {Furor poeticus}, + subtitle = {Ansätze zu einer neurophysiologisch fundierten Theorie der literarischen Kreativität am Beispiel der Produktionsästhetik Rilkes und Kafkas}, + journal = {literaturkritik.de}, + date = {2007-02}, + number = {2}, + url = {http://literaturkritik.de/public/rezension.php?rez_id=10438}, +} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Kluwe:2007} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Burckhardt:2006, + author = {Burckhardt, Barbara}, + title = {Frauen sind einfach klüger, starke Frauen}, + subtitle = {Michael Thalheimers \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger Thalia Theater und Schirin Khodadadians Kasseler Räuber}, + journal = {Theater heute}, + date = {2006}, + number = {5}, + pages = {14-18}, +} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Burckhardt:2006} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Ossietzky:1922, + author = {Ossietzky, Carl von}, + title = {Moritz Heimann \enquote{Armand Carrel} Staatstheater}, + journal = {Berliner Volks-Zeitung}, + date = {1922-03-30}, + issue = {Abend-Ausg\adddot} +} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Ossietzky:1922} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939g, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + issue = {Abend-Ausgabe}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Fingiert:1939g} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Weiss:1960, + author = {Weiss, Grigorij}, + title = {Auf der Suche nach der versunkenen Glocke}, + subtitle = {Johannes R. Becher bei Gerhart Hauptmann}, + journal = {Sinn und Form}, + date = {1960}, + pages = {363--385}, + issue = {Zweites Sonderheft Johannes R. Becher}, +} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Weiss:1960} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Hofer:2006, + author = {Hofer, Hermann}, + title = {Der Schrei der Verwundeten}, + subtitle = {Erschütternd: Gerhart Hauptmanns \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger Thalia Theater}, + journal = {Lübecker Nachrichten}, + date = {2006-03-14}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Hofer:2006} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Kammerhoff:2006, + author = {Kammerhoff, Heiko}, + title = {Rose Bernd}, + journal = {Szene Hamburg}, + date = {2006-04}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Kammerhoff:2006} + +\begin{lstlisting} +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939h, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939}} +\end{lstlisting} +\fullcite{Fingiert:1939h} + +\section{Befehle, Begriffe, Eintragstypen, Feldformate} +\subsection{Zusätzliche Befehle} +Im Folgenden werden die von \bldw{} zur Verfügung gestellten Befehle mit ihrer Standarddefinition aufgelistet. Diese Befehle können mit \cmd{renewcommand*} angepasst werden. + +% \befehl{}{}{} +% \befehlleer{}{} + \befehl{annotationfont}{\cmd{small}\cmd{itshape}}{Schrift des Feldes + \texttt{annotation}.} + \befehl{bibfinalnamedelim}{% + \cmd{ifnum}\cmd{value}\{liststop\}\textgreater 2\%\\ + \hspace*{8.1em}\cmd{finalandcomma}\cmd{fi}\%\\ + \hspace*{8.1em}\cmd{addspace}\cmd{bibstring\{and\}}\cmd{space}}{Begrenzer + zwischen dem vorletzten und letzten Namen bei Literaturangaben in der + Bibliographie. Vergleiche \cmd{finalnamedelim} von \bl.} + \befehlleer{bibleftpseudo}{Zeichen vor dem Autor bei Benutzung von + \option{pseudoauthor=true}.} + \befehl{bibmultinamedelim}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Begrenzer + zwischen Namen bei Literaturangaben in der Bibliographie. Vergleiche + \cmd{multinamedelim} von \bl.} + \befehl{bibrevsdnamedelim}{\cmd{addspace}}{Zusätzliches Zeichen zwischen dem + ersten und zweiten Namen bei Literaturangaben in der Bibliographie beim + Schema \enquote{Nachname, Vorname, Vorname Nachname}. Das Komma ist damit + nicht gemeint! Vergleiche \cmd{revsdnamedelim} von \bl.} + \befehlleer{bibrightpseudo}{Zeichen nach dem Autor bei Benutzung von + \option{pseudoauthor=true}.} + \befehl{citefinalnamedelim}{\cmd{slash}}{Begrenzer zwischen dem vorletzten + und letzten Namen in Zitaten. Vergleiche \cmd{finalnamedelim} von \bl.} + \befehl{citemultinamedelim}{\cmd{slash}}{Begrenzer zwischen Namen in Zitaten. + Vergleiche \cmd{multinamedelim} von \bl.} + \befehlleer{citerevsdnamedelim}{Zusätzliches Zeichen zwischen + dem ersten und zweiten Namen in Zitaten beim Schema \enquote{Nachname, + Vorname, Vorname Nachname}. Das Komma ist damit nicht gemeint! Vergleiche + \cmd{revsdnamedelim} von \bl.} + \befehl{journumstring}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}\cmd{bibstring\{number\}}% + \cmd{addnbspace}}{Zeichen\slash Begriff vor der Heftnummer + (\texttt{number}) einer Zeitschrift.} + \befehl{jourvolnumsep}{\cmd{adddot}}{Zeichen zwischen Band und Heftnummer + einer Zeitschrift (bei \option{journumafteryear=false}).} + \befehl{jourvolstring}{\cmd{addspace}}{Zeichen\slash Begriff vor dem + Jahrgangsband (\texttt{volume}) einer Zeitschrift.} + \befehl{libraryfont}{\cmd{small}\cmd{sffamily}}{Schrift des Feldes + \texttt{library}.} + \befehl{locationdatepunct}{\cmd{addspace}}{Zeichen zwischen Ort (\texttt{location}) + und Jahr (\texttt{year}\slash \texttt{date}) bei \option{nopublisher=true} oder + wenn kein Verlag angegeben wurde.} + \befehl{locationpublisherpunct}{\cmd{addcolon}\cmd{space}}{Zeichen zwischen Ort (\texttt{location}) + und Verlag (\texttt{publisher}) bei \option{nopublisher=false}.} + \befehl{origfieldspunct}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Zeichen vor dem + Nachdruck bei \option{origfields=true} und + \option{origfieldsformat=punct}.} + \befehl{publisherdatepunct}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Zeichen zwischen Verlag (\texttt{publisher}) + und Jahr (\texttt{year}\slash \texttt{date}) bei \option{nopublisher=false}.} + \befehlleer{seriespunct}{Zeichen vor dem Reihentitel (\texttt{series}), + innerhalb der Klammer.} + \befehl{sernumstring}{\cmd{addspace}}{Zeichen\slash Begriff zwischen dem + Reihentitel (\texttt{series}) und der Nummer (\texttt{number}).} + \befehl{shorthandinbibpunct}{\cmd{addspace}}{Zeichen nach einer Sigle im Literaturverzeichnis, wenn + \option{shorthandinbib} benutzt wird.} + \befehl{shorthandpunct}{\cmd{addcolon}}{Zeichen nach einer Sigle im Sigelverzeichnis, wenn + \option{shorthandwidth} benutzt wird.} + \befehl{shorthandsep}{3pt plus 0.5pt minus 0.5pt}{Länge zwischen Sigle und + Siglenbeschreibung, wenn \option{shorthandwidth} benutzt wird.} + \befehl{textcitesdelim}{\cmd{addspace}\cmd{bibstring\{and\}}\cmd{space}}{Trenner zwischen + mehreren Autoren bei Verwendung von \cmd{textcites}.} + \befehl{titleaddonpunct}{\cmd{addperiod}\cmd{space}}{Zeichen vor dem + Titelzusatz (\texttt{titleaddon}, \texttt{booktitleaddon}, + \texttt{maintitleaddon}).} + \befehl{titleyeardelim}{\cmd{addspace}}{Zeichen zwischen Titel + (\texttt{title}) und Jahr (\texttt{year}) bei Nutzung von \option{add\-year=true}.} + +\subsection{Geänderte Befehle} +In dieser Liste werden die Befehle aufgeführt, die von \bl{} zur Verfügung +gestellt und von \bldw{} umdefiniert werden. Diese Befehle können mit +\cmd{renewcommand*} angepasst werden. + \befehl{labelnamepunct}{\cmd{addcolon}\cmd{space}}{Zeichen nach Namen im + Literaturverzeichnis.} + \befehl{nametitledelim}{\cmd{addcolon}\cmd{space}}{Zeichen zwischen Name und Titel in + Zitaten.} + \befehl{newunitpunct}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Zeichen zwischen einzelnen Elementen + im Literaturverzeichnis.} + \befehl{subtitlepunct}{\cmd{addperiod}\cmd{space}}{Zeichen zwischen Titel und Untertitel.} + +\subsection{Zusätzliche Begriffe \emph{(bibliography strings)}} +In dieser Liste werden die von \bldw{} zusätzlich definierten Begriffe +aufgeführt. Es gibt sie jeweils in einer langen und einer abgekürzten Form. +Welche Form verwendet wird, hängt von der \bl"=Option \option{abbreviate} ab. + +\begin{labeling}{mmmmmmm} + \biblstring{idemdat}{demselben}{dems\cmd{adddot}} + \biblstring{idemdatsf}{derselben}{ders\cmd{adddot}} + \biblstring{idemdatsm}{demselben}{dems\cmd{adddot}} + \biblstring{idemdatsn}{demselben}{dems\cmd{adddot}} + \biblstring{idemdatpf}{denselben}{dens\cmd{adddot}} + \biblstring{idemdatpm}{denselben}{dens\cmd{adddot}} + \biblstring{idemdatpn}{denselben}{dens\cmd{adddot}} + \biblstring{idemdatpp}{denselben}{dens\cmd{adddot}} + \biblstring{inrefstring}{Artikel\cmd{addspace}}{Art\cmd{adddotspace}} + \biblstring{review}{Rezension\cmd{addspace} zu}{Rez\cmd{adddotspace} zu} +\end{labeling} + +Die \emph{bibliography strings} lassen sich folgendermaßen umdefinieren, wobei +nicht zwischen einer langen und einer kurzen Form unterschieden werden kann: +\begin{lstlisting} +\DefineBibliographyStrings{german}{% + idemdat = {idem}, + idemdatsf = {eadem}} +\end{lstlisting} + +\subsection{Geänderte Begriffe \emph{(bibliography strings)}} +In dieser Liste werden die Begriffe aufgeführt, die von \bl{} zur Verfügung +gestellt und von \bldw{} umdefiniert werden. Ob die lange oder die abgekürzte +Variante verwendet wird, hängt von der \bl"=Option \option{abbreviate} ab. + +\begin{labeling}{mmmmmmm} +% \biblstring{}{}{} + \biblstring{seenote}{wie Anmerkung}{wie Anm\cmd{adddot}} + \biblstring{reprint}{Nachdruck}{Ndr\cmd{adddot}} + \biblstring{reprintof}{Nachdruck von}{\\Ndr\cmd{adddot}\cmd{addabthinspace} v\cmd{adddot}} + \biblstring{reprintas}{Nachdruck unter dem Titel}{\\Ndr\cmd{adddotspace} u\cmd{adddot}\cmd{addabthinspace}\\% + d\cmd{adddot}\textbackslash{} Titel} + \biblstring{byauthor}{von}{v\cmd{adddot}} +\end{labeling} +Auch die übrigen zusammengesetzten Abkürzungen (wie das in der obigen Liste aufgeführte \enquote{Ndr.\,v.}) +verwenden den Befehl \cmd{add\-ab\-thin\-space}, also einen kurzen Abstand zwischen +den einzelnen Teilen der Abkürzung. Die genaue Bedeutung dieses Befehls wird +in der \bl"=Dokumentation erklärt. + +\subsection{Eintragstypen} +Die folgenden Eintragstypen werden anders als in \bl{} verwendet. + \eintragstyp{inreference}{Lexikon-Artikel}{incollection} + \eintragstyp{review}{Rezension~-- auf das rezensierte Werk kann mit \texttt{xref} + verwiesen werden}{article} + +\subsection{Zusätzliche Feldformate} +In dieser Liste werden die von \bldw{} zusätzlich definierten Feldformate +aufgeführt. + +\feldformat{shorthandinbib}{mkbibbrackets\{\#1\}}{Formatierung der Siglen + bei \option{shorthandinbib=true}.} + +\section{Weitere Hinweise} +\label{weitere-anpassungen} +Die folgenden Hinweise verstehen sich als Anregung für fortgeschrittene Anwender +und beschreiben weitere Anpassungen, die von den Optionen des Pakets \bldw{} +nicht abgedeckt werden. + +\subsection{Trennzeichen zwischen Namen} +Anders als \bl{} unterscheidet \bldw{} zwischen den Trennzeichen, die in +Zitaten verwendet werden, und denen in der Bibliographie. Bei \bl{} gibt es +lediglich \cmd{multinamedelim} (zwischen mehreren Autoren), +\cmd{finalnamedelim} (vor dem letzten Autor) und \cmd{revsdnamedelim} +(zusätzliches Zeichen bei \enquote{Nachname, Vorname\textbar\ und Vorname2 +Nachname2}: dort wo \textbar\ steht, würde \cmd{revsdnamedelim} eingefügt +werden). + +\bldw{} hingegen hat \cmd{bibmultinamedelim}, \cmd{bibfinalnamedelim} und +\cmd{bibrevsdnamedelim} für die Bibliographie sowie \cmd{citemultinamedelim}, +\cmd{citefinalnamedelim} und \cmd{citerevsdnamedelim} für die Literaturverweise +im Text. Außerdem werden \cmd{multinamedelim}, \cmd{finalnamedelim} und +\cmd{revsdnamedelim} im Sigelverzeichnis \emph{(List of Shorthands)} verwendet. +Damit lassen sich unterschiedliche Darstellungsweisen festlegen. Die +Standarddefinitionen sehen folgendermaßen aus: + +\begin{lstlisting}[commentstyle=] +\newcommand*{\multinamedelim}{\addcomma\space} +\newcommand*{\finalnamedelim}{% + \ifnum\value{liststop}>2 \finalandcomma\fi + \addspace\bibstring{and}\space} +\newcommand*{\revsdnamedelim}{} + +\newcommand*{\bibmultinamedelim}{\addcomma\space} +\newcommand*{\bibfinalnamedelim}{% + \ifnum\value{liststop}>2 \finalandcomma\fi + \addspace\bibstring{and}\space}% +\newcommand*{\bibrevsdnamedelim}{\addspace} + +\newcommand*{\citemultinamedelim}{\slash} +\newcommand*{\citefinalnamedelim}{\slash} +\newcommand*{\citerevsdnamedelim}{} +\end{lstlisting} +Damit wird bei mehreren Autoren im Text ein Schrägstrich (/) ausgegeben, im +Literaturverzeichnis und im Sigelverzeichnis dagegen Kommata bzw. (vor dem +letzten Namen) ein \enquote{und}. Die Definitionen für das Literatur- und das +Sigelverzeichnis stimmen also mit den Standarddefinitionen von \bl{} überein. +Mit \cmd{renewcommand*} lassen sich diese Befehle nach eigenen Bedürfnissen +anpassen. + +\subsection{Darstellung von Siglen (\cmd{mkbibacro})} +\label{mkbibacro-anpassen} +Wenn eine Sigle (\texttt{shorthand}) ein Akronym ist (z.\,B. \enquote{LMA} für +das \emph{Lexikon des Mittelalters}), kann man dem Eintrag +\texttt{options\,=\,\{acronym= true\}} hinzufügen und die globale Option +\option{acronyms=true} nutzen. Dann wird die Sigle mit dem Befehl \cmd{mkbibacro} +gesetzt. Dasselbe gilt für Abkürzungen von Zeitschriften (z.\,B. \enquote{HZ} für +die \emph{Historische Zeitschrift}); hier benutzt man die Felder +\texttt{shortjournal\,=\,\{HZ\}} und \texttt{options\,=\,\{acronym=true\}}. + +In \bl{} werden Akronyme (also Abkürzungen) wie z.\,B. \enquote{\textsc{url}} in +Kapitälchen gesetzt. Dazu wird der Befehl \cmd{mkbibacro} benutzt, der standardmäßig +folgendermaßen definiert ist: +\begin{lstlisting} +\newcommand*{\mkbibacro}[1]{% + \ifcsundef{\f@encoding/\f@family/\f@series/sc} + {#1} + {\textsc{\MakeLowercase{#1}}}} +\end{lstlisting} +Das bedeutet: Falls Kapitälchen in der verwendeten Schrift vorhanden sind, werden +Akronyme in Kapitälchen gesetzt, ansonsten normal. + +Hat man in einer Schrift keine Kapitälchen, kann man für +Akronyme Großbuchstaben verwenden, die leicht gesperrt werden und etwas kleiner +sind als gewöhnliche Großbuchstaben. Die Sperrung lässt sich (bei Verwendung von +\paket{pdftex} bzw. \paket{pdf"|latex}) mit dem Paket \paket{microtype} einstellen. Die +Verkleinerung lässt sich mit dem Paket \paket{scalefnt} erreichen. Somit könnte man +den Befehl \cmd{mkbibacro} folgendermaßen anpassen: +\begin{lstlisting} +\usepackage{scalefnt} +\usepackage{microtype} +\renewcommand{\mkbibacro}[1]{% + \textls[55]{\scalefont{0.95}#1}\isdot} +\end{lstlisting} +Die Werte für \cmd{textls} und \cmd{scalefont} lassen sich natürlich den eigenen +Vorstellungen oder Anforderungen anpassen. + +\end{document} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-authortitle-dw.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-authortitle-dw.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d479778800 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-authortitle-dw.pdf diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-authortitle-dw.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-authortitle-dw.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7c7ede7678 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-authortitle-dw.tex @@ -0,0 +1,174 @@ +% v 1.7 +% This file presents the `authortitle-dw' style +% +\listfiles +\documentclass[a4paper]{article} +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} +\usepackage[ngerman]{babel} +\usepackage[autostyle]{csquotes} +\usepackage[ + style=authortitle-dw, +%% biblatex-dw-Optionen %%% +% acronyms=true, +% addyear=true, + annotation=true, +% citeauthor=normalfont,%namefontfoot,%namefont, +% citeauthorname=firstfull,%full,%normal +% citedas=false, +% citepages=suppress,%omit,%permit,%separate, +% edbyidem=false, +% editorstring=normal,%brackets, +% edstringincitations=false, +% edsuper=true, +% firstfull=true, +% firstnamefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold, +% ibidemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold, +% idembib=false, +% idembibformat=dash, +% idemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold, +% inreference=full,%normal, +% journalnumber=afteryear,%date,%standard + library=true, +% namefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold, +% nolocation=true, +% nopublisher=false, +% oldauthor=false, +% omiteditor=true, +% origfields=false, +% origfieldsformat=parens,%brackets,%punct, +% pagetotal=true, +% pseudoauthor=false, + series=beforeedition,%afteryear,%beforeedition,%standard +% shorthandibid=false, +% shorthandinbib=true, +% shorthandwidth=40pt,%3em, +% shortjournal=true, +% terselos=false, +% xref=true, +%% biblatex-Optionen %%% +% autocite=plain, +% citetracker=false, +% doi=true, +% eprint=true, +% ibidpage=true, +% ibidtracker=false, +% idemtracker=false, +% isbn=true, +% pagetracker=false, + hyperref, + backend=biber +]{biblatex} +\usepackage{hyperref} +\bibliography{de-examples-dw} +% Some generic settings: +\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}} +\usepackage{xcolor} +\newcommand{\option}[1]{\textcolor{red}{#1}} +\setlength{\parindent}{0pt} + +%\renewcommand*{\bibleftpseudo}{\bibleftbracket} +%\renewcommand*{\bibrightpseudo}{\bibrightbracket} + +\begin{document} + +\section*{Der Stil \texttt{authortitle-dw}} + +\subsection*{\cmd{cite}-Beispiele} + +\cite{aristotle:rhetoric} + +\cite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} + +\cite[Siehe][]{springer} + +\cite[Siehe][92--95]{springer} + +\subsection*{\cmd{parencite}-Beispiele} + +Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite{aristotle:rhetoric}. + +Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}. + +Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite[Siehe][]{springer}. + +Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}. + +\subsection*{\cmd{citeauthor}- und \cmd{parencite*}-Beispiele} + +\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext +ist \parencite*{aristotle:rhetoric}. + +\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext +ist \parencite*[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}. + +\citeauthor{springer} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext +ist \parencite*[Siehe][]{springer}. + +\citeauthor{springer} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext +ist \parencite*[Siehe][92--95]{springer}. + +\subsection*{\cmd{footcite}-Beispiele} + +Dies ist nur Fülltext.\footcite{aristotle:rhetoric} + +Dies ist nur Fülltext.\footcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} + +Dies ist nur Fülltext.\footcite[Siehe][]{springer} + +Dies ist nur Fülltext.\footcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer} + +\subsection*{\cmd{textcite}-Beispiele} + +\textcite{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext ist. + +\textcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext ist. + +\textcite[Siehe][]{springer} für mehr Fülltext. + +\textcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer} für mehr Fülltext. + +\subsection*{\cmd{autocite}-Beispiele} + +Dies ist nur Fülltext \autocite{springer}. + +\subsection*{Mehrere Zitate} + +\cite{aristotle:rhetoric,aristotle:physics,aristotle:poetics} + +\subsection*{Shorthand-Beispiele} + +\cite{kant:kpv} + +\cite[noch einmal]{kant:kpv} + +\cite{kant:ku} + +\subsection*{\cmd{fullcite}-Beispiele} + +Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite{aristotle:rhetoric} + +Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} + +Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite[Siehe][]{springer} + +Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer} + +\subsection*{\cmd{footfullcite}-Beispiele} + +Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite{aristotle:rhetoric} + +Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} + +Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite[Siehe][]{springer} + +Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer} + +\clearpage + +\printshorthands + +\nocite{*} +\printbibliography[notkeyword=journalnumberdate] + +\end{document} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-examples-dw.bib b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-examples-dw.bib new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c89d3018f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-examples-dw.bib @@ -0,0 +1,851 @@ +@PREAMBLE{ "\providecommand*{\BibTeX}{Bib\TeX} " } + +@STRING{cup = {Cambridge University Press}} + +@STRING{dtv = {Deutscher Taschenbuch-Verlag}} + +@ARTICLE{angenendt, + author = {Angenendt, Arnold}, + title = {In Honore Salvatoris~-- Vom Sinn und Unsinn der Patrozinienkunde}, + shorttitle = {In Honore Salvatoris}, + volume = {97}, + date = {2002}, + pages = {431--456, 791--823}, + annotation = {Ein deutschsprachiger Aufsatz in einer französischen Zeitschrift. + Abgesehen davon ein typischer \texttt{article}-Eintrag. Man beachte + die Felder \texttt{indextitle}, \texttt{shortjournal} und \texttt{options}.}, + hyphenation = {german}, + indextitle = {In Honore Salvatoris}, + journaltitle = {Revue d'Histoire Eccl{\'e}siastique}, + shortjournal = {RHE}, + library = {Im Feld \texttt{library} ist Platz für Bibliotheksinformationen.}, + options = {acronym=true} +} + +@BOOK{aristotle:rhetoric, + author = {Aristoteles}, + title = {The Rhetoric of Aristotle with a commentary by the late Edward Meredith + Cope}, + shorttitle = {Rhetoric}, + publisher = cup, + date = {1877}, + editor = {Cope, Edward Meredith}, + annotation = {Eine kommentierte Edition. Man beachte die Verknüpfung der Felder + \texttt{editor} und \texttt{commentator} sowie \texttt{volumes}, + \texttt{sorttitle} und \texttt{indextitle}.}, + commentator = {Cope, Edward Meredith}, + hyphenation = {british}, + indextitle = {Rhetoric of Aristotle, The}, + keywords = {primary}, + options = {oldauthor}, + sorttitle = {Rhetoric of Aristotle}, + volumes = {3} +} + +@BOOK{aristotle:anima, + author = {Aristoteles}, + title = {De Anima}, + publisher = cup, + date = {1907}, + editor = {Hicks, Robert Drew}, + annotation = {Ein \texttt{book}-Eintrag mit Autor (\texttt{author}) und Herausgeber + (\texttt{editor}).}, + hyphenation = {british}, + keywords = {primary}, + location = {Cambridge}, + options = {oldauthor} +} + +@BOOK{aristotle:poetics, + author = {Aristoteles}, + title = {Poetics}, + shorttitle = {Poetics}, + publisher = {Clarendon Press}, + date = {1968}, + editor = {Lucas, D. W.}, + series = {Clarendon Aristotle}, + annotation = {Ein \texttt{book}-Eintrag mit Autor (\texttt{author}) und Herausgeber + (\texttt{editor}) sowie einem \texttt{series}-Feld.}, + hyphenation = {british}, + keywords = {primary}, + location = {Oxford}, + options = {oldauthor} +} + +@BOOK{aristotle:physics, + author = {Aristoteles}, + title = {Physics}, + shorttitle = {Physics}, + publisher = {G. P. Putnam}, + date = {1929}, + annotation = {Ein \texttt{book}-Eintrag mit einem \texttt{translator}-Feld.}, + hyphenation = {american}, + keywords = {primary}, + location = {New York}, + options = {oldauthor}, + translator = {Wicksteed, P. H. and Cornford, F. M.} +} + +@BOOK{averroes/bland, + author = {Averroes}, + title = {The Epistle on the Possibility of Conjunction with the Active Intellect + by Ibn Rushd with the Commentary of Moses Narboni}, + shorttitle = {Possibility of Conjunction}, + publisher = {Jewish Theological Seminary of America}, + date = {1982}, + editor = {Bland, Kalman P.}, + series = {Moreshet Studies in Jewish History, Literature and Thought}, + number = {7}, + annotation = {Ein \texttt{book}-Eintrag mit Reihe (\texttt{series}) und Reihennummer + (\texttt{number}).}, + hyphenation = {american}, + indextitle = {Epistle on the Possibility of Conjunction, The}, + keywords = {primary}, + location = {New York}, + options = {oldauthor}, + translator = {Bland, Kalman P.} +} + +@BOOK{averroes/hannes, + author = {Averroes}, + title = {Des Averro{\"e}s Abhandlung: \enquote{{\"U}ber die M{\"o}glichkeit + der Conjunktion} oder \enquote{{\"U}ber den materiellen Intellekt}}, + shorttitle = {M{\"o}glichkeit der Conjunktion}, + publisher = {C.~A. Kaemmerer}, + date = {1892}, + editor = {Hannes, Ludwig}, + annotation = {Eine kommentierte Edition. Man beachte die Verknüpfung der Felder + \texttt{editor}, \texttt{translator} und \texttt{commentator}; ebenso + die Felder \texttt{shorttitle}, \texttt{indextitle}, \texttt{sorttitle}, + und \texttt{indexsorttitle}.}, + annotator = {Hannes, Ludwig}, + hyphenation = {german}, + indexsorttitle = {Uber die Moglichkeit der Conjunktion}, + indextitle = {{\"U}ber die M{\"o}glichkeit der Conjunktion}, + keywords = {primary}, + location = {Halle an der Saale}, + options = {oldauthor}, + sorttitle = {Uber die Moglichkeit der Conjunktion}, + translator = {Hannes, Ludwig} +} + +@BOOK{averroes/hercz, + author = {Averroes}, + title = {Drei Abhandlungen {\"u}ber die Conjunction des separaten Intellects + mit dem Menschen}, + shorttitle = {Drei Abhandlungen}, + subtitle = {Von Averroes (Vater und Sohn), aus dem Arabischen {\"u}bersetzt von + Samuel Ibn Tibbon}, + publisher = {S.~Hermann}, + date = {1869}, + editor = {Hercz, J.}, + annotation = {Ein \texttt{book}-Eintrag. Man beachte die Verknüpfung der Felder + \texttt{editor} und \texttt{translator} sowie die Felder \texttt{indextitle} + und \texttt{indexsorttitle}.}, + hyphenation = {german}, + indexsorttitle = {Drei Abhandlungen uber die Conjunction}, + indextitle = {Drei Abhandlungen {\"u}ber die Conjunction}, + keywords = {primary}, + location = {Berlin}, + options = {oldauthor}, + translator = {Hercz, J.} +} + +@INCOLLECTION{brandt, + author = {von Brandt, Ahasver and Erich Hoffmann}, + title = {Die nordischen L{\"a}nder von der Mitte des 11.~Jahrhunderts bis + 1448}, + shorttitle = {Die nordischen L{\"a}nder}, + pages = {884--917}, + editor = {Ferdinand Seibt}, + booktitle = {Europa im Hoch- und Sp{\"a}tmittelalter}, + publisher = {Klett-Cotta}, + date = {1987}, + series = {Handbuch der europ{\"a}ischen Geschichte}, + number = {2}, + annotation = {Ein \texttt{incollection}-Eintrag mit Reihe (\texttt{series}) und + Nummer (\texttt{number}). Man beachte das Format des Namens und vergleiche + die \texttt{useprefix}-Option im Feld \texttt{options}. Man beachte + außerdem die Felder \texttt{indextitle} und \texttt{indexsorttitle}.}, + hyphenation = {german}, + indexsorttitle = {Nordischen Lander von der Mitte des 11. Jahrhunderts bis 1448}, + indextitle = {Nordischen L{\"a}nder von der Mitte des 11.~Jahrhunderts bis 1448, + Die}, + location = {Stuttgart}, + options = {useprefix=false} +} + +@BOOK{cicero, + author = {Cicero, Marcus Tullius}, + title = {De natura deorum. {\"U}ber das Wesen der G{\"o}tter}, + shorttitle = {De natura deorum}, + publisher = {Reclam}, + date = {1995}, + editor = {Blank-Sangmeister, Ursula}, + afterword = {Thraede, Klaus}, + annotation = {Eine zweisprachige Edition von Ciceros \emph{De natura deorum} mit + deutscher Übersetzung. Man beachte das Format des \texttt{language}-Felds + in der \texttt{bib}-Datei, die Verknüpfung der Felder \texttt{editor} + und \texttt{translator} sowie das Feld \texttt{afterword}.}, + hyphenation = {german}, + indextitle = {De natura deorum}, + language = {langlatin and langgerman}, + location = {Stuttgart}, + translator = {Blank-Sangmeister, Ursula} +} + +@Article{duggan, + author = {Duggan, Anne J.}, + title = {The Lorv\~ao transcription of Benedict of Peterborough's \emph{Liber + miraculorum beati Thome}: Lisbon, Cod.~Alcobaça CCXC/143}, + shorttitle = {The Lorv\~ao transcription}, + journal = {Scriptorium}, + volume = {51}, + date = {1997}, + pages = {51-68}, + gender = {sf}, + number = {1}, + hyphenation = {english}, + annotation = {Ein englischsprachiger Aufsatz in einer Zeitschrift. + Abgesehen davon ein typischer \texttt{article}-Eintrag. Man beachte + das Feld \texttt{number} und seine Ausgabe.}, +} + +@THESIS{geer, + author = {de Geer, Ingrid}, + title = {Earl, Saint, Bishop, Skald~-- and Music}, + date = {1985}, + type = {phdthesis}, + annotation = {Dies ist ein typischer \texttt{thesis}-Eintrag für eine Dissertationsschrift. + Man beachte das Feld \texttt{type} in der \texttt{bib}-Datei, das + einen \emph{localization key} enthält.}, + hyphenation = {british}, + institution = {Uppsala Universitet}, + location = {Uppsala}, + subtitle = {The Orkney Earldom of the Twelfth Century. A Musicological Study} +} + +@BOOK{iliad, + author = {Homer}, + title = {Die Ilias}, + shorttitle = {Ilias}, + publisher = {Artemis \& Winkler}, + date = {2004}, + edition = {3}, + annotation = {Eine deutsche Übersetzung der \emph{Ilias}. Man beachte die Felder + \texttt{translator} und \texttt{introduction}, das Format des \texttt{location}-Felds + in der \texttt{bib}-Datei sowie die Felder \texttt{sorttitle} und + \texttt{indextitle}.}, + hyphenation = {german}, + indextitle = {Ilias, Die}, + introduction = {Latacz, Joachim}, + location = {D{\"u}sseldorf and Z{\"u}rich}, + sorttitle = {Ilias}, + translator = {Schadewaldt, Wolfgang} +} + +@INBOOK{kant:kpv, + author = {Kant, Immanuel}, + title = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft}, + shorttitle = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft}, + pages = {1--163}, + bookauthor = {Kant, Immanuel}, + booktitle = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft. Kritik der Urtheilskraft}, + publisher = {Walter de Gruyter}, + date = {1968}, + annotation = {Eine Edition von Kants Werken, Band 5. Dies ist ein \texttt{inbook}-Eintrag, + der sich nur auf die \emph{Kritik der praktischen Vernunft} bezieht, + nicht auf den gesamten fünften Band. Man beachte die Felder \texttt{author} + und \texttt{bookauthor} in der \texttt{bib}-Datei. In den Standardeinstellungen + wird \texttt{bookauthor} ignoriert, falls die Werte der Felder \texttt{author} + und \texttt{bookauthor} identisch sind.}, + hyphenation = {german}, + location = {Berlin}, + maintitle = {Kants Werke. Akademie Textausgabe}, + shorthand = {KpV}, + volume = {5} +} + +@INBOOK{kant:ku, + author = {Kant, Immanuel}, + title = {Kritik der Urtheilskraft}, + pages = {165--485}, + bookauthor = {Kant, Immanuel}, + booktitle = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft. Kritik der Urtheilskraft}, + publisher = {Walter de Gruyter}, + date = {1968}, + annotation = {Eine Edition von Kants Werken, Band 5. Dies ist ein \texttt{inbook}-Eintrag, + der sich nur auf die \emph{Kritik der Urtheilskraft} bezieht, nicht + auf den gesamten fünften Band.}, + hyphenation = {german}, + location = {Berlin}, + maintitle = {Kants Werke. Akademie Textausgabe}, + shorthand = {KU}, + volume = {5} +} + +@INREFERENCE{enzensberger, + author = {Enzensberger, Horst}, + title = {Capo Colonne, Schlacht v\adddot}, + xref = {LMA}, + volume = {2}, + date = {1983}, + location = {München and Zürich}, + pages = {1484}, + pagination = {column}, + bookpagination = {column}, + booktitle = {Lexikon des Mittelalters}, + gender = {sm}, + hyphenation = {ngerman}, + annotation = {Ein Lexikonartikel, also ein typischer \texttt{inreference}-Eintrag. + Zu beachten sind auch die Felder \texttt{xref}, \texttt{pagination} und + \texttt{bookpagination}} +} + +@REFERENCE{LMA, + title = {Lexikon des Mittelalters}, + location = {München and Zürich}, + date = {1980/1999}, + gender = {pp}, + hyphenation = {ngerman}, + volumes = {10}, + shorthand = {LMA}, + options = {acronym=true}, + annotation = {Ein \texttt{reference}-Eintrag, gedacht für Nachschlagewerke. Intern + nichts anderes als ein \texttt{collection}-Eintrag. Man beachte auch das Feld + \texttt{options}.} +} + +@ONLINE{markey, + author = {Markey, Nicolas}, + title = {Tame the BeaST}, + annotation = {Ein \texttt{online}-Eintrag einer Anleitung. Man beachte das Format + des \texttt{date}-Feldes (\texttt{yyyy-mm-dd}) in der \texttt{bib}-Datei.}, + date = {2005-10-16}, + hyphenation = {american}, + sorttitle = {Tame the Beast}, + subtitle = {The B to X of \BibTeX}, + url = {http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf}, + urldate = {2006-10-01}, + version = {1.3} +} + +@BOOK{Meisen1931, + author = {Meisen, Karl}, + title = {Nikolauskult und Nikolausbrauch im Abendlande}, + shorttitle = {Nikolauskult}, + subtitle = {Eine kultgeographisch-volkskundliche Untersuchung}, + date = {1981}, + location = {Düsseldorf}, + origlocation = {Düsseldorf}, + origdate = {1931}, + annotation = {Ein \texttt{book}-Eintrag. Man beachte die Felder \texttt{origdate} + und \texttt{origlocation}, die dafür sorgen, dass \texttt{date} und \texttt{location} + als \enquote*{Nachdruck} erscheinen.}, + gender = {sm}, + series = {Forschungen zur Volkskunde}, + number = {9--12}, +} + +@INBOOK{nietzsche:historie, + author = {Nietzsche, Friedrich}, + title = {Unzeitgem{\"a}sse Betrachtungen. Zweites St{\"u}ck}, + shorttitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie}, + subtitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie f{\"u}r das Leben}, + pages = {243--334}, + bookauthor = {Nietzsche, Friedrich}, + booktitle = {Die Geburt der Trag{\"o}die. Unzeitgem{\"a}{\ss}e Betrachtungen I--IV. + Nachgelassene Schriften 1870--1973}, + publisher = dtv # { and Walter de Gruyter}, + date = {1988}, + editor = {Colli, Giorgio and Montinari, Mazzino}, + annotation = {Ein einzelner Beitrag aus der kritischen Ausgabe von Nietzsches Werken. + Dieser \texttt{inbook}-Eintrag bezieht sich nur auf einen Essay im + ersten Band. Man beachte die Felder \texttt{title}, \texttt{booktitle} + und \texttt{maintitle} sowie die Felder \texttt{sorttitle} und \texttt{sortyear}. + Dieser Eintrag soll nach dem Eintrag erscheinen, der den gesamten + ersten Band wiedergibt.}, + hyphenation = {german}, + indexsorttitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie fur das Leben}, + indextitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie f{\"u}r das Leben}, + location = {M{\"u}nchen and Berlin and New York}, + mainsubtitle = {Kritische Studienausgabe}, + maintitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke}, + sorttitle = {Werke-01-243}, + sortyear = {1988-01-243}, + volume = {1} +} + +@BOOK{nietzsche:ksa, + author = {Nietzsche, Friedrich}, + title = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke}, + subtitle = {Kritische Studienausgabe}, + publisher = dtv # { and Walter de Gruyter}, + date = {1988}, + editor = {Colli, Giorgio and Montinari, Mazzino}, + edition = {2}, + annotation = {Die kritische Ausgabe von Nietzsches Werken. Dieser \texttt{book}-Eintrag + bezieht sich auf die gesamte, 15-bändige Edition. Man beachte das + \texttt{volumes}-Feld und das Format der Felder \texttt{publisher} + und \texttt{location} in der \texttt{bib}-Datei. Man beachte außerdem + die Felder \texttt{sorttitle} und \texttt{sortyear}, die die Sortierung + der Bibliographie beeinflussen.}, + hyphenation = {german}, + indexsorttitle = {Samtliche Werke}, + location = {M{\"u}nchen and Berlin and New York}, + sorttitle = {Werke-00-000}, + sortyear = {1988-00-000}, + volumes = {15} +} + +@BOOK{nietzsche:ksa1, + author = {Nietzsche, Friedrich}, + title = {Die Geburt der Trag{\"o}die. Unzeitgem{\"a}{\ss}e Betrachtungen I--IV. + Nachgelassene Schriften 1870--1973}, + shorttitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke I}, + publisher = dtv # { and Walter de Gruyter}, + date = {1988}, + editor = {Colli, Giorgio and Montinari, Mazzino}, + edition = {2}, + annotation = {Ein einzelner Band der kritischen Ausgabe von Nietzsches Werken. Dieser + \texttt{book}-Eintrag bezieht sich nur auf den ersten Band. Man beachte + die Felder \texttt{title} und \texttt{maintitle} sowie die Felder + \texttt{sorttitle} und \texttt{sortyear}. Dieser Eintrag soll nach + dem Eintrag erscheinen, der die gesamte Edition anführt.}, + bookauthor = {Nietzsche, Friedrich}, + hyphenation = {german}, + indexsorttitle = {Samtliche Werke I}, + indextitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke I}, + location = {M{\"u}nchen and Berlin and New York}, + mainsubtitle = {Kritische Studienausgabe}, + maintitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke}, + sorttitle = {Werke-01-000}, + sortyear = {1988-01-000}, + volume = {1} +} + +@ARTICLE{springer, + author = {Springer, Otto}, + title = {Mediaeval Pilgrim Routes from Scandinavia to Rome}, + shorttitle = {Mediaeval Pilgrim Routes}, + volume = {12}, + date = {1950}, + pages = {92--122}, + annotation = {Ein einfacher \texttt{article}-Eintrag. Man beachte die Felder + \texttt{shortjournal} und \texttt{options}}, + hyphenation = {british}, + journaltitle = {Mediaeval Studies}, + shortjournal = {Med. Stud\adddot}, +} + +@BOOK{vazques-de-parga, + author = {V{\'a}zques{ de }Parga, Luis and Lacarra, Jos{\'e} Mar{\'i}a and + Ur{\'i}a R{\'i}u, Juan}, + title = {Las Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela}, + shorttitle = {Peregrinaciones}, + publisher = {Iberdrola}, + date = {1993}, + note = {Ed. facs. de la realizada en 1948--49}, + annotation = {Ein mehrbändiges Buch. Dies ist ein \texttt{book}-Eintrag mit den + Feldern \texttt{volumes}, \texttt{note}, \texttt{sorttitle} und \texttt{indextitle}.}, + hyphenation = {spanish}, + indextitle = {Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela, Las}, + location = {Pamplona}, + sorttitle = {Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela}, + volumes = {3} +} + +@COLLECTION{Annales-Quedlinburgenses, + editor = {Giese, Martina}, + title = {Die Annales Quedlinburgenses}, + shorttitle = {Annales Quedlinburgenses}, + location = {Hannover}, + date = {2004}, + annotation = {Ein \texttt{collection}-Eintrag. Man beachte das Feld \texttt{shorthand} + und vergleiche im Sigelverzeichnis. Man beachte außerdem die Option \texttt{citedas} + im \texttt{options}-Feld.}, + gender = {sf}, + series = {MGH. Scriptores rerum Germanicarum in usum scholarum separatim editi}, + number = {72}, + options = {citedas=false}, + shorthand = {Annales Quedlinburgenses} +} + +@REVIEW{Koerntgen, + author = {Körntgen, Ludger}, + xref = {Annales-Quedlinburgenses}, + journaltitle = {sehepunkte}, + volume = {7}, + number = {3}, + date = {2007-03-15}, + url = {http://www.sehepunkte.de/2007/03/8389.html}, + urldate = {2011-02-06}, + annotation = {Ein \texttt{review}-Eintrag. Man beachte das Feld \texttt{xref}.} +} + +@COLLECTION{jaffe, + editor = {Jaff{\'e}, Philipp}, + title = {Regesta Pontificum Romanorum ab condita ecclesia ad annum post Christum + natum \textsc{mcxcviii}}, + shorttitle = {Regesta Pontificum Romanorum}, + date = {1885/1888}, + edition = {2}, + annotation = {Ein \texttt{collection}-Eintrag mit den Feldern \texttt{edition} und + \texttt{volumes}. Man beachte außerdem die Felder \texttt{editora}, \texttt{editoratype} + und \texttt{library}.}, + library = {Bibliothek: Signatur}, + location = {Leipzig}, + editora = {Loewenfeld, Samuel and Kaltenbrunner, Ferdinand and Ewald, Paul}, + editoratype = {redactor}, + volumes = {2} +} + +@COLLECTION{britannica, + editor = {Preece, Warren E.}, + title = {The New Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica}, + publisher = {Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica}, + date = {2003}, + edition = {15}, + annotation = {Dies ist ein \texttt{collection}-Eintrag für ein Lexikon. Man beachte + die \texttt{useeditor}-Option im \texttt{options}-Feld sowie das \texttt{sorttitle}-Feld. + Dieser Eintrag soll nach dem Titel einsortiert werden, obwohl es + einen Herausgeber gibt. Außerdem soll der Titel unter \enquote*{E} + einsortiert werden, nicht unter \enquote*{T}. Man beachte außerdem + das \texttt{label}-Feld, das für Autor-Jahr-Stile angegeben wurde.}, + hyphenation = {british}, + indextitle = {Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica, The New}, + label = {EB}, + location = {Chicago, Ill.}, + options = {useeditor=false}, + sorttitle = {Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica}, + volumes = {32} +} + +@ONLINE{ctan, + title = {CTAN}, + date = {2006}, + annotation = {Ein \texttt{online}-Eintrag. Der \textsc{url}, der im Feld \texttt{url} + steht, wird automatisch in einen Link verwandelt, sofern die \texttt{hyperref}-Unterstützung + geladen wurde. Man beachte das Format des \texttt{urldate}-Felds + (\texttt{yyyy-mm-dd}) in der \texttt{bib}-Datei. + Man beachte außerdem das \texttt{label}-Feld, das als \emph{fallback} + (Sicherung) von Zitierstilen genutzt werden kann, die die Felder + \texttt{author} und\slash oder \texttt{year} bzw. \texttt{date} benötigen.}, + hyphenation = {american}, + label = {CTAN}, + subtitle = {The Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network}, + url = {http://www.ctan.org}, + urldate = {2006-10-01} +} + +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + volume = {91}, + number = {65}, + issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03-06}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939a, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + volume = {91}, + number = {65}, + issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate}} + +@ARTICLE{Gerstmann:2007a, + author = {Gerstmann, Günter}, + title = {Gerhart Hauptmann-Aktivitäten in Hohenhaus}, + journal = {Schlesischer Kulturspiegel}, + date = {2007}, + volume = {42}, + number = {1}, + pages = {13}, + issue = {Januar--März}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate}, +} + +@ARTICLE{GMG:1939, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + volume = {91}, + number = {65}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03-06}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate}, +} +@ARTICLE{Guilford:1950, + author = {Guilford, J[oy] P[aul]}, + title = {Creativity}, + journal = {The American Psychologist}, + date = {1950-09}, + volume = {5}, + number = {9}, + pages = {444--454}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} +@ARTICLE{Page:1997, + author = {Page, Penny Booth}, + title = {E.\,M. Jellinek and the evolution of alcohol studies}, + subtitle = {A critical essay}, + journal = {Addiction}, + date = {1997}, + volume = {92}, + number = {12}, + pages = {1619-1637}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939b, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + number = {65}, + issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03-06}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939c, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + volume = {91}, + issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate}} + +@ARTICLE{Ewers:1906, + author = {Ewers, Hanns Heinz}, + title = {Rausch und Kunst}, + journal = {Blaubuch}, + date = {1906}, + volume = {1}, + pages = {1726-1730}, + issue = {4. Quartal}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} + +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939d, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + volume = {91}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03-13}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate}} + +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939e, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + volume = {91}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate}} + +@ARTICLE{Landolt:2000, + author = {Landolt, H. P. and Borbély, A. A.}, + title = {Alkohol und Schlafstörungen}, + journal = {Therapeutische Umschau}, + date = {2000}, + volume = {57}, + pages = {241-245}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} + +@ARTICLE{Chapiro:1930, + author = {Chapiro, Joseph}, + title = {Das neueste Werk Gerhart Hauptmanns}, + subtitle = {\enquote{Die Spitzhacke}}, + journal = {Neue Freie Presse}, + number = {23773}, + pages = {1-3}, + issue = {Morgenblatt}, + date = {1930-11-19}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} + +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939f, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + number = {65}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate}} + +@ARTICLE{Barski:2007, + author = {Barski, Jacek and Mahnken, Gerhard}, + title = {Museumsverbund Gerhart Hauptmann}, + subtitle = {Ein deutsch-polnisches Kulturprojekt mit Weitblick}, + journal = {Kulturpolitische Mitteilungen}, + date = {2007}, + number = {119}, + pages = {62}, + issue = {IV}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} + +@ARTICLE{Essig:2005, + author = {Essig, Rolf-Bernhard}, + title = {Mit liebender Schafsgeduld}, + subtitle = {Erhart Kästner im Dienste Gerhart Hauptmanns}, + journal = {Süddeutsche Zeitung}, + number = {237}, + pages = {16}, + date = {2005-10-14}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} + +@ARTICLE{Kluwe:2007, + author = {Kluwe, Sandra}, + title = {Furor poeticus}, + subtitle = {Ansätze zu einer neurophysiologisch fundierten Theorie + der literarischen Kreativität am Beispiel der Produktionsästhetik + Rilkes und Kafkas}, + journal = {literaturkritik.de}, + date = {2007-02}, + number = {2}, + url = {http://literaturkritik.de/public/rezension.php?rez_id=10438}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} + +@ARTICLE{Burckhardt:2006, + author = {Burckhardt, Barbara}, + title = {Frauen sind einfach klüger, starke Frauen}, + subtitle = {Michael Thalheimers \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger + Thalia Theater und Schirin Khodadadians Kasseler Räuber}, + journal = {Theater heute}, + date = {2006}, + number = {5}, + pages = {14-18}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} + +@ARTICLE{Ossietzky:1922, + author = {Ossietzky, Carl von}, + title = {Moritz Heimann \enquote{Armand Carrel} Staatstheater}, + journal = {Berliner Volks-Zeitung}, + date = {1922-03-30}, + issue = {Abend-Ausg\adddot}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} + +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939g, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + issue = {Abend-Ausgabe}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate}} + +@ARTICLE{Weiss:1960, + author = {Weiss, Grigorij}, + title = {Auf der Suche nach der versunkenen Glocke}, + subtitle = {Johannes R. Becher bei Gerhart Hauptmann}, + journal = {Sinn und Form}, + date = {1960}, + pages = {363--385}, + issue = {Zweites Sonderheft Johannes R. Becher}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} + +@ARTICLE{Hofer:2006, + author = {Hofer, Hermann}, + title = {Der Schrei der Verwundeten}, + subtitle = {Erschütternd: Gerhart + Hauptmanns \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger Thalia Theater}, + journal = {Lübecker Nachrichten}, + date = {2006-03-14}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} +@ARTICLE{Kammerhoff:2006, + author = {Kammerhoff, Heiko}, + title = {Rose Bernd}, + journal = {Szene Hamburg}, + date = {2006-04}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} + +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939h, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate}} + +@BOOK{Wulfstan:Homilies, + author = {{Wulfstan von York}}, + title = {The homilies of Wulfstan}, + location = {London}, + publisher = {Sandpiper Books}, + date = {1998}, + editor = {Bethurum, Dorothy}, + hyphenation = {british}, + isbn = {0-19-811101-0}, + options = {oldauthor=true,pseudoauthor=true}, + origlocation = {Oxford}, + origdate = {1957}, + annotation = {Eine Edition von Predigten eines mittelalterlichen Autors. Man beachte das Feld + \texttt{options} sowie die Felder \texttt{isbn}, \texttt{origlocation} und \texttt{origdate}.} +} + +@INBOOK{Judic1992, + author = {Bruno Judic}, + title = {Introduction}, + booktitle = {Régle pastorale}, + date = {1992}, + bookauthor = {{Gregor der Große}}, + editor = {Floribert Rommel}, + translator = {Charles Morel}, + commentator = {Bruno Judic}, + volume = {1}, + series = {Sources chrétiennes}, + number = {381}, + publisher = {Éditions du Cerf}, + location = {Paris}, + pages = {15-111}, + gender = {sm}, + hyphenation = {french}, + options = {pseudoauthor=true,oldbookauthor=true}, + xref = {Regula-Pastoralis}, + annotation = {Die Einleitung zur Edition eines frühmittelalterlichen Textes. + Die Edition hat außerdem einen Herausgeber (\texttt{editor}), einen + Übersetzer (\texttt{translator}) und einen Kommentator (\texttt{commentator}). + Man beachte die Option \texttt{oldbookauthor} im Feld \texttt{options}.} +} + +@BOOK{Regula-Pastoralis, + author = {{Gregor der Große}}, + title = {Régle pastorale}, + date = {1992}, + editor = {Floribert Rommel}, + translator = {Charles Morel}, + commentator = {Bruno Judic}, + introduction = {Bruno Judic}, + volumes = {2}, + series = {Sources chrétiennes}, + number = {381}, + publisher = {Éditions du Cerf}, + location = {Paris}, + gender = {sm}, + hyphenation = {french}, + keywords = {Gregor der Große, Regula Pastoralis}, + options = {pseudoauthor=true,oldauthor=true}, + annotation = {Die Edition eines frühmittelalterlichen Textes. Die Edition hat + einen Herausgeber (\texttt{editor}), einen Übersetzer (\texttt{translator}) + und einen Kommentator (\texttt{commentator}), der gleichzeitig auch die + Einleitung (\texttt{introduction}) geschrieben hat. Man beachte daneben + das Feld \texttt{options}.} +} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-footnote-dw.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-footnote-dw.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d9281cbc54 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-footnote-dw.pdf diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-footnote-dw.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-footnote-dw.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4ffce5a338 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-footnote-dw.tex @@ -0,0 +1,172 @@ +% v 1.7 +% This file presents the `footnote-dw' style +% +\documentclass[a4paper]{article} +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} +\usepackage[ngerman]{babel} +\usepackage[autostyle]{csquotes} +\usepackage[ + style=footnote-dw, +%% biblatex-dw-Optionen %%% +% acronyms=true, +% addyear=true, + annotation=true, +% citeauthor=normalfont,%namefontfoot,%namefont, +% citedas=false, +% citepages=suppress,%omit,%permit,%separate, +% edbyidem=false, +% editorstring=normal,%brackets, +% edstringincitations=false, +% edsuper=true, +% firstfull=true, +% firstfullname=true, +% firstnamefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold, +% ibidemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold, +% idembib=false, +% idembibformat=dash, +% idemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold, +% inreference=full,%normal, +% journalnumber=afteryear,%date,%standard + library=true, +% namefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold, +% nolocation=true, +% nopublisher=false, +% oldauthor=false, +% omiteditor=true, +% origfields=false, +% origfieldsformat=parens,%brackets,%punct, +% pagetotal=true, +% pseudoauthor=false, +% series=afteryear, +% shorthandibid=false, +% shorthandinbib=true, +% shorthandwidth=40pt,%3em, +% shortjournal=true, +% terselos=false, +% xref=true, +%% biblatex-Optionen %%% +% autocite=plain, +% citetracker=false, +% doi=true, +% eprint=true, +% ibidpage=true, +% ibidtracker=false, +% idemtracker=false, +% isbn=true, +% pagetracker=false, + hyperref, + backend=biber +]{biblatex} +\usepackage{hyperref} +\bibliography{de-examples-dw} +% Some generic settings: +\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}} +\usepackage{xcolor} +\newcommand{\option}[1]{\textcolor{red}{#1}} +\setlength{\parindent}{0pt} +\begin{document} + +\section*{Der Stil \texttt{footnote-dw}} + +\subsection*{\cmd{cite}-Beispiele} + +\cite{aristotle:rhetoric} + +\cite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} + +\footnote{\cite[Siehe][]{springer}} + +\footnote{\cite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}} + +\subsection*{\cmd{parencite}-Beispiele} + +Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite{aristotle:rhetoric}. + +Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}. + +\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite[Siehe][]{springer}.} + +\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}.} + +\subsection*{\cmd{citeauthor}- und \cmd{parencite*}-Beispiele} + +\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext +ist \parencite*{aristotle:rhetoric}. + +\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext +ist \parencite*[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}. + +\footnote{\citeauthor{springer} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext +ist \parencite*[Siehe][]{springer}.} + +\footnote{\citeauthor{springer} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext +ist \parencite*[Siehe][92--95]{springer}.} + +\subsection*{\cmd{footcite}-Beispiele} + +Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footcite{aristotle:rhetoric} + +Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} + +\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footcite[Siehe][]{springer}} + +\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}} + +\subsection*{\cmd{textcite}-Beispiele} + +\textcite{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext ist. + +\textcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext ist. + +\footnote{\textcite[Siehe][]{springer} für mehr Fülltext.} + +\footnote{\textcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer} für mehr Fülltext.} + +\subsection*{\cmd{autocite}-Beispiele} + +Dies ist nur Fülltext \autocite{springer}. + +\subsection*{Mehrere Zitate} + +\cite{aristotle:rhetoric,aristotle:physics,aristotle:poetics} + +\subsection*{Shorthand-Beispiele} + +\cite{Annales-Quedlinburgenses} + +\cite[25]{kant:kpv} + +\cite[noch einmal]{kant:kpv} + +\cite{Annales-Quedlinburgenses} + +\subsection*{\cmd{fullcite}-Beispiele} + +Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite{aristotle:rhetoric} + +Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} + +\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite[Siehe][]{springer}} + +\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}} + +\subsection*{\cmd{footfullcite}-Beispiele} + +Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite{aristotle:rhetoric} + +Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} + +\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite[Siehe][]{springer}} + +\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}} + +\clearpage + +\printshorthands + +\nocite{*} +\printbibliography[notkeyword=journalnumberdate] + + +\end{document} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/en-authortitle-dw.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/en-authortitle-dw.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6cee32c20f --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/en-authortitle-dw.pdf diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/en-authortitle-dw.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/en-authortitle-dw.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0817614375 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/en-authortitle-dw.tex @@ -0,0 +1,169 @@ +% v 1.7 +% This file presents the `authortitle-dw' style +% +\documentclass[a4paper]{article} +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} +\usepackage[british]{babel} +\usepackage[autostyle]{csquotes} +\usepackage[ + style=authortitle-dw, +%% biblatex-dw-Optionen %%% +% acronyms=true, +% addyear=true, + annotation=true, +% citeauthor=normalfont,%namefontfoot,%namefont, +% citedas=false, +% citepages=suppress,%omit,%permit,%separate, +% edbyidem=false, +% editorstring=normal,%brackets, +% edstringincitations=false, +% edsuper=true, +% firstfull=true, +% firstfullname=true, +% firstnamefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold, +% ibidemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold, +% idembib=false, +% idembibformat=dash, +% idemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold, +% inreference=full,%normal, +% journalnumber=afteryear,%date,%standard + library=true, +% namefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold, +% nolocation=true, +% nopublisher=false, +% oldauthor=false, +% omiteditor=true, +% origfields=false, +% origfieldsformat=parens,%brackets,%punct, +% pagetotal=true, +% pseudoauthor=false, +% series=afteryear, +% shorthandibid=false, +% shorthandinbib=true, +% shorthandwidth=40pt,%3em, +% shortjournal=true, +% terselos=false, +% xref=true, +%% biblatex-Optionen %%% +% autocite=plain, +% citetracker=false, +% doi=true, +% eprint=true, +% ibidpage=true, +% ibidtracker=false, +% idemtracker=false, +% isbn=true, +% pagetracker=false, + hyperref, + backend=biber +]{biblatex} +\usepackage{hyperref} +\bibliography{examples-dw} +% Some generic settings: +\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}} +\usepackage{xcolor} +\newcommand{\option}[1]{\textcolor{red}{#1}} +\setlength{\parindent}{0pt} +\begin{document} + +\section*{The \texttt{authortitle-dw} style} + +\subsection*{\cmd{cite} examples} + +\cite{aristotle:rhetoric} + +\cite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} + +\cite[See][]{springer} + +\cite[See][59--63]{springer} + +\subsection*{\cmd{parencite} examples} + +This is just filler text \parencite{aristotle:rhetoric}. + +This is just filler text \parencite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}. + +This is just filler text \parencite[See][]{springer}. + +This is just filler text \parencite[See][59--63]{springer}. + +\subsection*{\cmd{citeauthor} and \cmd{parencite*} examples} + +\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler +text \parencite*{aristotle:rhetoric}. + +\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler +text \parencite*[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}. + +\citeauthor{springer} shows that this is just filler +text \parencite*[See][]{springer}. + +\citeauthor{springer} shows that this is just filler +text \parencite*[See][59--63]{springer}. + +\subsection*{\cmd{footcite} examples} + +This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:rhetoric} + +This is just filler text.\footcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} + +This is just filler text.\footcite[See][]{springer} + +This is just filler text.\footcite[See][59--63]{springer} + +\subsection*{\cmd{textcite} examples} + +\textcite{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler text. + +\textcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler text. + +\textcite[See][]{springer} for more filler text. + +\textcite[See][59--63]{springer} for more filler text. + +\subsection*{\cmd{autocite} examples} + +This is just filler text \autocite{springer}. + +\subsection*{Multiple citations} + +\cite{aristotle:rhetoric,aristotle:physics,aristotle:poetics} + +\subsection*{Shorthand examples} + +\cite{kant:kpv} + +\cite[again]{kant:kpv} + +\cite{kant:ku} + +\subsection*{\cmd{fullcite} examples} + +This is just filler text. \fullcite{aristotle:rhetoric} + +This is just filler text. \fullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} + +This is just filler text. \fullcite[See][]{springer} + +This is just filler text. \fullcite[See][92--95]{springer} + +\subsection*{\cmd{footfullcite} examples} + +This is just filler text. \footfullcite{aristotle:rhetoric} + +This is just filler text. \footfullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} + +This is just filler text. \footfullcite[See][]{springer} + +This is just filler text. \footfullcite[See][92--95]{springer} + +\clearpage + +\printshorthands + +\nocite{*} +\printbibliography[notkeyword=journalnumberdate] + +\end{document} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/en-footnote-dw.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/en-footnote-dw.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4b4b7c95f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/en-footnote-dw.pdf diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/en-footnote-dw.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/en-footnote-dw.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e2b6604313 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/en-footnote-dw.tex @@ -0,0 +1,171 @@ +% v 1.7 +% This file presents the `footnote-dw' style +% +\documentclass[a4paper]{article} +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} +\usepackage[british]{babel} +\usepackage[autostyle]{csquotes} +\usepackage[ + style=footnote-dw, + %useeditor=true, +%% biblatex-dw-Optionen %%% +% acronyms=true, + annotation=true, +% citeauthor=normalfont,%namefontfoot,%namefont, +% citedas=false, +% citepages=suppress,%omit,%permit,%separate, +% edbyidem=false, +% editorstring=normal,%brackets, +% edstringincitations=false, +% edsuper=true, +% firstfullname=true, +% firstnamefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold, +% ibidemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold, +% idembib=false, +% idembibformat=dash, +% idemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold, +% inreference=full,%normal, +% journalnumber=afteryear,%date,%standard + library=true, +% namefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold, +% nolocation=true, +% nopublisher=false, +% oldauthor=false, +% omiteditor=true, +% origfields=false, +% origfieldsformat=parens,%brackets,%punct, +% pagetotal=true, +% pseudoauthor=false, +% series=afteryear, +% shorthandibid=false, +% shorthandinbib=true, +% shorthandwidth=40pt,%3em, +% shortjournal=true, +% terselos=false, +% xref=true, +%% biblatex-Optionen %%% +% autocite=plain, +% citetracker=false, +% doi=true, +% eprint=true, +% ibidpage=true, +% ibidtracker=false, +% idemtracker=false, +% isbn=true, +% pagetracker=false, + hyperref, + backend=biber +]{biblatex} +\usepackage{hyperref} +\bibliography{examples-dw} +% Some generic settings: +\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}} +\usepackage{xcolor} +\newcommand{\option}[1]{\textcolor{red}{#1}} +\setlength{\parindent}{0pt} + +\begin{document} + +\section*{The \texttt{footnote-dw} style} + +\subsection*{\cmd{cite} examples} + +\cite{aristotle:rhetoric} + +\cite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} + +\footnote{\cite[See][]{springer}} + +\footnote{\cite[See][59--63]{springer}} + +\subsection*{\cmd{parencite} examples} + +This is just filler text \parencite{aristotle:rhetoric}. + +This is just filler text \parencite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}. + +\footnote{This is just filler text \parencite[See][]{springer}.} + +\footnote{This is just filler text \parencite[See][59--63]{springer}.} + +\subsection*{\cmd{citeauthor} and \cmd{parencite*} examples} + +\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler +text \parencite*{aristotle:rhetoric}. + +\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler +text \parencite*[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}. + +\footnote{\citeauthor{springer} shows that this is just filler +text \parencite*[See][]{springer}.} + +\footnote{\citeauthor{springer} shows that this is just filler +text \parencite*[See][59--63]{springer}.} + +\subsection*{\cmd{footcite} examples} + +This is just filler text. \footcite{aristotle:rhetoric} + +This is just filler text. \footcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} + +\footnote{This is just filler text. \footcite[See][]{springer}} + +\footnote{This is just filler text. \footcite[See][59--63]{springer}} + +\subsection*{\cmd{textcite} examples} + +\textcite{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler text. + +\textcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler text. + +\footnote{\textcite[See][]{springer} for more filler text.} + +\footnote{\textcite[See][59--63]{springer} for more filler text.} + +\subsection*{\cmd{autocite} examples} + +This is just filler text \autocite{springer}. + +\subsection*{Multiple citations} + +\cite{aristotle:rhetoric,aristotle:physics,aristotle:poetics} + +\subsection*{Shorthand examples} + +\cite{Annales-Quedlinburgenses} + +\cite[25]{kant:kpv} + +\cite[again]{kant:kpv} + +\cite{Annales-Quedlinburgenses} + +\subsection*{\cmd{fullcite} examples} + +This is just filler text. \fullcite{aristotle:rhetoric} + +This is just filler text. \fullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} + +\footnote{This is just filler text. \fullcite[See][]{springer}.} + +\footnote{This is just filler text. \fullcite[See][92--95]{springer}.} + +\subsection*{\cmd{footfullcite} examples} + +This is just filler text. \footfullcite{aristotle:rhetoric} + +This is just filler text. \footfullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} + +\footnote{This is just filler text. \footfullcite[See][]{springer}.} + +\footnote{This is just filler text. \footfullcite[See][92--95]{springer}.} + +\clearpage + +\printshorthands + +\nocite{*} +\printbibliography[notkeyword=journalnumberdate] + +\end{document} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/examples-dw.bib b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/examples-dw.bib new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e047607501 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/examples-dw.bib @@ -0,0 +1,840 @@ +@PREAMBLE{ "\providecommand*{\BibTeX}{Bib\TeX} " } +@STRING{cup = "Cambridge University Press" } +@STRING{dtv = "Deutscher Taschenbuch-Verlag" } + +@Article{angenendt, + hyphenation = {german}, + author = {Angenendt, Arnold}, + indextitle = {In Honore Salvatoris}, + title = {In Honore Salvatoris~-- Vom Sinn und Unsinn der Patrozinienkunde}, + shorttitle = {In Honore Salvatoris}, + journaltitle = {Revue d'Histoire Eccl{\'e}siastique}, + volume = {97}, + date = {2002}, + pages = {431--456, 791--823}, + annotation = {A German article in a French journal. Apart from that, a typical + \texttt{article} entry. Note the \texttt{indextitle}, \texttt{library}, \texttt{shortjournal} + and \texttt{options} fields}, + shortjournal = {RHE}, + options = {acronym=true}, + library = {Here is room for some notes regarding the library in which the work is available} +} + +@Article{springer, + hyphenation = {british}, + author = {Springer, Otto}, + title = {Mediaeval Pilgrim Routes from Scandinavia to Rome}, + shorttitle = {Mediaeval Pilgrim Routes}, + journaltitle = {Mediaeval Studies}, + volume = {12}, + date = {1950}, + pages = {92--122}, + annotation = {A plain \texttt{article} entry. Note the field \texttt{shortjournal}.}, + shortjournal = {Med.\ Stud\adddot} +} + +@Book{aristotle:anima, + keywords = {primary}, + hyphenation = {british}, + author = {Aristotle}, + options = {oldauthor}, + editor = {Hicks, Robert Drew}, + title = {De Anima}, + publisher = cup, + location = {Cambridge}, + date = {1907}, + annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry with an \texttt{author} and an \texttt{editor}} +} + +@Book{aristotle:physics, + keywords = {primary}, + hyphenation = {american}, + author = {Aristotle}, + options = {oldauthor}, + translator = {Wicksteed, P. H. and Cornford, F. M.}, + title = {Physics}, + shorttitle = {Physics}, + publisher = {G. P. Putnam}, + location = {New York}, + date = {1929}, + annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry with a \texttt{translator} field} +} + +@Book{aristotle:poetics, + keywords = {primary}, + hyphenation = {british}, + author = {Aristotle}, + options = {oldauthor}, + editor = {Lucas, D. W.}, + title = {Poetics}, + shorttitle = {Poetics}, + series = {Clarendon Aristotle}, + publisher = {Clarendon Press}, + location = {Oxford}, + date = {1968}, + annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry with an \texttt{author} and an \texttt{editor} as well as + a \texttt{series} field} +} + +@Book{aristotle:rhetoric, + keywords = {primary}, + hyphenation = {british}, + author = {Aristotle}, + options = {oldauthor}, + editor = {Cope, Edward Meredith}, + commentator = {Cope, Edward Meredith}, + sorttitle = {Rhetoric of Aristotle}, + indextitle = {Rhetoric of Aristotle, The}, + title = {The Rhetoric of Aristotle with a commentary by the late Edward Meredith Cope}, + shorttitle = {Rhetoric}, + volumes = {3}, + publisher = cup, + date = {1877}, + annotation = {A commented edition. Note the concatenation of the \texttt{editor} and + \texttt{commentator} fields as well as the \texttt{volumes}, \texttt{sorttitle}, + and \texttt{indextitle} fields} +} + +@Book{averroes/bland, + keywords = {primary}, + hyphenation = {american}, + author = {Averroes}, + options = {oldauthor}, + editor = {Bland, Kalman P.}, + translator = {Bland, Kalman P.}, + indextitle = {Epistle on the Possibility of Conjunction, The}, + title = {The Epistle on the Possibility of Conjunction with the Active Intellect by Ibn + Rushd with the Commentary of Moses Narboni}, + shorttitle = {Possibility of Conjunction}, + series = {Moreshet Studies in Jewish History, Literature and Thought}, + number = {7}, + publisher = {Jewish Theological Seminary of America}, + location = {New York}, + date = {1982}, + annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry with a \texttt{series} and a \texttt{number}. Note the + concatenation of the \texttt{editor} and \texttt{translator} fields as well as + the \texttt{indextitle} field} +} + +@Book{averroes/hannes, + keywords = {primary}, + hyphenation = {german}, + author = {Averroes}, + options = {oldauthor}, + editor = {Hannes, Ludwig}, + translator = {Hannes, Ludwig}, + annotator = {Hannes, Ludwig}, + sorttitle = {Uber die Moglichkeit der Conjunktion}, + indexsorttitle = {Uber die Moglichkeit der Conjunktion}, + indextitle = {{\"U}ber die M{\"o}glichkeit der Conjunktion}, + title = {Des Averro{\"e}s Abhandlung: \enquote{{\"U}ber die M{\"o}glichkeit der + Conjunktion} oder \enquote{{\"U}ber den materiellen Intellekt}}, + shorttitle = {M{\"o}glichkeit der Conjunktion}, + publisher = {C.~A. Kaemmerer}, + location = {Halle an der Saale}, + date = {1892}, + annotation = {An annotated edition. Note the concatenation of the \texttt{editor}, + \texttt{translator}, and \texttt{annotator} fields. Also note the + \texttt{shorttitle}, \texttt{indextitle}, \texttt{sorttitle}, and + \texttt{indexsorttitle} fields} +} + +@Book{averroes/hercz, + keywords = {primary}, + hyphenation = {german}, + author = {Averroes}, + options = {oldauthor}, + editor = {Hercz, J.}, + translator = {Hercz, J.}, + indexsorttitle = {Drei Abhandlungen uber die Conjunction}, + indextitle = {Drei Abhandlungen {\"u}ber die Conjunction}, + title = {Drei Abhandlungen {\"u}ber die Conjunction des separaten Intellects mit dem + Menschen}, + subtitle = {Von Averroes (Vater und Sohn), aus dem Arabischen {\"u}bersetzt von Samuel Ibn + Tibbon}, + shorttitle = {Drei Abhandlungen}, + publisher = {S.~Hermann}, + location = {Berlin}, + date = {1869}, + annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry. Note the concatenation of the \texttt{editor} and + \texttt{translator} fields as well as the \texttt{indextitle} and + \texttt{indexsorttitle} fields} +} + +@Book{cicero, + hyphenation = {german}, + author = {Cicero, Marcus Tullius}, + editor = {Blank-Sangmeister, Ursula}, + translator = {Blank-Sangmeister, Ursula}, + afterword = {Thraede, Klaus}, + indextitle = {De natura deorum}, + title = {De natura deorum. {\"U}ber das Wesen der G{\"o}tter}, + shorttitle = {De natura deorum}, + language = {langlatin and langgerman}, + publisher = {Reclam}, + location = {Stuttgart}, + date = {1995}, + annotation = {A bilingual edition of Cicero's \emph{De natura deorum}, with a German + translation. Note the format of the \texttt{language} field in the database + file, the concatenation of the \texttt{editor} and \texttt{translator} fields, + and the \texttt{afterword} field} +} + +@Article{duggan, + author = {Duggan, Anne J.}, + title = {The Lorv\~ao transcription of Benedict of Peterborough's \emph{Liber + miraculorum beati Thome}: Lisbon, Cod.~Alcobaça CCXC/143}, + shorttitle = {The Lorv\~ao transcription}, + journal = {Scriptorium}, + volume = {51}, + date = {1997}, + pages = {51-68}, + gender = {sf}, + number = {1}, + hyphenation = {english}, + annotation = {A typical \texttt{article} entry. Note the field + \texttt{number}.}, +} + +@Book{iliad, + hyphenation = {german}, + author = {Homer}, + translator = {Schadewaldt, Wolfgang}, + introduction = {Latacz, Joachim}, + sorttitle = {Ilias}, + indextitle = {Ilias, Die}, + title = {Die Ilias}, + shorttitle = {Ilias}, + edition = {3}, + publisher = {Artemis \& Winkler}, + location = {D{\"u}sseldorf and Z{\"u}rich}, + date = {2004}, + annotation = {A German translation of the \emph{Iliad}. Note the \texttt{translator} and + \texttt{introduction} fields and the format of the \texttt{location} field in + the database file. Also note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{indextitle} fields} +} + +@Book{nietzsche:ksa, + hyphenation = {german}, + sortyear = {1988-00-000}, + author = {Nietzsche, Friedrich}, + editor = {Colli, Giorgio and Montinari, Mazzino}, + sorttitle = {Werke-00-000}, + indexsorttitle = {Samtliche Werke}, + title = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke}, + subtitle = {Kritische Studienausgabe}, + volumes = {15}, + edition = {2}, + publisher = dtv # { and Walter de Gruyter}, + location = {M{\"u}nchen and Berlin and New York}, + date = {1988}, + annotation = {The critical edition of Nietzsche's works. This is a \texttt{book} entry + referring to a 15-volume work as a whole. Note the \texttt{volumes} field and + the format of the \texttt{publisher} and \texttt{location} fields in the + database file. Also note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{sortyear} fields + which are used to fine-tune the sorting order of the bibliography. We want this + item listed first in the bibliography} +} + +@Book{nietzsche:ksa1, + hyphenation = {german}, + sortyear = {1988-01-000}, + author = {Nietzsche, Friedrich}, + bookauthor = {Nietzsche, Friedrich}, + editor = {Colli, Giorgio and Montinari, Mazzino}, + sorttitle = {Werke-01-000}, + indexsorttitle = {Samtliche Werke I}, + indextitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke I}, + title = {Die Geburt der Trag{\"o}die. Unzeitgem{\"a}{\ss}e Betrachtungen I--IV. + Nachgelassene Schriften 1870--1973}, + shorttitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke I}, + maintitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke}, + mainsubtitle = {Kritische Studienausgabe}, + volume = {1}, + edition = {2}, + publisher = dtv # { and Walter de Gruyter}, + location = {M{\"u}nchen and Berlin and New York}, + date = {1988}, + annotation = {A single volume from the critical edition of Nietzsche's works. This + \texttt{book} entry explicitly refers to the first volume only. Note the + \texttt{title} and \texttt{maintitle} fields. Also note the \texttt{sorttitle} + and \texttt{sortyear} fields. We want this entry to be listed after the entry + referring to the entire edition} +} + +@Book{vazques-de-parga, + hyphenation = {spanish}, + author = {V{\'a}zques{ de }Parga, Luis and Lacarra, Jos{\'e} Mar{\'i}a and Ur{\'i}a + R{\'i}u, Juan}, + sorttitle = {Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela}, + indextitle = {Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela, Las}, + title = {Las Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela}, + shorttitle = {Peregrinaciones}, + volumes = {3}, + publisher = {Iberdrola}, + location = {Pamplona}, + date = {1993}, + note = {Ed. facs. de la realizada en 1948--49}, + annotation = {A multivolume book cited as a whole. This is a \texttt{book} entry with + \texttt{volumes}, \texttt{note}, \texttt{sorttitle}, and \texttt{indextitle} fields} +} + +@Collection{britannica, + options = {useeditor=false}, + label = {EB}, + hyphenation = {british}, + editor = {Preece, Warren E.}, + sorttitle = {Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica}, + indextitle = {Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica, The New}, + title = {The New Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica}, + volumes = {32}, + edition = {15}, + publisher = {Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica}, + location = {Chicago, Ill.}, + date = {2003}, + annotation = {This is a \texttt{collection} entry for an encyclopedia. Note the + \texttt{useeditor} option in the \texttt{options} field as well as the + \texttt{sorttitle} field. We want this entry to be cited and alphabetized by + title even though there is an editor. In addition to that, we want the title to + be alphabetized under \enquote*{E} rather than \enquote*{T}. Also note the + \texttt{label} field which is provided for author-year citation styles} +} + +@Collection{jaffe, + editor = {Jaff{\'e}, Philipp}, + editora = {Loewenfeld, Samuel and Kaltenbrunner, Ferdinand and Ewald, Paul}, + editoratype = {redactor}, + title = {Regesta Pontificum Romanorum ab condita ecclesia ad annum post Christum natum + \textsc{mcxcviii}}, + shorttitle = {Regesta Pontificum Romanorum}, + volumes = {2}, + edition = {2}, + location = {Leipzig}, + date = {1885/1888}, + annotation = {A \texttt{collection} entry with \texttt{edition} and \texttt{volumes} fields. + Note the \texttt{editora}, \texttt{editoratype} and \texttt{library} fields}, + library = {Library: Shelfmark} +} + +@InBook{kant:kpv, + shorthand = {KpV}, + hyphenation = {german}, + author = {Kant, Immanuel}, + bookauthor = {Kant, Immanuel}, + title = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft}, + shorttitle = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft}, + booktitle = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft. Kritik der Urtheilskraft}, + maintitle = {Kants Werke. Akademie Textausgabe}, + volume = {5}, + publisher = {Walter de Gruyter}, + location = {Berlin}, + date = {1968}, + pages = {1--163}, + annotation = {An edition of Kant's \emph{Collected Works}, volume five. This is an + \texttt{inbook} entry which explicitly refers to the \emph{Critique of Practical + Reason} only, not to the entire fifth volume. Note the \texttt{author} and + \texttt{bookauthor} fields in the database file. By default, the + \texttt{bookauthor} is omitted if the values of the \texttt{author} and + \texttt{bookauthor} fields are identical} +} + +@InBook{kant:ku, + shorthand = {KU}, + hyphenation = {german}, + author = {Kant, Immanuel}, + bookauthor = {Kant, Immanuel}, + title = {Kritik der Urtheilskraft}, + booktitle = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft. Kritik der Urtheilskraft}, + maintitle = {Kants Werke. Akademie Textausgabe}, + volume = {5}, + publisher = {Walter de Gruyter}, + location = {Berlin}, + date = {1968}, + pages = {165--485}, + annotation = {An edition of Kant's \emph{Collected Works}, volume five. This is an + \texttt{inbook} entry which explicitly refers to the \emph{Critique of Judgment} + only, not to the entire fifth volume} +} + +@InBook{nietzsche:historie, + hyphenation = {german}, + sortyear = {1988-01-243}, + author = {Nietzsche, Friedrich}, + bookauthor = {Nietzsche, Friedrich}, + editor = {Colli, Giorgio and Montinari, Mazzino}, + sorttitle = {Werke-01-243}, + indexsorttitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie fur das Leben}, + indextitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie f{\"u}r das Leben}, + title = {Unzeitgem{\"a}sse Betrachtungen. Zweites St{\"u}ck}, + subtitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie f{\"u}r das Leben}, + shorttitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie}, + booktitle = {Die Geburt der Trag{\"o}die. Unzeitgem{\"a}{\ss}e Betrachtungen I--IV. + Nachgelassene Schriften 1870--1973}, + maintitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke}, + mainsubtitle = {Kritische Studienausgabe}, + volume = {1}, + publisher = dtv # { and Walter de Gruyter}, + location = {M{\"u}nchen and Berlin and New York}, + date = {1988}, + pages = {243--334}, + annotation = {A single essay from the critical edition of Nietzsche's works. This + \texttt{inbook} entry explicitly refers to an essay found in the first volume. + Note the \texttt{title}, \texttt{booktitle}, and \texttt{maintitle} fields. Also + note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{sortyear} fields. We want this entry to + be listed after the entry referring to the entire first volume} +} + +@InCollection{brandt, + options = {useprefix=false}, + hyphenation = {german}, + author = {von Brandt, Ahasver and Erich Hoffmann}, + editor = {Ferdinand Seibt}, + indexsorttitle = {Nordischen Lander von der Mitte des 11. Jahrhunderts bis 1448}, + indextitle = {Nordischen L{\"a}nder von der Mitte des 11.~Jahrhunderts bis 1448, Die}, + title = {Die nordischen L{\"a}nder von der Mitte des 11.~Jahrhunderts bis 1448}, + shorttitle = {Die nordischen L{\"a}nder}, + booktitle = {Europa im Hoch- und Sp{\"a}tmittelalter}, + series = {Handbuch der europ{\"a}ischen Geschichte}, + number = {2}, + publisher = {Klett-Cotta}, + location = {Stuttgart}, + date = {1987}, + pages = {884--917}, + annotation = {An \texttt{incollection} entry with a \texttt{series} and a \texttt{number}. + Note the format of the printed name and compare the \texttt{useprefix} option in + the \texttt{options} field. Also + note the \texttt{indextitle, and \texttt{indexsorttitle} fields}} +} + +@Online{ctan, + label = {CTAN}, + hyphenation = {american}, + title = {CTAN}, + subtitle = {The Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network}, + date = {2006}, + url = {http://www.ctan.org}, + urldate = {2006-10-01}, + annotation = {This is an \texttt{online} entry. The \textsc{url}, which is given in the + \texttt{url} field, is transformed into a clickable link if \texttt{hyperref} + support has been enabled. Note the format of the \texttt{urldate} field + (\texttt{yyyy-mm-dd}) in the database file. + Also note the \texttt{label} field which may be used as a fallback by citation + styles which need an \texttt{author} and\slash or a \texttt{year}} +} + +@Online{markey, + hyphenation = {american}, + author = {Markey, Nicolas}, + sorttitle = {Tame the Beast}, + title = {Tame the BeaST}, + subtitle = {The B to X of \BibTeX}, + version = {1.3}, + date = {2005-10-16}, + url = {http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf}, + urldate = {2006-10-01}, + annotation = {An \texttt{online} entry for a tutorial. Note the format of the \texttt{date} + field (\texttt{yyyy-mm-dd}) in the database file.} +} + +@Thesis{geer, + hyphenation = {british}, + author = {de Geer, Ingrid}, + title = {Earl, Saint, Bishop, Skald~-- and Music}, + subtitle = {The Orkney Earldom of the Twelfth Century. A Musicological Study}, + institution = {Uppsala Universitet}, + type = {phdthesis}, + location = {Uppsala}, + date = {1985}, + annotation = {This is a typical \texttt{thesis} entry for a PhD thesis. Note the + \texttt{type} field in the database file which uses a localization key.} +} + +@COLLECTION{Annales-Quedlinburgenses, + editor = {Giese, Martina}, + title = {Die Annales Quedlinburgenses}, + shorttitle = {Annales Quedlinburgenses}, + location = {Hannover}, + date = {2004}, + annotation = {A \texttt{collection} entry. Note the \texttt{shorthand} field and compare + the List of Shorthands. Not also the \texttt{citedas} option in the \texttt{options} + field}, + gender = {sf}, + series = {MGH. Scriptores rerum Germanicarum in usum scholarum separatim editi}, + number = {72}, + file = {dMGH:http\://www.dmgh.de/dmghband.html?bsbbandname=00000719&frameaction=bandansicht:URL}, + keywords = {Quelle, Deutsches Reich, 10. Jahrhundert, 11. Jahrhundert}, + shorthand = {Annales Quedlinburgenses}, + options = {citedas=false} +} + +@REVIEW{Koerntgen, + author = {Körntgen, Ludger}, + xref = {Annales-Quedlinburgenses}, + journaltitle = {sehepunkte}, + volume = {7}, + number = {3}, + date = {2007-03-15}, + url = {http://www.sehepunkte.de/2007/03/8389.html}, + urldate = {2011-02-06}, + annotation = {A \texttt{review} entry. Note the \texttt{xref} field.} +} + +@BOOK{Meisen1931, + author = {Meisen, Karl}, + title = {Nikolauskult und Nikolausbrauch im Abendlande}, + shorttitle = {Nikolauskult}, + subtitle = {Eine kultgeographisch-volkskundliche Untersuchung}, + origlocation = {Düsseldorf}, + origdate = {1931}, + annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry. Note the \texttt{origdate} and \texttt{origlocation} + fields and the \enquote*{reprint} output}, + gender = {sm}, + series = {Forschungen zur Volkskunde}, + number = {9--12}, + location = {Düsseldorf}, + date = {1981} +} + + +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + volume = {91}, + number = {65}, + issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03-06}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939a, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + volume = {91}, + number = {65}, + issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate}} + +@ARTICLE{Gerstmann:2007a, + author = {Gerstmann, Günter}, + title = {Gerhart Hauptmann-Aktivitäten in Hohenhaus}, + journal = {Schlesischer Kulturspiegel}, + date = {2007}, + volume = {42}, + number = {1}, + pages = {13}, + issue = {Januar--März}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate}, +} + +@ARTICLE{GMG:1939, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + volume = {91}, + number = {65}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03-06}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate}, +} +@ARTICLE{Guilford:1950, + author = {Guilford, J[oy] P[aul]}, + title = {Creativity}, + journal = {The American Psychologist}, + date = {1950-09}, + volume = {5}, + number = {9}, + pages = {444--454}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} +@ARTICLE{Page:1997, + author = {Page, Penny Booth}, + title = {E.\,M. Jellinek and the evolution of alcohol studies}, + subtitle = {A critical essay}, + journal = {Addiction}, + date = {1997}, + volume = {92}, + number = {12}, + pages = {1619-1637}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939b, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + number = {65}, + issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03-06}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939c, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + volume = {91}, + issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate}} + +@ARTICLE{Ewers:1906, + author = {Ewers, Hanns Heinz}, + title = {Rausch und Kunst}, + journal = {Blaubuch}, + date = {1906}, + volume = {1}, + pages = {1726-1730}, + issue = {4. Quartal}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} + +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939d, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + volume = {91}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03-13}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate}} + +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939e, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + volume = {91}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate}} + +@ARTICLE{Landolt:2000, + author = {Landolt, H. P. and Borbély, A. A.}, + title = {Alkohol und Schlafstörungen}, + journal = {Therapeutische Umschau}, + date = {2000}, + volume = {57}, + pages = {241-245}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} + +@ARTICLE{Chapiro:1930, + author = {Chapiro, Joseph}, + title = {Das neueste Werk Gerhart Hauptmanns}, + subtitle = {\enquote{Die Spitzhacke}}, + journal = {Neue Freie Presse}, + number = {23773}, + pages = {1-3}, + issue = {Morgenblatt}, + date = {1930-11-19}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} + +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939f, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + number = {65}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate}} + +@ARTICLE{Barski:2007, + author = {Barski, Jacek and Mahnken, Gerhard}, + title = {Museumsverbund Gerhart Hauptmann}, + subtitle = {Ein deutsch-polnisches Kulturprojekt mit Weitblick}, + journal = {Kulturpolitische Mitteilungen}, + date = {2007}, + number = {119}, + pages = {62}, + issue = {IV}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} + +@ARTICLE{Essig:2005, + author = {Essig, Rolf-Bernhard}, + title = {Mit liebender Schafsgeduld}, + subtitle = {Erhart Kästner im Dienste Gerhart Hauptmanns}, + journal = {Süddeutsche Zeitung}, + number = {237}, + pages = {16}, + date = {2005-10-14}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} + +@ARTICLE{Kluwe:2007, + author = {Kluwe, Sandra}, + title = {Furor poeticus}, + subtitle = {Ansätze zu einer neurophysiologisch fundierten Theorie + der literarischen Kreativität am Beispiel der Produktionsästhetik + Rilkes und Kafkas}, + journal = {literaturkritik.de}, + date = {2007-02}, + number = {2}, + url = {http://literaturkritik.de/public/rezension.php?rez_id=10438}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} + +@ARTICLE{Burckhardt:2006, + author = {Burckhardt, Barbara}, + title = {Frauen sind einfach klüger, starke Frauen}, + subtitle = {Michael Thalheimers \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger + Thalia Theater und Schirin Khodadadians Kasseler Räuber}, + journal = {Theater heute}, + date = {2006}, + number = {5}, + pages = {14-18}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} + +@ARTICLE{Ossietzky:1922, + author = {Ossietzky, Carl von}, + title = {Moritz Heimann \enquote{Armand Carrel} Staatstheater}, + journal = {Berliner Volks-Zeitung}, + date = {1922-03-30}, + issue = {Abend-Ausg\adddot}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} + +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939g, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + issue = {Abend-Ausgabe}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939-03}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate}} + +@ARTICLE{Weiss:1960, + author = {Weiss, Grigorij}, + title = {Auf der Suche nach der versunkenen Glocke}, + subtitle = {Johannes R. Becher bei Gerhart Hauptmann}, + journal = {Sinn und Form}, + date = {1960}, + pages = {363--385}, + issue = {Zweites Sonderheft Johannes R. Becher}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} + +@ARTICLE{Hofer:2006, + author = {Hofer, Hermann}, + title = {Der Schrei der Verwundeten}, + subtitle = {Erschütternd: Gerhart + Hauptmanns \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger Thalia Theater}, + journal = {Lübecker Nachrichten}, + date = {2006-03-14}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} +@ARTICLE{Kammerhoff:2006, + author = {Kammerhoff, Heiko}, + title = {Rose Bernd}, + journal = {Szene Hamburg}, + date = {2006-04}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate} +} + +@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939h, + author = {Anonym}, + title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte}, + journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier}, + pages = {2}, + date = {1939}, + keywords = {journalnumberdate}} + +@INREFERENCE{enzensberger, + author = {Enzensberger, Horst}, + title = {Capo Colonne, Schlacht v\adddot}, + xref = {LMA}, + volume = {2}, + date = {1983}, + location = {München and Zürich}, + pages = {1484}, + pagination = {column}, + bookpagination = {column}, + booktitle = {Lexikon des Mittelalters}, + gender = {sm}, + hyphenation = {ngerman}, + annotation = {An article in a work of reference (e.g. in an + encyclopedia or in a dictionary), thus a typical \texttt{inreference} entry. + Note also the fields \texttt{xref}, \texttt{pagination} and + \texttt{bookpagination}} +} + +@REFERENCE{LMA, + title = {Lexikon des Mittelalters}, + location = {München and Zürich}, + date = {1980/1999}, + gender = {pp}, + hyphenation = {ngerman}, + volumes = {10}, + shorthand = {LMA}, + options = {acronym=true}, + annotation = {A \texttt{reference} entry. This entry type is meant for works of reference, e.g. + encyclopedias or dictionaries. Internally, it is just an alias for a \texttt{collection} entry. + Note also the field \texttt{options}.} +} + +@BOOK{Wulfstan:Homilies, + author = {{Wulfstan of York}}, + title = {The homilies of Wulfstan}, + location = {London}, + publisher = {Sandpiper Books}, + date = {1998}, + editor = {Bethurum, Dorothy}, + hyphenation = {british}, + isbn = {0-19-811101-0}, + options = {oldauthor=true,pseudoauthor=true}, + origlocation = {Oxford}, + origdate = {1957}, + annotation = {An edition of homilies by one medieval author. Note the \texttt{options} field + as well as the fields \texttt{isbn}, \texttt{origlocation} and \texttt{origdate}.} +} + +@INBOOK{Judic1992, + author = {Bruno Judic}, + title = {Introduction}, + booktitle = {Régle pastorale}, + date = {1992}, + bookauthor = {{Gregor der Große}}, + editor = {Floribert Rommel}, + translator = {Charles Morel}, + commentator = {Bruno Judic}, + volume = {1}, + series = {Sources chrétiennes}, + number = {381}, + publisher = {Éditions du Cerf}, + location = {Paris}, + pages = {15-111}, + gender = {sm}, + hyphenation = {french}, + options = {pseudoauthor=true,oldbookauthor=true}, + xref = {Regula-Pastoralis}, + annotation = {The introduction to an edition of an early medieval text. + The edition features an \texttt{editor}, a \texttt{translator} and a + \texttt{commentator}. Note also the option \texttt{oldbookauthor} inside + the \texttt{options} field.} +} + +@BOOK{Regula-Pastoralis, + author = {{Gregor der Große}}, + title = {Régle pastorale}, + date = {1992}, + editor = {Floribert Rommel}, + translator = {Charles Morel}, + commentator = {Bruno Judic}, + introduction = {Bruno Judic}, + volumes = {2}, + series = {Sources chrétiennes}, + number = {381}, + publisher = {Éditions du Cerf}, + location = {Paris}, + gender = {sm}, + hyphenation = {french}, + keywords = {Gregor der Große, Regula Pastoralis}, + options = {pseudoauthor=true,oldauthor=true}, + annotation = {The edition of an early medieval text with an \texttt{editor}, + a \texttt{translator} and a \texttt{commentator} who also wrote an + \texttt{introduction}. Note also the \texttt{options} field.} +}
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/bbx/authortitle-dw.bbx b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/bbx/authortitle-dw.bbx new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..075131d4ee --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/bbx/authortitle-dw.bbx @@ -0,0 +1,914 @@ +% authortitle-dw.bbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2016 + +\ProvidesFile{authortitle-dw.bbx}[2016/12/06 v1.7 biblatex bibliography style] + +\RequireBibliographyStyle{standard-dw} + +\newbool{bbx:annotation} +\newbool{bbx:edbyidem} +\newbool{bbx:editorstring}% Test, ob editorstring auf parens oder brackets gesetzt wurde +\newbool{bbx:editionstring} +\newbool{bbx:edsuper} +\newbool{bbx:idembib} +\newbool{bbx:idemfont}% Test, ob idemfont gesetzt wurde +\newbool{bbx:library} +\newbool{bbx:nolocation} +\newbool{bbx:nopublisher} +\newbool{bbx:oldauthor} +\newbool{bbx:origfields} +\newbool{bbx:pseudoauthor} +\newbool{oldbookauthor} +\newbool{oldauthor} +\newbool{pseudoauthor} + +\DeclareEntryOption{oldbookauthor}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{oldbookauthor}} +\DeclareEntryOption{oldauthor}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{oldauthor}} +\DeclareEntryOption{pseudoauthor}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{pseudoauthor}} + +\DeclareBibliographyOption{annotation}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:annotation}} +\DeclareBibliographyOption{edbyidem}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:edbyidem}} +\DeclareBibliographyOption{editionstring}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:editionstring}} +\DeclareBibliographyOption{edsuper}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:edsuper}} +\DeclareBibliographyOption{idembib}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:idembib}} +\DeclareBibliographyOption{library}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:library}} +\DeclareBibliographyOption{nolocation}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:nolocation}} +\DeclareBibliographyOption{nopublisher}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:nopublisher}} +\DeclareBibliographyOption{oldauthor}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:oldauthor}} +\DeclareBibliographyOption{origfields}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:origfields}} +\DeclareBibliographyOption{pseudoauthor}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:pseudoauthor}} + +\newcommand{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{} + +\DeclareBibliographyOption{origfieldsformat}{% + \renewcommand{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{#1}} + +\DeclareBibliographyOption{namefont}[normal]{% + \ifcsdef{bbx@opt@namefont@#1} + {\csuse{bbx@opt@namefont@#1}} + {\blxdw@error{% + Invalid option 'namefont=#1'\MessageBreak + Valid values are 'normal', 'smallcaps', 'italic', 'bold'}}} +\newcommand{\bbx@namefont}{} +\def\bbx@opt@namefont@normal{% + \renewcommand{\bbx@namefont}{}} +\def\bbx@opt@namefont@smallcaps{% + \renewcommand{\bbx@namefont}{\textsc}} +\def\bbx@opt@namefont@italic{% + \renewcommand{\bbx@namefont}{\mkbibemph}} +\def\bbx@opt@namefont@bold{% + \renewcommand{\bbx@namefont}{\mkbibbold}} + +\DeclareBibliographyOption{firstnamefont}[normal]{% + \ifcsdef{bbx@opt@firstnamefont@#1} + {\csuse{bbx@opt@firstnamefont@#1}} + {\blxdw@error{% + Invalid option 'firstnamefont=#1'\MessageBreak + Valid values are 'normal', 'smallcaps', 'italic', 'bold'}}} +\newcommand{\bbx@firstnamefont}{} +\def\bbx@opt@firstnamefont@normal{% + \renewcommand{\bbx@firstnamefont}{}} +\def\bbx@opt@firstnamefont@smallcaps{% + \renewcommand{\bbx@firstnamefont}{\textsc}} +\def\bbx@opt@firstnamefont@italic{% + \renewcommand{\bbx@firstnamefont}{\mkbibemph}} +\def\bbx@opt@firstnamefont@bold{% + \renewcommand{\bbx@firstnamefont}{\mkbibbold}} + +\DeclareBibliographyOption{idemfont}[normal]{% + \ifcsdef{bbx@opt@idemfont@#1} + {\csuse{bbx@opt@idemfont@#1}} + {\blxdw@error{% + Invalid option 'idemfont=#1'\MessageBreak + Valid values are 'normal', 'smallcaps', 'italic', 'bold'}}} +\newcommand{\bbx@idemfont}{} +\def\bbx@opt@idemfont@normal{% + \global\booltrue{bbx:idemfont}% + \renewcommand{\bbx@idemfont}{}} +\def\bbx@opt@idemfont@smallcaps{% + \global\booltrue{bbx:idemfont}% + \renewcommand{\bbx@idemfont}{\textsc}} +\def\bbx@opt@idemfont@italic{% + \global\booltrue{bbx:idemfont}% + \renewcommand{\bbx@idemfont}{\mkbibemph}} +\def\bbx@opt@idemfont@bold{% + \global\booltrue{bbx:idemfont}% + \renewcommand{\bbx@idemfont}{\mkbibbold}} + +\DeclareBibliographyOption{ibidemfont}[normal]{% + \ifcsdef{bbx@opt@ibidemfont@#1} + {\csuse{bbx@opt@ibidemfont@#1}} + {\blxdw@error{% + Invalid option 'ibidemfont=#1'\MessageBreak + Valid values are 'normal', 'smallcaps', 'italic', 'bold'}}} +\newcommand{\bbx@ibidemfont}{} +\def\bbx@opt@ibidemfont@normal{% + \renewcommand{\bbx@ibidemfont}{}} +\def\bbx@opt@ibidemfont@smallcaps{% + \renewcommand{\bbx@ibidemfont}{\textsc}} +\def\bbx@opt@ibidemfont@italic{% + \renewcommand{\bbx@ibidemfont}{\mkbibemph}} +\def\bbx@opt@ibidemfont@bold{% + \renewcommand{\bbx@ibidemfont}{\mkbibbold}} + +\DeclareBibliographyOption{idembibformat}[idem]{% + \ifcsdef{bbx@opt@idembibformat@#1} + {\csuse{bbx@opt@idembibformat@#1}} + {\blxdw@error{% + Invalid option 'idembibformat=#1'\MessageBreak + Valid values are 'idem', 'dash'}}} +\def\bbx@opt@idembibformat@idem{% + \let\bibnamedashOrig\bibnamedash + \AtBeginBibliography{ + \renewcommand*{\bibnamedash}{% + \bibsentence\bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}}}} +\def\bbx@opt@idembibformat@dash{ + \AtBeginBibliography{% + \let\bibnamedash\bibnamedashOrig}}% + +\DeclareBibliographyOption{editorstring}[normal]{% + \ifcsdef{bbx@opt@editorstring@#1} + {\csuse{bbx@opt@editorstring@#1}} + {\blxdw@error{% + Invalid option 'editorstring=#1'\MessageBreak + Valid values are 'normal', 'parens', 'brackets'}}} +\newcommand{\bbx@editorstring}{} +\def\bbx@opt@editorstring@normal{% + \global\boolfalse{bbx:editorstring}% + \renewcommand{\bbx@editorstring}{}} +\def\bbx@opt@editorstring@parens{% + \global\booltrue{bbx:editorstring}% + \renewcommand{\bbx@editorstring}{\mkbibparens}} +\def\bbx@opt@editorstring@brackets{% + \global\booltrue{bbx:editorstring}% + \renewcommand{\bbx@editorstring}{\mkbibbrackets}} + +\DeclareBibliographyOption{editorstringfont}[normal]{% + \ifcsdef{bbx@opt@edstringfont@#1} + {\csuse{bbx@opt@edstringfont@#1}} + {\blxdw@error{% + Invalid option 'editorstringfont=#1'\MessageBreak + Valid values are 'normal' and 'namefont'}}} +\newcommand{\bbx@edstringfont}{} +\def\bbx@opt@edstringfont@normal{% + \renewcommand{\bbx@edstringfont}{}} +\def\bbx@opt@edstringfont@namefont{% + \renewcommand{\bbx@edstringfont}{\bbx@namefont}} + +\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{ + edbyidem=true, + editorstring=parens, + idembib=true, + idembibformat=idem, + nolocation=false, + nopublisher=true, + oldauthor=true, + origfields=true, + origfieldsformat=punct, + pseudoauthor=true +} + +%% Autoren, Herausgeber und Übersetzter in der Bibliographie +\DeclareNameAlias{author}{sortname} +\DeclareNameAlias{editor}{sortname} +\DeclareNameAlias{translator}{sortname} + +%% Komma statt Punkt nach einzelnen Elementen der Literaturangaben +\renewcommand*{\newunitpunct}{\addcomma\space} + +%% Punkt zwischen Titel und Untertitel +\renewcommand*{\subtitlepunct}{\addperiod\space} + +%% Punkt zwischen Untertitel und Titelzusatz ([book|main]titleaddon) +\newcommand*{\titleaddonpunct}{\addperiod\space} + +%% Doppelpunkt nach Autoren/Editoren +\renewcommand*{\labelnamepunct}{\addcolon\space} + +%% Zeichensetzung zwischen Ort und Jahr +\newcommand*{\locationdatepunct}{\addspace} + +%% Zeichensetzung zwischen Ort und Verlag +\newcommand*{\locationpublisherpunct}{\addcolon\space} + +%% Zeichensetzung zwischen Verlag und Jahr +\newcommand*{\publisherdatepunct}{\addcomma\space} + +%% Zeichen vor 'Nachdruck' bei Benutzung von 'origfields' +\newcommand*{\origfieldspunct}{\addcomma\space} + +%% Zeichen für pseudoauthor=true +\newcommand*{\bibleftpseudo}{} +\newcommand*{\bibrightpseudo}{} + +%% Zeichen zw. Autoren/Editoren in der Bibliographie +\newcommand*{\bibrevsdnamedelim}{\addspace} +\newcommand*{\bibmultinamedelim}{\addcomma\space} +\newcommand*{\bibfinalnamedelim}{% + \ifnum\value{liststop}>2 \finalandcomma\fi + \addspace\bibstring{and}\space}% + +\AtBeginBibliography{% + \let\revsdnamedelim\bibrevsdnamedelim% + \let\multinamedelim\bibmultinamedelim% + \let\finalnamedelim\bibfinalnamedelim% +} + +%% Makros für Schriften der Felder 'annotation' und 'library' +\newcommand{\annotationfont}{\small\itshape} +\newcommand{\libraryfont}{\small\sffamily} + +%% Formate in der Bibliographie +\DeclareFieldFormat{annotation}{% + \annotationfont #1}%\addperiod\par} +\DeclareFieldFormat{booktitle}{#1} +\DeclareFieldFormat{edition}{% + \ifinteger{#1} + {\mkbibordedition{#1}~\bibstring{edition}} + {\ifbool{bbx:editionstring} + {#1\addspace\bibstring{edition}\isdot} + {#1\isdot}}} +\DeclareFieldFormat{edition:super}{% für Option 'edsuper' + \ifinteger{#1} + {\textsuperscript{#1}} + {\blxdw@warning@noline{% + The 'edition' field of entry\MessageBreak + '\abx@field@entrykey' is not an integer.\MessageBreak + The edition will not be printed as\MessageBreak + superscript. Instead, the 'edition'\MessageBreak + field is printed completely}}} +\DeclareFieldFormat{journaltitle}{#1} +\DeclareFieldFormat{issuetitle}{#1} +\DeclareFieldFormat{library}{% + \libraryfont #1}%\addperiod\par} +\DeclareFieldFormat{maintitle}{#1} +\DeclareFieldFormat{review}{% + \bibstring{review}% + \enquote{#1}} +\DeclareFieldFormat{shorthandwidth}{% + \ifboolexpr{ + bool {bbx:shorthandacro} + and + bool {bbx:acronym} + } + {\mkbibacro{#1}\isdot} + {#1\isdot}} +\DeclareFieldFormat{shortjournal}{% + \ifboolexpr{ + bool {bbx:shorthandacro} + and + bool {bbx:acronym} + } + {\mkbibacro{#1}\isdot} + {#1\isdot}} +\DeclareFieldFormat*{title}{#1} +\DeclareFieldFormat[inreference]{title}{% + \bibstring{inrefstring}% + \enquote{#1}} +\DeclareFieldFormat[review]{title}{% + \bibstring{review}% + \enquote{#1}} +\DeclareFieldFormat[inreference]{volume}{#1}% volume of an inreference entry +\DeclareFieldFormat[review]{volume}{#1}% volume of a review entry +\DeclareFieldFormat{shorthand}{% + \ifbool{bbx:shorthandacro} + {\ifbool{bbx:acronym} + {\mkbibacro{#1}\isdot} + {#1\isdot}} + {#1\isdot}} + +%% Umdefinierung von finentry für 'annotation' und 'library' +\renewbibmacro*{finentry}{% + \ifboolexpr{ + test {\iffieldundef{annotation}} + and + test {\iffieldundef{library}} + } + {\finentry} + {\iffieldundef{annotation} + {\iffieldundef{library} + {\finentry} + {}}% + {\ifbool{bbx:annotation} + {\setunit{\addperiod\par} + \printfield{annotation}} + {}}% + \iffieldundef{library} + {} + {\ifbool{bbx:library} + {\setunit{\addperiod\par} + \printfield{library}} + {}}% + \finentry}} + +% Ausschalten von annotation und library für die List of Shorthands +\AtEveryLositem{% + \boolfalse{bbx:annotation}% + \boolfalse{bbx:library}% +} + +%% Wichtig für die Herausgebernamen in der List of Shorthands +\InitializeBibliographyStyle{% + \let\bbx@lasthash\undefined} + +% Nachnamen von Einträgen mit 'options = {oldauthor=true}' +% oder 'options = {oldbookauthor=true}' +% werden nicht in der Schrift von 'namefont' gesetzt +% Formatierung der Nachnamen entsprechend der Option 'namefont' +\renewcommand*{\mkbibnamefamily}[1]{% + \ifboolexpr{ + ( bool {bbx:oldauthor} + and + ( ( bool {oldauthor} + and + ( test {\ifcurrentname{author}} + or + ( test {\ifcurrentname{labelname}} + and + not test {\ifnameundef{author}} ) ) ) + or + ( bool {oldbookauthor} + and + test {\ifcurrentname{bookauthor}} ) ) ) + or + ( bool{cbx:citeauthor} + and + ( bool{cbx:citeauthornormalfont} + or + ( bool{cbx:citeauthorfoot} + and + not test {\iffootnote} ) ) ) + } + {#1} + {\bbx@namefont{#1}}} + +% Formatierung der Vornamen entsprechend der Option 'firstnamefont' +\renewcommand*{\mkbibnamegiven}[1]{% + \ifboolexpr{ + ( bool {bbx:oldauthor} + and + ( ( bool {oldauthor} + and + ( test {\ifcurrentname{author}} + or + ( test {\ifcurrentname{labelname}} + and + not test {\ifnameundef{author}} ) ) ) + or + ( bool {oldbookauthor} + and + test {\ifcurrentname{bookauthor}} ) ) ) + or + ( bool{cbx:citeauthor} + and + ( bool{cbx:citeauthornormalfont} + or + ( bool{cbx:citeauthorfoot} + and + not test {\iffootnote} ) ) ) + } + {#1} + {\bbx@firstnamefont{#1}}} + +% prefix richtet sich nach 'namefont' (useprefix=true) +% oder 'firstnamefont' (useprefix=false) +\renewcommand*{\mkbibnameprefix}[1]{% + \ifboolexpr{ + ( bool {bbx:oldauthor} + and + ( ( bool {oldauthor} + and + ( test {\ifcurrentname{author}} + or + ( test {\ifcurrentname{labelname}} + and + not test {\ifnameundef{author}} ) ) ) + or + ( bool {oldbookauthor} + and + test {\ifcurrentname{bookauthor}} ) ) ) + or + ( bool{cbx:citeauthor} + and + ( bool{cbx:citeauthornormalfont} + or + ( bool{cbx:citeauthorfoot} + and + not test {\iffootnote} ) ) ) + } + {#1} + {\ifuseprefix + {\bbx@namefont{#1}} + {\bbx@firstnamefont{#1}}}} + +% suffix richtet sich nach 'firstnamefont' +\renewcommand*{\mkbibnamesuffix}[1]{% + \ifboolexpr{ + ( bool {bbx:oldauthor} + and + ( ( bool {oldauthor} + and + ( test {\ifcurrentname{author}} + or + ( test {\ifcurrentname{labelname}} + and + not test {\ifnameundef{author}} ) ) ) + or + ( bool {oldbookauthor} + and + test {\ifcurrentname{bookauthor}} ) ) ) + or + ( bool{cbx:citeauthor} + and + ( bool{cbx:citeauthornormalfont} + or + ( bool{cbx:citeauthorfoot} + and + not test {\iffootnote} ) ) ) + } + {#1} + {\bbx@firstnamefont{#1}}} + +%% \mkidem: +% wenn im Feld 'options' 'oldauthor=true' oder 'oldauthor' steht, +% werden keine Kapitälchen o.ä. bei Wiederholungszitaten ('Ders.') gesetzt +% ansonsten Formatierung entsprechend der Option 'idemfont', +% falls diese nicht vorhanden ist, wird der Wert von 'namefont' übernommen +\newcommand*{\mkidem}[1]{% + \ifboolexpr{ + bool {bbx:oldauthor} + and + bool {oldauthor} + } + {#1} + {\ifbool{bbx:idemfont} + {\bbx@idemfont{#1}} + {\bbx@namefont{#1}}}} + +%% Punkt zwischen Untertitel und Titelzusatz ([book|main]titleaddon) +\renewbibmacro*{title}{% + \iffieldundef{title} + {} + {\printtext[title]{% + \printfield[titlecase]{title}% + \setunit{\subtitlepunct}% + \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}% + \setunit{\titleaddonpunct}% + \printfield{titleaddon}}} + +\renewbibmacro*{booktitle}{% + \iffieldundef{booktitle} + {} + {\printtext[booktitle]{% + \printfield[titlecase]{booktitle}% + \setunit{\subtitlepunct}% + \printfield[titlecase]{booksubtitle}}% + \setunit{\titleaddonpunct}% + \printfield{booktitleaddon}}} + +\renewbibmacro*{maintitle}{% + \iffieldundef{maintitle} + {} + {\printtext[maintitle]{% + \printfield[titlecase]{maintitle}% + \setunit{\subtitlepunct}% + \printfield[titlecase]{mainsubtitle}}% + \setunit{\titleaddonpunct}% + \printfield{maintitleaddon}}} + +%% Ort, Verlag, Jahr: +%% - mit 'origfields=true' werden origlocation, origpublisher +%% und origyear gesetzt, der Rest als 'reprint' angehängt +%% - der Verlag ist optional (nopublisher=true|false) +%% - die Edition kann hochgestellt werden (edsuper=true|false) +\newbibmacro*{origdate}{\printorigdate} + +\renewbibmacro*{publisher+location+date}{% + \ifbool{bbx:origfields} + {\ifbool{bbx:nolocation} + {\iffieldundef{origyear} + {\usebibmacro{loc+pub+year}} + {\usebibmacro{origloc+origpub+origyear}}} + {\iflistundef{origlocation} + {\iffieldundef{origyear} + {\usebibmacro{loc+pub+year}} + {\usebibmacro{origloc+origpub+origyear}}} + {\iffieldundef{origyear} + {\blxdw@warning{% + Field 'origlocation' is set, but 'origdate' is + \MessageBreak% + empty at entry '\abx@field@entrykey'. + The 'orig' fields \MessageBreak are omitted + for this entry}% + \usebibmacro{loc+pub+year}} + {\usebibmacro{origloc+origpub+origyear}}}}} + {\usebibmacro{loc+pub+year}}} + +\newbibmacro{loc+pub+year}{% + \ifbool{bbx:nolocation} + {} + {\printlist{location}% + \ifbool{bbx:nopublisher} + {\setunit*{\locationdatepunct}}% + {\iflistundef{publisher} + {\setunit*{\locationdatepunct}} + {\setunit*{\locationpublisherpunct}% + \printlist{publisher}% + \setunit*{\publisherdatepunct}}}}% + \ifbool{bbx:edsuper} + {\printfield[edition:super]{edition}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{date}% + \newunit} + +\newbibmacro{origloc+origpub+origyear}{% + \ifbool{bbx:nolocation} + {} + {\printlist{origlocation}% + \ifbool{bbx:nopublisher} + {\setunit*{\locationdatepunct}}% + {\iflistundef{origpublisher} + {\setunit*{\locationdatepunct}} + {\setunit*{\locationpublisherpunct}% + \printlist{origpublisher}% + \setunit*{\publisherdatepunct}}}}% + \ifbool{bbx:edsuper} + {\printfield[edition:super]{edition}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{origdate}% + \ifdefstring{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{punct} + {\setunit*{\origfieldspunct}% + \usebibmacro{origfields:loc+pub+year}} + {\ifdefstring{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{parens} + {\setunit*{\addspace}% + \printtext[parens]{% + \usebibmacro{origfields:loc+pub+year}}} + {\ifdefstring{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{brackets} + {\setunit*{\addspace}% + \printtext[brackets]{% + \usebibmacro{origfields:loc+pub+year}}} + {\setunit*{\origfieldspunct}% + \usebibmacro{origfields:loc+pub+year}}}} + \newunit} + +\newbibmacro{origfields:loc+pub+year}{% + \bibstring{reprint}% + \setunit{\addspace}% + \ifbool{bbx:nolocation} + {} + {\printlist{location}% + \ifbool{bbx:nopublisher} + {\setunit*{\locationdatepunct}}% + {\iflistundef{publisher} + {\setunit*{\locationdatepunct}} + {\setunit*{\locationpublisherpunct}% + \printlist{publisher}% + \setunit*{\publisherdatepunct}}}}% + \usebibmacro{date}} + +%% Test, ob ein Feld nur eine Zahl beinhaltet +\newcommand{\bbx@iffieldinteger}[1]{% + \iffieldundef{#1} + {\@secondoftwo} + {\edef\@tempa{\strfield{#1}}% + \expandafter\ifinteger\expandafter{\@tempa}}} + +%% Edition nur ausgeben, wenn Option 'edsuper=false' +\newbibmacro*{edition}{% + \ifbool{bbx:edsuper} + {\bbx@iffieldinteger{edition} + {}% falls 'edition' eine Zahl ist, wird hochgestellt + {\printfield{edition}% + \newunit}}% ansonsten wird komplett ausgegeben + {\printfield{edition}% + \newunit}} + +%% Hilfsmakro für Option editorstring +\newbibmacro*{editorstringpunct}{% + \ifbool{bbx:editorstring} + {\addspace} + {\addcomma\space}} + +%% Herausgeber ('Hrsg.') je nach Option editorstring +\renewbibmacro*{editorstrg}{% + \iffieldundef{editortype} + {\ifthenelse{\value{editor}>1\OR\ifandothers{editor}} + {\bbx@edstringfont{\bbx@editorstring{\bibstring{editors}}}} + {\bbx@edstringfont{\bbx@editorstring{\bibstring{editor}}}}} + {\ifthenelse{\value{editor}>1\OR\ifandothers{editor}} + {\bbx@edstringfont{\bbx@editorstring{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}}} + {\bbx@edstringfont{\bbx@editorstring{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}}}}} + +\renewbibmacro*{editor+othersstrg}{% + \iffieldundef{editortype} + {\ifthenelse{\value{editor}>1\OR\ifandothers{editor}} + {\def\abx@tempa{editors}} + {\def\abx@tempa{editor}}} + {\ifthenelse{\value{editor}>1\OR\ifandothers{editor}} + {\edef\abx@tempa{\thefield{editortype}s}} + {\edef\abx@tempa{\thefield{editortype}}}}% + \let\abx@tempb=\empty + \ifnamesequal{editor}{translator} + {\appto\abx@tempa{tr}% + \appto\abx@tempb{\clearname{translator}}} + {}% + \ifnamesequal{editor}{commentator} + {\appto\abx@tempa{co}% + \appto\abx@tempb{\clearname{commentator}}} + {\ifnamesequal{editor}{annotator} + {\appto\abx@tempa{an}% + \appto\abx@tempb{\clearname{annotator}}} + {}}% + \ifnamesequal{editor}{introduction} + {\appto\abx@tempa{in}% + \appto\abx@tempb{\clearname{introduction}}} + {\ifnamesequal{editor}{foreword} + {\appto\abx@tempa{fo}% + \appto\abx@tempb{\clearname{foreword}}} + {\ifnamesequal{editor}{afterword} + {\appto\abx@tempa{af}% + \appto\abx@tempb{\clearname{afterword}}} + {}}}% + \ifbibxstring{\abx@tempa} + {\bbx@edstringfont{\bbx@editorstring{\bibstring{\abx@tempa}}}% + \abx@tempb} + {\usebibmacro{editorstrg}}} + +%% Übersetzer ('Übers.') je nach Option editorstring +\renewbibmacro*{translatorstrg}{% + \ifthenelse{\value{translator}>1\OR\ifandothers{translator}} + {\bbx@edstringfont{\bbx@editorstring{\bibstring{translators}}}} + {\bbx@edstringfont{\bbx@editorstring{\bibstring{translator}}}}} + +\renewbibmacro*{translator+othersstrg}{% + \ifthenelse{\value{translator}>1\OR\ifandothers{translator}} + {\def\abx@tempa{translators}} + {\def\abx@tempa{translator}}% + \ifnamesequal{translator}{commentator} + {\appto\abx@tempa{co}% + \clearname{commentator}} + {\ifnamesequal{translator}{annotator} + {\appto\abx@tempa{an}% + \clearname{annotator}} + {}}% + \ifnamesequal{translator}{introduction} + {\appto\abx@tempa{in}% + \clearname{introduction}} + {\ifnamesequal{translator}{foreword} + {\appto\abx@tempa{fo}% + \clearname{foreword}} + {\ifnamesequal{translator}{afterword} + {\appto\abx@tempa{af}% + \clearname{afterword}} + {}}}% + \bbx@edstringfont{\bbx@editorstring{\bibstring{\abx@tempa}}}} + +%% Option 'editorstring=brackets|parens|normal' +%% Option 'idembib=true|false' +\renewbibmacro*{editor}{% + \ifthenelse{\ifuseeditor\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{editor}} + {\ifbool{bbx:idembib} + {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}\AND + \NOT\iffirstonpage} + {\bibnamedash} + {\printnames{editor}% + \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}}% + {\printnames{editor}% + \global\undef\bbx@lasthash}% + \usebibmacro{editorstringpunct}% + \usebibmacro{editorstrg}% + \ifbool{bbx:idembib} + {} + {\labelnamepunct}% + \clearname{editor}} + {}} + +\renewbibmacro*{editor+others}{% + \ifthenelse{\ifuseeditor\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{editor}} + {\ifbool{bbx:idembib} + {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}\AND + \NOT\iffirstonpage} + {\bibnamedash} + {\printnames{editor}% + \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}}% + {\printnames{editor}}% + \usebibmacro{editorstringpunct}% + \usebibmacro{editor+othersstrg}% + \ifbool{bbx:idembib} + {} + {\labelnamepunct}% + \clearname{editor}} + {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash}} + +\renewbibmacro*{translator}{% + \ifthenelse{\ifusetranslator\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{translator}} + {\ifbool{bbx:idembib} + {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}\AND + \NOT\iffirstonpage} + {\bibnamedash} + {\printnames{translator}% + \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}}% + {\printnames{translator}}% + \usebibmacro{editorstringpunct}% + \usebibmacro{translatorstrg}% + \ifbool{bbx:idembib} + {} + {\labelnamepunct}% + \clearname{translator}} + {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash}} + +\renewbibmacro*{translator+others}{% + \ifthenelse{\ifusetranslator\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{translator}} + {\ifbool{bbx:idembib} + {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}\AND + \NOT\iffirstonpage} + {\bibnamedash} + {\printnames{translator}% + \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}}% + {\printnames{translator}}% + \usebibmacro{editorstringpunct}% + \usebibmacro{translator+othersstrg}% + \ifbool{bbx:idembib} + {} + {\labelnamepunct}% + \clearname{translator}} + {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash}} + +\newbibmacro*{editor+others/translator+others}{% + \ifboolexpr{ + test \ifuseeditor + and + not test {\ifnameundef{editor}} + } + {\usebibmacro{editor+others}} + {\usebibmacro{translator+others}}} + +%% Option 'idembib=true|false' +\renewbibmacro*{author}{% + \ifbool{bbx:pseudoauthor} + {\usebibmacro{author:pseudotrue}} + {\usebibmacro{author:pseudofalse}}} + +\newbibmacro*{author:pseudotrue}{% + \ifbool{pseudoauthor} + {\printtext{\bibleftpseudo}% + \usebibmacro{author:output}% + \printtext{\bibrightpseudo}} + {\usebibmacro{author:output}}} + +\newbibmacro*{author:pseudofalse}{% + \ifbool{pseudoauthor} + {} + {\usebibmacro{author:output}}} + +\newbibmacro*{author:output}{% + \ifthenelse{\ifuseauthor\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{author}} + {\ifbool{bbx:idembib} + {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}\AND + \NOT\iffirstonpage} + {\bibnamedash} + {\printnames{author}% + \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}} + {\printnames{author}% + \global\undef\bbx@lasthash}% + \iffieldundef{authortype} + {} + {\setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \usebibmacro{authorstrg}}} + {}} + +%% 'Ders.' bei inbook, wenn gleicher Autor +\renewbibmacro*{bybookauthor}{% + \ifnamesequal{author}{bookauthor} + {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem} + {\midsentence*\bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}\addcolon} + {\printnames[byauthor]{bookauthor}% + \newunit\newblock}} + {\printnames[byauthor]{bookauthor}% + \newunit\newblock}} + +%% Wenn Autor und Hrsg. gleich --> hg. v. dems./ders./dens.: +\renewbibmacro*{byeditor+others}{% + \ifnameundef{editor} + {} + {\usebibmacro{byeditor+othersstrg}% + \setunit{\addspace}% + \ifboolexpr{ + ( ( ( not test {\ifentrytype{inbook}}% alle außer inbook: author und editor gleich? + and + test {\ifnamesequal{editor}{author}} ) + or + ( test {\ifentrytype{inbook}} + and + ( test {\ifnameundef{bookauthor}}% inbook ohne bookauthor: author und editor gleich? + and + test {\ifnamesequal{editor}{author}} ) + or + ( not test {\ifnameundef{bookauthor}}% inbook mit bookauthor: author und bookauthor gleich? + and + test {\ifnamesequal{editor}{bookauthor}} ) ) ) + or + ( bool {xrefidem} + and not + bool {cbx:authauthxref} ) ) + and + bool {bbx:edbyidem} + } + {\bibstring[\mkidem]{idemdat\thefield{gender}}} + {\printnames[byeditor]{editor}}% + \clearname{editor}% + \newunit}% + \usebibmacro{byeditorx}% + \usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}} + +\renewbibmacro*{bytranslator+others}{% + \ifnameundef{translator} + {} + {\usebibmacro{bytranslator+othersstrg}% + \setunit{\addspace}% + \ifboolexpr{ + ( test {\ifnamesequal{translator}{author}} + or + bool {xrefidem} ) + and + bool {bbx:edbyidem} + } + {\bibstring[\mkidem]{idemdat\thefield{gender}}} + {\printnames[bytranslator]{translator}}% + \clearname{translator}% + \newunit}% + \usebibmacro{withothers}} + +\newbibmacro*{ifuse:byeditor+others}{% + \ifboolexpr{ + ( test \ifuseeditor + and + not test {\ifnameundef{editor}} ) + or + ( test \ifusetranslator + and + not test {\ifnameundef{translator}} ) + or + bool {xref:inbook} + } + {} + {\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}}} + +\newbibmacro*{ifuse:xrefidem}{% + \ifboolexpr{ + test \ifuseeditor + and + not test {\ifnameundef{editor}} + } + {\printtext{\bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}% + \addspace}% + \usebibmacro{editor+othersstrg}% + \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock} + {}% + \ifboolexpr{ + test \ifusetranslator + and + not test {\ifnameundef{translator}} + and + ( ( not test \ifuseeditor ) + or + ( test \ifuseeditor + and + test {\ifnameundef{editor}} ) ) + } + {\printtext{\bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}% + \addspace}% + \usebibmacro{editor+othersstrg}% + \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock} + {}} + +%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% +%%%%% Makros aus authortitle.bbx (unverändert) %%%%% +%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% + +\setlength{\bibitemsep}{0pt} + +\defbibenvironment{bibliography} + {\list + {} + {\setlength{\leftmargin}{\bibhang}% + \setlength{\itemindent}{-\leftmargin}% + \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}% + \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}}} + {\endlist} + {\item} + +\endinput diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/bbx/footnote-dw.bbx b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/bbx/footnote-dw.bbx new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a0ebd77967 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/bbx/footnote-dw.bbx @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ +% footnote-dw.bbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2016 + +\ProvidesFile{footnote-dw.bbx}[2016/12/06 v1.7 biblatex bibliography style] + +\RequireBibliographyStyle{authortitle-dw} + +\endinput diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/bbx/standard-dw.bbx b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/bbx/standard-dw.bbx new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..66d7740802 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/bbx/standard-dw.bbx @@ -0,0 +1,1884 @@ +% standard-dw.bbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2016 + +\ProvidesFile{standard-dw.bbx}[2016/12/06 v1.7 biblatex bibliography style] + +\@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2016/03/11} + {} + {\PackageError{biblatex-dw} + {Outdated 'biblatex' package\MessageBreak + Upgrade to biblatex v3.3 (2016/03/11) or later.\MessageBreak + I found: '\csuse{ver@biblatex.sty}'.\MessageBreak + This is a fatal error. I'm aborting now}% + \endinput} + +\RequireBibliographyStyle{standard} + +\DeclareLanguageMapping{english}{english-dw} +\DeclareLanguageMapping{german}{german-dw} + +\newbool{bbx:acronym} +\newbool{bbx:journumafteryear} +\newbool{bbx:journumdate} +\newbool{bbx:seriesstandard} +\newbool{bbx:seriesafteryear} +\newbool{bbx:seriesbeforeedition} +\newbool{bbx:seriesinparens} +\newbool{bbx:shorthandacro} +\newbool{bbx:shorthandinbib} +\newbool{bbx:shorthandinbibpunct}% Kontrolle, ob shorthandinbib ausgegeben wurde +\newbool{bbx:shorthandwidthbool} +\newbool{bbx:shortjournal} +\newbool{bbx:terselos} +\newbool{bbx:xref}% soll xref überhaupt verwendet werden? +\newbool{xrefidem} + +\newtoggle{listofshorthands}% sind wir in der List of Shorthands? + +% Schalter zum ein-/ausblenden bestimmter Felder +\newbool{bbx:pagetotal} + +% Längen für Shorthand +\newlength{\bbx@shorthandwidth} +\newlength{\shorthandsep} + +% Hilfsbefehl für @review +\newcommand*{\bbx@reviewparent} + +\DeclareEntryOption{acronym}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:acronym}} + +\DeclareBibliographyOption{acronyms}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:shorthandacro}} +\DeclareBibliographyOption{shorthandinbib}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:shorthandinbib}} +\DeclareBibliographyOption{shorthandwidth}{% + \setlength{\bbx@shorthandwidth}{#1} + \setlength{\shorthandsep}{3pt plus 0.5pt minus 0.5pt} + \renewcommand{\shorthandpunct}{\addcolon} + \csuse{booltrue}{bbx:shorthandwidthbool}} +\DeclareBibliographyOption{shortjournal}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:shortjournal}} +\DeclareBibliographyOption{terselos}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:terselos}} +\DeclareBibliographyOption{xref}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:xref}} + +% Optionen zum ein-/ausblenden bestimmter Felder +\DeclareBibliographyOption{pagetotal}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:pagetotal}} + +% journalnumber=standard|afteryear|date +\newcommand{\bbx@option@journalnumber}{} +\DeclareBibliographyOption{journalnumber}{% + \renewcommand{\bbx@option@journalnumber}{#1}} +% zu Ehren von Bernhard Tempel +\newbool{bbx:bernhard} +\DeclareBibliographyOption{bernhard}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:bernhard}} + +% Option series=standard|afteryear|beforeedition +\DeclareBibliographyOption{series}[standard]{% + \ifcsdef{bbx@opt@series@#1} + {\csuse{bbx@opt@series@#1}} + {\blxdw@error{% + Invalid option 'series=#1'\MessageBreak + Valid values are 'standard', 'afteryear', 'beforeedition'}}} +\def\bbx@opt@series@standard{% + \global\booltrue{bbx:seriesstandard}% + \global\boolfalse{bbx:seriesafteryear}% + \global\boolfalse{bbx:seriesbeforeedition}} +\def\bbx@opt@series@afteryear{% + \global\boolfalse{bbx:seriesstandard}% + \global\booltrue{bbx:seriesafteryear}% + \global\boolfalse{bbx:seriesbeforeedition}} +\def\bbx@opt@series@beforeedition{% + \global\boolfalse{bbx:seriesstandard}% + \global\boolfalse{bbx:seriesafteryear}% + \global\booltrue{bbx:seriesbeforeedition}} + +% Option seriesformat=standard|parens +\newcommand{\bbx@option@seriesformat}{} +\DeclareBibliographyOption{seriesformat}{% + \renewcommand{\bbx@option@seriesformat}{#1}} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@seriesformat}{parens} + {\global\booltrue{bbx:seriesinparens}} + {\global\boolfalse{bbx:seriesinparens}}} + +\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{ + doi=false, + eprint=false, + isbn=false, + journalnumber=standard, + pagetotal=false, + series=standard, + seriesformat=parens, + shorthandinbib=false, + terselos=true, + xref=false +} + +\AtBeginDocument{% + \ifbool{bbx:xref} + {\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{mincrossrefs=1}} + {}} + +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{idemreference}{idemcollection} +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{xrefreference}{xrefcollection} +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{xrefidemreference}{xrefidemcollection} + +%% Zeichen bei Zeitschriften: +%% -> vor 'volume' (z.B. 'Jg. ') +\newcommand*{\jourvolstring}{\addspace} +%% -> zwischen 'volume' und 'number' +%% (nur mit journumafteryear=true) +\newcommand*{\jourvolnumsep}{\adddot} +%% -> vor 'number' (z.B. ', Nr. ') +\newcommand*{\journumstring}{% + \addcomma\space% + \bibstring{number}% + \addnbspace} + +%% Zeichen bei Reihen: +%% -> vor 'series' (z.B. '= ') +\newcommand*{\seriespunct}{} +%% -> vor 'number' (z.B. ', Bd. ') +\newcommand*{\sernumstring}{\addspace} + +%% Reihe in Klammern (Option seriesformat) +\renewbibmacro*{series+number}{% + \iffieldundef{series}% + {} + {\ifbool{bbx:seriesinparens} + {\printtext[parens]{% + \seriespunct% + \printfield{series}% + \setunit*{\sernumstring}% + \printfield{number}}% + \newunit} + {\setunit{\newunitpunct\seriespunct}% + \printfield{series}% + \setunit*{\sernumstring}% + \printfield{number}% + \newunit}}} + +%% Kürzere Ausgabe der List of Shorthands +\newbibmacro*{terselos}{% + \ifbool{bbx:terselos} + {\ifnameundef{labelname} + {} + {\ifnameundef{author} + {\printnames{editor}% + \usebibmacro{editorstringpunct}% + \usebibmacro{editorstrg}} + {\printnames{author}}% + \setunit{\labelnamepunct}}% + \iffieldundef{booktitle} + {\usebibmacro{maintitle+title-terselos}} + {\printfield{title}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{in:}% + \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle-terselos}}% + \finentry} + {\usedriver + {\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}} + {\thefield{entrytype}}% + \finentry}} + +\newbibmacro*{maintitle+title-terselos}{% + \iffieldsequal{maintitle}{title} + {\clearfield{maintitle}% + \clearfield{mainsubtitle}% + \clearfield{maintitleaddon}} + {\iffieldundef{maintitle} + {} + {\printfield{maintitle}% + \newunit\newblock + \iffieldundef{volume} + {} + {\iffieldundef{volumes} + {} + {\printfield{volumes}% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}}% + \printfield{volume}% + \printfield{part}% + \setunit{\addcolon\space}}}}% + \printfield{title}% + \newunit} + +\newbibmacro*{maintitle+booktitle-terselos}{% + \iffieldundef{maintitle} + {} + {\printfield{maintitle}% + \newunit\newblock + \iffieldundef{volume} + {} + {\printfield{volume}% + \printfield{part}% + \setunit{\addcolon\space}}}% + \printfield{booktitle}% + \newunit} + +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{shorthand}{% + \toggletrue{listofshorthands}% + \usebibmacro{terselos}} + +%% Zeichensetzung nach dem Shorthand-Label +\newcommand{\shorthandpunct}{} + +%% List of Shorthands: Länge der Labels einstellbar +\AtBeginDocument{% +\ifbool{bbx:shorthandwidthbool} + {\defbibenvironment{shorthand} + {\list + {\printfield[shorthandwidth]{shorthand}% + \printtext{\shorthandpunct}} + {\setlength{\labelwidth}{\bbx@shorthandwidth}% + \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}% + \setlength{\labelsep}{\shorthandsep}% + \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}% + \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}% + \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}% + \renewcommand*{\makelabel}[1]{##1\hss}}} + {\endlist} + {\item}} + {\defbibenvironment{shorthand} + {\list + {\printfield[shorthandwidth]{shorthand}} + {\setlength{\labelwidth}{\shorthandwidth}% + \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}% + \setlength{\labelsep}{\biblabelsep}% + \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}% + \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}% + \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}% + \renewcommand*{\makelabel}[1]{##1\hss}}} + {\endlist} + {\item}}} + +%% Option »shorthandinbib«: +%% Shorthands in der Bibliographie ausgeben +%% außerdem für Option »xref«: +%% Autoren in Liste schreiben für späteren Test xrefnamecheck +% \newcommand*{\@xrefauthornames} +\DeclareFieldFormat{shorthandinbib}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}} +\newcommand*{\shorthandinbibpunct}{\addspace} +\renewbibmacro*{begentry}{% + \ifboolexpr{ + bool {bbx:shorthandinbib} + and not + ( test {\ifcitation} + or + togl {listofshorthands} ) + } + {\iffieldundef{shorthand} + {} + {\printfield[shorthandinbib]{shorthand}% + \nopunct\shorthandinbibpunct}} + {}} + +%% bei useeditor=true oder usetranslator=true +\newbibmacro*{useeditor+others}{% + \ifboolexpr{ + test \ifuseeditor + and + not test {\ifnameundef{editor}} + } + {\usebibmacro{useeditor}} + {\ifboolexpr{ + test \ifusetranslator + and + not test {\ifnameundef{translator}} + } + {\usebibmacro{usetranslator}} + {}}} + +\newbibmacro*{useeditor}{% + \ifnamesequal{author}{editor} + {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem} + {\midsentence*\bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}% + \addspace}% + {\printnames[byeditor]{editor}% + \usebibmacro{editorstringpunct}% + \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}}% + {\printnames[byeditor]{editor}% + \usebibmacro{editorstringpunct}% + \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}% + \usebibmacro{editorstrg}% + \clearname{editor}% + \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock} + +\newbibmacro*{usetranslator}{% + \ifnamesequal{author}{translator} + {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem} + {\midsentence*\bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}% + \addspace}% + {\printnames[byeditor]{translator}% + \usebibmacro{editorstringpunct}% + \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}}% + {\printnames[byeditor]{translator}% + \usebibmacro{editorstringpunct}% + \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}% + \usebibmacro{translatorstrg}% + \clearname{translator}% + \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock} + +%% Wenn 'volumes' und 'volume' angegeben sind, +%% 'volumes' immer vor 'volume' ausgeben +\newbibmacro*{volumes+volume+part}{% + \iffieldundef{maintitle} + {\iffieldundef{volumes} + {} + {\printfield{volumes}% + \newunit}% + \iffieldundef{volume} + {} + {\printfield{volume}% + \printfield{part}% + \setunit{\addcolon\space}}} + {\iffieldundef{volume}% Wenn es einen maintitle gibt, + % aber kein 'volume'-Feld, wurde + % 'volumes' noch nicht ausgegeben! + {\printfield{volumes}} + {}}} + +\renewbibmacro*{maintitle+title}{% + \iffieldsequal{maintitle}{title} + {\clearfield{maintitle}% + \clearfield{mainsubtitle}% + \clearfield{maintitleaddon}} + {\iffieldundef{maintitle} + {} + {\usebibmacro{maintitle}% + \newunit\newblock + \iffieldundef{volume} + {} + {\iffieldundef{volumes} + {} + {\printfield{volumes}% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}}% + \printfield{volume}% + \printfield{part}% + \setunit{\addcolon\space}}}}% + \usebibmacro{title}% + \newunit} + +%% Test, ob 'volume' vorhanden ist (bei xref parent) +\newbibmacro*{xrefvolumecheck}{% + \ifbool{bbx:xref} + {\iffieldundef{volume} + {\xifinlistcs{\strfield{entrykey}}{novolume@xrefparent} + {}% schon in Liste vorhanden, dann passiert nichts + {\listcsxadd{novolume@xrefparent}{\thefield{entrykey}}}}% + {}} + {}} + +%% Test, ob 'citedas=true' gesetzt ist (bei xref parent) +\newbibmacro*{xrefcitedascheck}{% + \ifbool{bbx:xref} + {\ifbool{cbx:citedas} + {\xifinlistcs{\strfield{entrykey}}{citedas@xrefparent} + {}% schon in Liste vorhanden, dann passiert nichts + {\listcsxadd{citedas@xrefparent}{\thefield{entrykey}}}}% + {}} + {}} + +%% Tests werden bei 'xref=true' in @book, @collection, +%% @proceedings und @reference ausgeführt +\AtDataInput[book]{% + \usebibmacro{xrefvolumecheck}% + \usebibmacro{xrefcitedascheck}} +\AtDataInput[collection]{% + \usebibmacro{xrefvolumecheck}% + \usebibmacro{xrefcitedascheck}} +\AtDataInput[proceedings]{% + \usebibmacro{xrefvolumecheck}% + \usebibmacro{xrefcitedascheck}} +\AtDataInput[reference]{% + \usebibmacro{xrefvolumecheck}% + \usebibmacro{xrefcitedascheck}} + +%% 'volume' bei xref-child ausgeben, falls +%% in xref-parent nicht definiert +\newbibmacro*{xrefvolume}{% + \xifinlistcs{\strfield{xref}}{novolume@xrefparent} + {\newunit + \printfield{volume}% + \iffieldxref{year}% wenn 'year' bei child und parent gleich + {} + {\setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \iflistxref{location}% wenn 'location' bei child und parent gleich + {} + {\printlist{location}% + \setunit*{\addspace}}% + \usebibmacro{date}}} + {}}% + +% bei @inreference: booktitle, vol. (year) +\newbibmacro*{xrefvolume:inreference}{% + \xifinlistcs{\strfield{xref}}{novolume@xrefparent} + {\iffieldundef{volume} + {} + {\ifbibliography + {\setunit{\addspace}} + {\xifinlistcs{\strfield{xref}}{citedas@xrefparent} + {\ifbool{cbx:xrefparent:firstcite} + {\newunit + \printtext{\bibstring{volume}\addspace}} + {\setunit{\addspace}}} + {\newunit + \printtext{\bibstring{volume}\addspace}}}% + \printfield{volume}% + \iffieldxref{year}% wenn 'year' bei child und parent gleich + {} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \printfield[parens]{year}}}} + {}} + +%% 'volume' und 'year' ausgeben bei @inreference +\newbibmacro*{volumes+volume+part+year}{% + \iffieldundef{maintitle} + {\iffieldundef{volumes} + {} + {\printfield{volumes}% + \newunit}% + \iffieldundef{volume} + {} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \printfield{volume}% + \printfield{part}}% + \iffieldundef{year} + {} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \printfield[parens]{year}% + \setunit{\addspace}}} + {\iffieldundef{volume}% Wenn es einen maintitle gibt, + % aber kein 'volume'-Feld, wurde + % 'volumes' noch nicht ausgegeben! + {\printfield{volumes}} + {}}} + +%% Option 'shortjournal=true|false' +\renewbibmacro*{journal}{% + \ifbool{bbx:shortjournal} + {\iffieldundef{shortjournal} + {\usebibmacro{journal:normal}} + {\printfield{shortjournal}}} + {\usebibmacro{journal:normal}}} + +\newbibmacro*{journal:normal}{% vollständige, 'normale' Ausgabe eines Zeitschriftentitels + \iffieldundef{journaltitle} + {} + {\printtext[journaltitle]{% + \printfield[titlecase]{journaltitle}% + \setunit{\subtitlepunct}% + \printfield[titlecase]{journalsubtitle}}}} + +%% Option 'journalnumber=standard|afteryear|date' +\AtBeginDocument{% + \ifbool{bbx:bernhard}% Bernhard geht vor (c; + {\global\boolfalse{bbx:journumafteryear}% + \global\booltrue{bbx:journumdate}} + {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@journalnumber}{afteryear} + {\global\booltrue{bbx:journumafteryear}% + \global\boolfalse{bbx:journumdate}} + {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@journalnumber}{date} + {\global\boolfalse{bbx:journumafteryear}% + \global\booltrue{bbx:journumdate}} + {\global\boolfalse{bbx:journumafteryear} + \global\boolfalse{bbx:journumdate}}}}} + +\renewbibmacro*{journal+issuetitle}{% + \usebibmacro{useeditor+others}% + \usebibmacro{journal}% + \setunit*{\addspace}% + \iffieldundef{series} + {} + {\newunit + \printfield{series}% + \setunit{\addspace}}% + \iffieldundef{volume} + {} + {\setunit{\jourvolstring}% + \printfield{volume}}% + % ab hier Unterscheidung nach standard|afteryear|date + \ifbool{bbx:journumdate} + {\usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle+date}} + {\ifbool{bbx:journumafteryear} + {\usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle+afteryear}} + {\usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle+standard}}}} + +% journalnumber=standard +\newbibmacro*{journal+issuetitle+standard}{% + \iffieldundef{volume} + {\iffieldundef{number} + {} + {\blxdw@warning{% + Field 'number' set, but 'volume' is empty + \MessageBreak at entry '\abx@field@entrykey'. + The output might not \MessageBreak be correct}}} + {\setunit{\jourvolnumsep}% + \printfield{number}}% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \printfield{eid}% + \setunit{\addspace}% + \iffieldundef{volume} + {\iffieldundef{month} + {} + {\setunit{\addcomma\space}}% + \usebibmacro{issue+date}} + {\printtext[parens]{\usebibmacro{issue+date}}}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{issue}% + \newunit + \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}% + \newunit} + +% journalnumber=afteryear +\newbibmacro*{journal+issuetitle+afteryear}{% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \printfield{eid}% + \setunit{\addspace}% + \iffieldundef{volume} + {\iffieldundef{month} + {} + {\setunit{\addcomma\space}}% + \usebibmacro{issue+date}% + \iffieldundef{number} + {} + {\setunit*{\addcomma\space\journumstring}% + \printfield{number}}}% + {\printtext[parens]{\usebibmacro{issue+date}}% + \iffieldundef{number} + {} + {\setunit*{\journumstring}% + \printfield{number}}}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{issue}% + \newunit + \usebibmacro{ifuse:byeditor+others}% + \newunit} + +% journalnumber=date +\newbibmacro*{journal+issuetitle+date}{% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \printfield{eid}% + \setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{issue+date+number}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{issue}% + \newunit + \usebibmacro{ifuse:byeditor+others}% + \newunit} + +\renewbibmacro*{issue+date}{% Klammern entfernt + \iffieldundef{issue} + {\printdate} + {\printfield{issue}% + \setunit{\addspace}% + \printfield{year}}% + \newunit} + +\newbibmacro*{issue+date+number}{% + \iffieldundef{number} + {\iffieldundef{issue}% + {\iffieldundef{month} + {\printtext[parens]{\printdate}} + {\setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \printdate}}% + {\iffieldundef{month}% mit definiertem Feld issue + {\printtext[parens]{\printdate}% + \setunit{\addspace}% + \printfield{issue}}% + {\setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \printdate}}}% + {\iffieldundef{issue}% mit definiertem Feld number + {\iffieldundef{month} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \printtext[parens]{\printdate}% + \setunit{\addspace}% + \printfield{number}} + {\iffieldundef{day} + {\setunit{\addcomma\space\journumstring}% + \printfield{number}% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \printdate}% + {\setunit{\addcomma\space\journumstring}% + \printfield{number}% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \printdate}}}% + {\iffieldundef{month}% mit definiertem Feld issue + {\printtext[parens]{\printdate}% + \setunit{\addspace}% + \printfield{number}% + \setunit{\addspace}% + \printtext[parens]{\printfield{issue}}}% + {\iffieldundef{day}% + {\setunit{\addspace\journumstring}% + \printfield{number}% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \printdate + \setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \printfield{issue}}% + {\setunit{\addcomma\space\journumstring}% + \printfield{number}% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \printdate% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \printfield{issue}}}}}% + \newunit} + +%% pageref: space statt \newunit, da sonst Komma vor Klammer steht +\renewbibmacro*{pageref}{% + \iflistundef{pageref} + {} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \printtext[parens]{% + \ifnumgreater{\value{pageref}}{1} + {\bibstring{backrefpages}\ppspace} + {\bibstring{backrefpage}\ppspace}% + \printlist[pageref][-\value{listtotal}]{pageref}}}} + +\renewbibmacro*{note+pages}{% + \printfield{note}% + \ifbool{cbx:rpcited} + {} + {\setunit{\bibpagespunct}% + \printfield{pages}}% + \newunit} + +%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% +%%%%% Bibmacros für Code, der im Bibliography %%%%% +%%%%% Driver aufgerufen wird, wenn KEIN xref %%%%% +%%%%% vorhanden ist. %%%%% +%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% +\newbibmacro{noxref:inbook}{% + \usebibmacro{bybookauthor}% + \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock% + \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}% + \newunit + \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesbeforeedition} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{edition}% + \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesstandard} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isbn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}}% + +\newbibmacro{noxref:incollection}{% + \usebibmacro{useeditor+others}% + \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}% + \newunit + \usebibmacro{ifuse:byeditor+others}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesbeforeedition} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{edition}% + \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesstandard} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isbn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}} + +\newbibmacro{noxref:inproceedings}{% + \usebibmacro{useeditor+others}% + \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{event+venue+date}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{ifuse:byeditor+others}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesstandard} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \printlist{organization}% + \newunit + \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isbn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}}% + +\newbibmacro{noxref:inreference}{% + \usebibmacro{useeditor+others}% + \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}% + \newunit + \usebibmacro{ifuse:byeditor+others}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{edition}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesstandard} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part+year}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isbn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}} + +%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% +%%%%% Bibliography Driver %%%%% +%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{article}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \ifbool{cbx:idemfull} + {} + {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}% + \ifnameundef{labelname} + {} + {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}% + \usebibmacro{title}% + \newunit + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{version}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{in:}% + \usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{note+pages}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{issn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}} + +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{book}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \ifbool{cbx:idemfull} + {} + {\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}% + \ifnameundef{labelname} + {} + {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}% + \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}% + \newunit + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesbeforeedition} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{edition}% + \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesstandard} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \newunit + \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal} + {\printfield{pagetotal}% + \newunit\newblock} + {}% + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isbn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}} + +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{booklet}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \ifbool{cbx:idemfull} + {} + {\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}% + \ifnameundef{labelname} + {} + {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}% + \usebibmacro{title}% + \newunit + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{howpublished}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{type}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{location+date}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \newunit + \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal} + {\printfield{pagetotal}% + \newunit\newblock} + {}% + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}} + +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{collection}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \ifbool{cbx:idemfull} + {} + {\usebibmacro{editor+others/translator+others}% + \setunit*{\labelnamepunct}}% + \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}% + \newunit + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesbeforeedition} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{edition}% + \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesstandard} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \newunit + \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal} + {\printfield{pagetotal}% + \newunit\newblock} + {}% + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isbn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}} + +\newbool{xref:inbook}% +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{inbook}{% + \booltrue{xref:inbook}% the child is an inbook + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \ifbool{cbx:idemfull} + {} + {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}% + \ifnameundef{labelname} + {} + {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}% + \usebibmacro{title}% + \newunit\newblock + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{in:}% + \usebibmacro{authauthxrefcheck}% + \ifbool{cbx:authauthxref} + {\booltrue{xrefidem}} + {\boolfalse{xrefidem}}% + \ifbool{bbx:xref} + {\iffieldundef{xref}% + {% Code, wenn kein xref vorhanden + \usebibmacro{noxref:inbook}}% + {\printtext{\bbx@xref{\thefield{xref}}}% xref + \usebibmacro{xrefvolume}% + \usebibmacro{pages}}}% + {\usebibmacro{noxref:inbook}}% bei xref=false + \usebibmacro{finentry}} + +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{incollection}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \ifbool{cbx:idemfull} + {} + {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}% + \ifnameundef{labelname} + {} + {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}% + \usebibmacro{title}% + \newunit + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{in:}% + \usebibmacro{authedxrefcheck}% + \ifbool{cbx:authedxref} + {\booltrue{xrefidem}} + {\boolfalse{xrefidem}}% + \ifbool{bbx:xref} + {\iffieldundef{xref} + {% Code, wenn kein xref vorhanden + \usebibmacro{noxref:incollection}} + {\printtext{\bbx@xref{\thefield{xref}}}% xref + \usebibmacro{xrefvolume}% + \usebibmacro{pages}}}% + {\usebibmacro{noxref:incollection}}% bei xref=false + \usebibmacro{finentry}} + +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{inproceedings}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \ifbool{cbx:idemfull} + {} + {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}% + \ifnameundef{labelname} + {} + {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}% + \usebibmacro{title}% + \newunit + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{in:}% + \ifboolexpr{ + test \ifuseeditor + or + test \ifusetranslator + } + {\ifnamexref{labelname}% + {\booltrue{xrefidem}}% + {\boolfalse{xrefidem}}} + {\usebibmacro{authedxrefcheck}% + \ifbool{cbx:authedxref} + {\booltrue{xrefidem}} + {\boolfalse{xrefidem}}}% + \ifbool{bbx:xref} + {\iffieldundef{xref}% + {% Code, wenn kein xref vorhanden + \usebibmacro{noxref:inproceedings}}% + {\printtext{\bbx@xref{\thefield{xref}}}% xref + \usebibmacro{xrefvolume}% + \usebibmacro{pages}}}% + {\usebibmacro{noxref:inproceedings}}% bei xref=false + \usebibmacro{finentry}} + +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{inreference}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \ifbool{cbx:idemfull} + {} + {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}% + \ifnameundef{labelname} + {} + {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}% + \usebibmacro{title}% + \newunit + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{in:}% + \ifboolexpr{ + test \ifuseeditor + or + test \ifusetranslator + } + {\ifnamexref{labelname}% + {\booltrue{xrefidem}}% + {\boolfalse{xrefidem}}} + {\usebibmacro{authedxrefcheck}% + \ifbool{cbx:authedxref} + {\booltrue{xrefidem}} + {\boolfalse{xrefidem}}}% + \ifbool{bbx:xref} + {\iffieldundef{xref}% + {% Code, wenn kein xref vorhanden + \usebibmacro{noxref:inreference}}% + {\ifentryseen{\thefield{xref}} + {\boolfalse{cbx:xrefparent:firstcite}}% parent wurde schon zitiert + {\booltrue{cbx:xrefparent:firstcite}}% parent wurde noch nicht zitiert + \printtext{\bbx@xref{\thefield{xref}}}% xref + \usebibmacro{xrefvolume:inreference}% + \usebibmacro{pages}}}% + {\usebibmacro{noxref:inreference}}% bei xref=false + \usebibmacro{finentry}} + +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{manual}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \ifbool{cbx:idemfull} + {} + {\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}% + \ifnameundef{labelname} + {} + {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}% + \usebibmacro{title}% + \newunit + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesbeforeedition} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{edition}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesstandard} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{type}% + \newunit + \printfield{version}% + \newunit + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \printlist{organization}% + \newunit + \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \newunit + \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal} + {\printfield{pagetotal}% + \newunit\newblock} + {}% + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isbn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}} + +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{misc}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \ifbool{cbx:idemfull} + {} + {\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}% + \ifnameundef{labelname} + {} + {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}% + \usebibmacro{title}% + \newunit + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{howpublished}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{type}% + \newunit + \printfield{version}% + \newunit + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \printlist{organization}% + \newunit\newblock + \printlist{location}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{date}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}} + +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{online}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \ifbool{cbx:idemfull} + {} + {\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}% + \ifnameundef{labelname} + {} + {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}% + \usebibmacro{title}% + \newunit + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{version}% + \newunit + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \printlist{organization}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{date}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:eprint} + {\usebibmacro{eprint}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{url+urldate}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}} + +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{patent}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \ifbool{cbx:idemfull} + {} + {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}% + \ifnameundef{labelname} + {} + {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}% + \usebibmacro{title}% + \newunit + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{type}% + \setunit*{\addspace}% + \printfield{number}% + \iflistundef{location} + {} + {\setunit*{\addspace}% + \printtext[parens]{% + \printlist[][-\value{listtotal}]{location}}}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byholder}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{date}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:url} + {\usebibmacro{url+urldate}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}} + +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{periodical}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \ifbool{cbx:idemfull} + {} + {\usebibmacro{editor+others/translator+others}% + \ifnameundef{labelname} + {} + {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}% + \usebibmacro{title+issuetitle}% + \newunit + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{issn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}} + +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{proceedings}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \ifbool{cbx:idemfull} + {} + {\usebibmacro{editor+others/translator+others}% + \ifnameundef{labelname} + {} + {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}% + \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}% + \newunit + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{event+venue+date}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesstandard} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \printlist{organization}% + \newunit + \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \newunit + \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal} + {\printfield{pagetotal}% + \newunit\newblock} + {}% + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isbn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}} + +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{report}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \ifbool{cbx:idemfull} + {} + {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}% + \ifnameundef{labelname} + {} + {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}% + \usebibmacro{title}% + \newunit + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{type}% + \setunit*{\addspace}% + \printfield{number}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{version}% + \newunit + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{institution+location+date}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \newunit + \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal} + {\printfield{pagetotal}% + \newunit\newblock} + {}% + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isrn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}} + +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{review}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \ifbool{cbx:idemfull} + {} + {\usebibmacro{author}% + \ifnameundef{labelname} + {} + {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}% + \iffieldundef{xref} + {% Code, wenn kein xref vorhanden + \usebibmacro{title}% + \newunit + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{version}} + {% Code, wenn xref vorhanden + \savefield{xref}{\bbx@reviewparent}% + \printtext[review]{\bbx@review{\thefield{xref}}}}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{in:}% + \usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{note+pages}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{issn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref} + \usebibmacro{finentry}} + +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{thesis}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \ifbool{cbx:idemfull} + {} + {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}% + \ifnameundef{labelname} + {} + {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}% + \usebibmacro{title}% + \newunit + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{type}% + \newunit + \usebibmacro{institution+location+date}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \newunit + \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal} + {\printfield{pagetotal}% + \newunit\newblock} + {}% + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}} + +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{unpublished}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \ifbool{cbx:idemfull} + {} + {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}% + \ifnameundef{labelname} + {} + {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}% + \usebibmacro{title}% + \newunit + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{howpublished}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{date}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:url} + {\usebibmacro{url+urldate}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}} + +%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% +%%%%% Die folgenden 'xref'-BibliographyDriver sind %%%%% +%%%%% nötig, damit bei Erstzitaten mit xref die %%%%% +%%%%% Option useeditor=true beachtet wird. %%%%% +%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% + +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{xrefbook}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \ifboolexpr{ + test \ifuseauthor or test \ifuseeditor or test \ifusetranslator} + {\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}% + \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock} + {}% + \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}% + \newunit + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \ifbool{xref:inbook}% child is an @inbook entry + {\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}} + {\usebibmacro{ifuse:byeditor+others}}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesbeforeedition} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{edition}% + \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesstandard} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \newunit + \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal} + {\printfield{pagetotal}% + \newunit\newblock} + {}% + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isbn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}} + +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{xrefcollection}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \ifboolexpr{ + test \ifuseeditor or test \ifusetranslator} + {\usebibmacro{editor+others/translator+others}% + \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock} + {}% + \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}% + \newunit + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{ifuse:byeditor+others}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesbeforeedition} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{edition}% + \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesstandard} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \newunit + \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal} + {\printfield{pagetotal}% + \newunit\newblock} + {}% + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isbn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}} + +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{xrefproceedings}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \ifboolexpr{ + test \ifuseeditor or test \ifusetranslator} + {\usebibmacro{editor+others/translator+others}% + \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock} + {}% + \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}% + \newunit + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{event+venue+date}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{ifuse:byeditor+others}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesstandard} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \printlist{organization}% + \newunit + \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \newunit + \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal} + {\printfield{pagetotal}% + \newunit\newblock} + {}% + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isbn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}} + +%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% +%%%%% Die folgenden 'xrefidem'-BibliographyDriver %%%%% +%%%%% sind nötig damit bei Erstzitaten mit demselben %%%%% +%%%%% Autor und xref ein Vollzitat erfolgen kann, %%%%% +%%%%% ohne den Autor des referenzierten Werkes (der %%%%% +%%%%% durch 'idem' ersetzt wird) auszugeben. %%%%% +%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% + +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{xrefidembook}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \printtext{\bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}}% + \setunit{\nametitledelim}% + \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}% + \newunit + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \ifbool{xref:inbook}% child is an @inbook entry + {\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}} + {\usebibmacro{ifuse:byeditor+others}}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesbeforeedition} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{edition}% + \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesstandard} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \newunit + \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal} + {\printfield{pagetotal}% + \newunit\newblock} + {}% + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isbn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}} + +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{xrefidemcollection}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{ifuse:xrefidem}% + \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}% + \newunit + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{ifuse:byeditor+others}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesbeforeedition} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{edition}% + \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesstandard} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \newunit + \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal} + {\printfield{pagetotal}% + \newunit\newblock} + {}% + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isbn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}} + +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{xrefidemproceedings}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{ifuse:xrefidem}% + \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}% + \newunit + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{event+venue+date}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{ifuse:byeditor+others}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesstandard} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \printlist{organization}% + \newunit + \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}% + \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear} + {\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{series+number}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \newunit + \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal} + {\printfield{pagetotal}% + \newunit\newblock} + {}% + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isbn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}} + +%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% +%%%%% Warnungen und Fehlermeldungen %%%%% +%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% +\protected\def\blxdw@error#1{% + \begingroup + \blx@safe@actives + \PackageError{biblatex-dw}{#1}% + \endgroup} + +\protected\def\blxdw@warning#1{% + \begingroup + \blx@safe@actives + \PackageWarning{biblatex-dw}{#1\blxdw@noline}% + \endgroup} +\protected\def\blxdw@warning@noline#1{% + \begingroup + \blx@safe@actives + \PackageWarning{biblatex-dw}{#1\@gobble}% + \endgroup} +\protected\def\blxdw@warning@entry#1{% + \ifundef\abx@field@entrykey + {\blxdw@warning{#1}} + {\blxdw@warning{#1\MessageBreak at entry '\abx@field@entrykey'}}} +\let\blxdw@noline\@gobble + +\AtBeginDocument{% + \ifdefstring{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{punct} + {} + {\ifdefstring{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{parens} + {} + {\ifdefstring{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{brackets} + {} + {\blxdw@warning@noline{% + Unknown value for option 'origfieldsformat'.\MessageBreak + Option 'origfieldsformat=punct' used instead}}}}% + \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@journalnumber}{standard} + {} + {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@journalnumber}{afteryear} + {} + {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@journalnumber}{date} + {} + {\blxdw@warning@noline{% + Unknown value for option 'journalnumber'.\MessageBreak + Option 'journalnumber=standard' used instead}}}}% + \iftoggle{blx@useeditor} + {\ifbool{cbx:omiteditor} + {\blxdw@warning@noline{% + Option 'omiteditor' cannot be used\MessageBreak + together with option 'useeditor=true'.\MessageBreak + Thus, 'omiteditor' is ignored}} + {}}% + {}% + \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@seriesformat}{standard} + {} + {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@seriesformat}{parens} + {} + {\blxdw@warning@noline{% + Unknown value for option 'seriesformat'.\MessageBreak + Option 'seriesformat=standard' used instead}}}% +} + +\endinput diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/cbx/authortitle-dw.cbx b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/cbx/authortitle-dw.cbx new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4362c0355c --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/cbx/authortitle-dw.cbx @@ -0,0 +1,403 @@ +% authortitle-dw.cbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2016 + +\ProvidesFile{authortitle-dw.cbx}[2016/12/06 v1.7 biblatex citation style] + +\RequireCitationStyle{standard-dw} + +\newbool{cbx:addyear} +\newbool{cbx:firstfull} +\newbool{cbx:inref}% Option inreference (true: inreference=full; false: inreference=normal) +\newbool{cbx:inreffull}% für fullcite bei inreference (nur bei Option inreference=full) + +\DeclareBibliographyOption{addyear}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:addyear}} + +\DeclareBibliographyOption{firstfull}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:firstfull}} + +\DeclareBibliographyOption{inreference}[normal]{% + \ifcsdef{cbx@opt@inreference@#1} + {\csuse{cbx@opt@inreference@#1}} + {\blxdw@error + {Invalid option 'inreference=#1'\MessageBreak + Valid values are 'normal' and 'full'}}} +\def\cbx@opt@inreference@normal{% + \boolfalse{cbx:inref}} +\def\cbx@opt@inreference@full{% + \booltrue{cbx:inref}% + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions[inreference]{skipbib=true,}} + +% Test, ob inreference genutzt wird +\AtEveryCitekey{% + \ifentrytype{inreference} + {\ifbool{cbx:inref} + {\booltrue{cbx:inreffull}} + {\boolfalse{cbx:inreffull}}} + {}} + +%% Zeichen zwischen Titel und Jahr (bei addyear=true) +\newcommand*{\titleyeardelim}{\addspace} + +\newbibmacro*{cite}{% + \usebibmacro{cite:citepages}% + \global\boolfalse{cbx:loccit}% + \ifbool{cbx:inreffull} + {\usebibmacro{cite:inreffull}} + {\ifbool{cbx:firstfull} + {\ifciteseen + {\usebibmacro{cite:normal}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:firstfull}}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:normal}}}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:normal}{% + \iffieldundef{shorthand} + {\ifthenelse{\ifciteibid\AND\NOT\iffirstonpage} + {\usebibmacro{cite:ibid}} + {\ifthenelse{\ifciteidem\AND\NOT\boolean{cbx:noidem}% + \AND\NOT\iffirstonpage} + {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}% + \usebibmacro{cite:title}% + \usebibmacro{cite:save}} + {\ifnameundef{labelname} + {} + {\usebibmacro{cite:name}}% + \usebibmacro{cite:title}}% + \ifbool{cbx:omiteditor} + {} + {\ifnameundef{labelname} + {\newunit + \usebibmacro{cite:byeditor}} + {}}% + \usebibmacro{cite:save}}}% + {\ifbool{cbx:shorthandibid}% + {\ifthenelse{\ifciteibid\AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}% + {\usebibmacro{cite:ibid}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}% + {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:inreffull}{% + \ifthenelse{\ifciteibid\AND\NOT\iffirstonpage} + {\usebibmacro{cite:ibid}} + {\ifthenelse{\ifciteidem\AND\NOT\boolean{cbx:noidem}% + \AND\NOT\iffirstonpage} + {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}% + \booltrue{cbx:idemfull}} + {}% + \printtext[bibhyperref]{\usebibmacro{cite:full}}}% + \usebibmacro{cite:save}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:firstfull}{% + \ifthenelse{\ifciteidem\AND\NOT\boolean{cbx:noidem}% + \AND\NOT\iffirstonpage} + {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}% + \booltrue{cbx:idemfull}} + {}% + \printtext[bibhyperref]{\usebibmacro{cite:full}}% + \usebibmacro{cite:save}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:full}{% + \usebibmacro{cite:full:citepages}% + \usedriver + {\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}} + {\thefield{entrytype}}% + \iffieldundef{shorthand} + {} + {\ifbool{cbx:citedas} + {\addspace\usebibmacro{shorthandintro}} + {}}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:shorthand}{% + \printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{shorthand}}% + \global\booltrue{cbx:noidem}} + +\newbibmacro*{textcite}{% + \global\boolfalse{cbx:loccit}% + \ifnameundef{labelname} + {\blxdw@warning@noline{No author or editor given for \textcite}% + \textbf{\thefield{entrykey}}} + {\ifboolexpr{ + bool {cbx:citeauthornamefirstfull} + or + bool {cbx:citeauthornamefull} + } + {\printnames[citeauthor]{labelname}} + {\printnames{labelname}}% + \setunit{% + \global\booltrue{cbx:parens}% + \addspace\bibopenparen}% + \usebibmacro{cite:save}}% + \ifnumequal{\value{citecount}}{1} + {\usebibmacro{prenote}} + {}% + \ifbool{cbx:firstfull} + {\ifciteseen + {\usebibmacro{textcite:normal}} + {\usebibmacro{textcite:firstfull}}}% + {\usebibmacro{textcite:normal}}} + +\newbibmacro*{textcite:firstfull}{% + \ifnameundef{labelname} + {} + {\ifnamesequal{labelname}{author} + {\clearname{author}} + {}% + \ifnamesequal{labelname}{editor} + {\clearname{editor}} + {}% + \ifnamesequal{labelname}{translator} + {\clearname{translator}} + {}}% + \printtext[bibhyperref]{\usebibmacro{cite:full}}} + +\newbibmacro*{textcite:normal}{% + \iffieldundef{shorthand} + {\ifthenelse{\ifciteibid\AND\NOT\iffirstonpage} + {\usebibmacro{cite:ibid}} + {\ifsingletitle + {\usebibmacro{cite:title:force}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:title}}}}% + {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}} + +%% xref +\newbibmacro*{cite:xref}{% + \ifbool{cbx:firstfull} + {\ifciteseen + {\iffieldundef{shorthand} + {\ifnameundef{labelname} + {}% + {\ifbool{xrefidem} + {\usebibmacro{cite:xref:idem}}% + {\usebibmacro{cite:editor} + \nametitledelim}}% + \usebibmacro{cite:title}% + \ifnameundef{labelname} + {\ifboolexpr{ + bool {xrefidem} + and + bool {bbx:edbyidem} + } + {\newunit + \bibstring{byeditor}% + \setunit{\addspace}% + \bibstring[\mkidem]{idemdat\thefield{gender}}} + {\newunit + \usebibmacro{cite:byeditor}}} + {}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}% + {\ifbool{xrefidem} + {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem} + {\usebibmacro{cite:fullxrefidem}}% + {\usebibmacro{cite:fullxref}}}% + {\usebibmacro{cite:fullxref}}}}% + {\iffieldundef{shorthand} + {\ifbool{xrefidem} + {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem} + {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}}% + {\printnames{labelname}% + \nametitledelim}}% + {\usebibmacro{cite:editor}% + \nametitledelim}% + \usebibmacro{cite:title}% + \ifuseeditor + {} + {\ifbool{cbx:omiteditor} + {} + {\newunit + \usebibmacro{cite:byeditor}}}}% + {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}} + +\AtBeginBibliography{% + \renewbibmacro*{cite:xref}{% + \iffieldundef{shorthand} + {\ifbool{xref:inbook} + {\usebibmacro{cite:author}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:editor}}% + \iffieldundef{shorttitle} + {\printfield{title}} + {\printfield{shorttitle}}% + \ifuseeditor + {} + {\ifbool{cbx:omiteditor} + {} + {\ifnameundef{editor} + {} + {\ifbool{xrefidem} + {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem} + {\newunit% + \bibstring{byeditor}% + \setunit{\addspace}% + \bibstring[\mkidem]{idemdat\thefield{gender}}} + {\newunit% + \usebibmacro{byeditor}}}% + {\newunit% + \usebibmacro{byeditor}}}}}} + {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{shorthand}}}}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:fullxref}{% + \usebibmacro{cite:full:citepages}% + \usedriver + {\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}} + {xref\thefield{entrytype}}% + \iffieldundef{shorthand} + {} + {\ifbool{cbx:citedas} + {\addspace\usebibmacro{shorthandintro}} + {}}}% + +\newbibmacro*{cite:fullxrefidem}{% + \usebibmacro{cite:full:citepages}% + \usedriver + {\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}} + {xrefidem\thefield{entrytype}}% + \iffieldundef{shorthand} + {} + {\ifbool{cbx:citedas} + {\addspace\usebibmacro{shorthandintro}} + {}}} + +\DeclareCiteCommand{\fullcite} + {\usebibmacro{prenote}% + \usebibmacro{cite:full:citepages}% + \booltrue{cbx:fullcite}} + {\usedriver + {\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}} + {\thefield{entrytype}}} + {\multicitedelim} + {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}} + +\DeclareCiteCommand{\footfullcite}[\mkbibfootnote] + {\bibsentence + \usebibmacro{prenote}% + \usebibmacro{cite:full:citepages}% + \booltrue{cbx:fullcite}} + {\usedriver + {\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}} + {\thefield{entrytype}}} + {\multicitedelim} + {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}} + +\newbibmacro*{citetitle}{% + \global\boolfalse{cbx:loccit}% + \iffieldundef{shorthand} + {\ifthenelse{\ifciteibid\AND\NOT\iffirstonpage} + {\usebibmacro{cite:ibid}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:title:force}}}% + {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:title}{% + \ifsingletitle + {\setunit{}}% Löschen des \nametitledelim, falls kein Titel ausgegeben wird + {\ifboolexpr{ + test {\ifentrytype{review}} + and + not test {\iffieldundef{xref}} + } + {\printtext[review]{\bbx@review{\thefield{xref}}}} + {\printtext[bibhyperref]{% + \printfield[citetitle]{labeltitle}}}% + \ifbool{cbx:addyear} + {\iffieldundef{year} + {} + {\titleyeardelim% + \parentext{\printfield{year}}}} + {}}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:title:force}{% + \printtext[bibhyperref]{% + \printfield[citetitle]{labeltitle}}% + \ifbool{cbx:addyear} + {\iffieldundef{year} + {} + {\titleyeardelim% + \parentext{\printfield{year}}}} + {}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:labelyear+extrayear}{% + \iffieldundef{labelyear} + {} + {\printtext[bibhyperref]{% + \printfield{labelyear}% + \printfield{extrayear}}}} + +\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite} + {\usebibmacro{prenote}} + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite}} + {\multicitedelim} + {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}} + +\DeclareCiteCommand{\parencite}[\mkbibparens] + {\usebibmacro{prenote}} + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite}} + {\multicitedelim} + {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}} + +\DeclareCiteCommand{\footcite}[\mkbibfootnote] + {\usebibmacro{prenote}} + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite}} + {\multicitedelim} + {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}} + +\DeclareCiteCommand{\footcitetext}[\mkbibfootnotetext] + {\usebibmacro{prenote}} + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite}} + {\multicitedelim} + {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}} + +\DeclareCiteCommand{\textcite} + {\boolfalse{cbx:parens}} + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{textcite}} + {\ifbool{cbx:parens} + {\bibcloseparen\boolfalse{cbx:parens}} + {}% + \multicitedelim} + {\usebibmacro{textcite:postnote}} + +%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% +%%%%% Unverändert übernommen aus authortitle-ibid.cbx %%%%% +%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% + +\newbool{cbx:parens} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:ibid}{% + \printtext[bibhyperref]{\bibstring[\mkibid]{ibidem}}% + \ifloccit + {\global\booltrue{cbx:loccit}} + {}} + +\newbibmacro*{textcite:postnote}{% + \ifthenelse{\iffieldundef{postnote}\OR\boolean{cbx:loccit}} + {\ifbool{cbx:parens} + {\bibcloseparen} + {}} + {\ifbool{cbx:parens} + {\postnotedelim} + {\addspace\bibopenparen}% + \printfield{postnote}\bibcloseparen}} + +\DeclareCiteCommand*{\cite} + {\usebibmacro{prenote}} + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{citetitle}} + {\multicitedelim} + {\usebibmacro{postnote}} + +\DeclareCiteCommand*{\parencite}[\mkbibparens] + {\usebibmacro{prenote}} + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{citetitle}} + {\multicitedelim} + {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}} + +\DeclareCiteCommand{\smartcite}[\iffootnote\mkbibparens\mkbibfootnote] + {\usebibmacro{prenote}} + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite}} + {\multicitedelim} + {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}} + +\endinput diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/cbx/footnote-dw.cbx b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/cbx/footnote-dw.cbx new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a45a55f260 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/cbx/footnote-dw.cbx @@ -0,0 +1,324 @@ +% footnote-dw.cbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2016 + +\ProvidesFile{footnote-dw.cbx}[2016/12/06 v1.7 biblatex citation style] + +\RequireCitationStyle{standard-dw} + +\newbool{cbx:pageref} +\newbool{cbx:review} +\newbool{cbx:textcitefull} + +\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{ + uniquename=false, % damit bei idem=false Vor- und Nachname gesetzt werden! +} + +% Befehle zum Verpacken der Zitate in Fußnoten +\newrobustcmd{\mkfootnotecite}[1]{% + \iffootnote + {#1} + {\unspace\footnote{% + \toggletrue{blx@footnote}% + \bibsentence#1\addperiod}}} + +\newbool{cbx:parencitefoot}% wenn parencite innerhalb einer + % Fußnote aufgerufen wird + % (wichtig für seenote) +\newrobustcmd{\mkparencite}[1]{% + \iffootnote + {\booltrue{cbx:parencitefoot}% + \begingroup + \let\mkbibparens\mkbibbrackets + \bibopenparen#1\bibcloseparen + \endgroup} + {\unspace\footnote{% + \toggletrue{blx@footnote}% + \bibsentence#1\addperiod}}} + +% Befehl zum Testen, ob in Fußnote (für \textcite) +\newrobustcmd{\footnotecheck}{% + \iffootnote + {\booltrue{cbx:parencitefoot}} + {\boolfalse{cbx:parencitefoot}}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite}{% + \usebibmacro{cite:citepages}% + \global\boolfalse{cbx:loccit}% + \bibhypertarget{cite\the\value{instcount}}{% + \ifboolexpr{ + test {\ifciteseen} + and not + bool {cbx:textcitefull} + } + {\iffieldundef{shorthand} + {\ifthenelse{\ifciteibid\AND\NOT\iffirstonpage} + {\usebibmacro{cite:ibid}% + \usebibmacro{cite:save}% + \usebibmacro{cite:reset}} + {\ifthenelse{\ifciteidem\AND\NOT\boolean{cbx:noidem}% + \AND\NOT\iffirstonpage} + {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}% + \usebibmacro{cite:title}} + {\ifnameundef{labelname} + {} + {\usebibmacro{cite:name}}% + \usebibmacro{cite:title}}% + \usebibmacro{cite:save}}} + {\ifbool{cbx:shorthandibid}% + {\ifthenelse{\ifciteibid\AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}% + {\usebibmacro{cite:ibid}}% + {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}% + \usebibmacro{cite:save}% + \usebibmacro{cite:reset}}} + {\ifthenelse{\ifciteidem\AND\NOT\boolean{cbx:noidem}% + \AND\NOT\iffirstonpage} + {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}% + \booltrue{cbx:idemfull}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{cite:full}% + \usebibmacro{cite:save}}}} + +\newbibmacro*{footref}{% + \csxdef{cbx@first@\thefield{entrykey}}{\the\value{instcount}}% + \label{cbx@\the\value{instcount}}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:full}{% + \usebibmacro{cite:full:citepages}% + \usebibmacro{footref}% + \printtext[bibhypertarget]{% + \usedriver + {\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}} + {\thefield{entrytype}}% + \iffieldundef{shorthand} + {} + {\ifbool{cbx:citedas} + {\addspace\usebibmacro{shorthandintro}} + {}}}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:title}{% + \ifboolexpr{ + test {\ifentrytype{review}} + and + not test {\iffieldundef{xref}} + } + {\booltrue{cbx:review}% für cite:seenote (damit das rezensierte Werk keinen Verweis bekommt) + \printtext[review]{\bbx@review{\thefield{xref}}}% + \boolfalse{cbx:review}}% \boolfalse ist nötig, damit @review selbst wieder einen Verweis bekommt + {\ifsingletitle + {\setunit{}}% Löschen des \nametitledelim, falls kein Titel ausgegeben wird + {\printtext[bibhyperlink]{% + \printfield[citetitle]{labeltitle}}}}% + \ifboolexpr{ + test \ifuseeditor + or + test \ifusetranslator + } + {} + {\ifbool{cbx:omiteditor} + {} + {\ifnameundef{editor} + {} + {\ifboolexpr{ + bool {xrefidem} + and + bool {bbx:edbyidem} + } + {\newunit + \bibstring{byeditor}% + \setunit{\addspace}% + \bibstring[\mkidem]{idemdat\thefield{gender}}} + {\newunit + \usebibmacro{cite:byeditor}}}}}% + \usebibmacro{cite:seenote}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:shorthand}{% + \printtext[bibhyperlink]{\printfield{shorthand}}% + \ifbool{cbx:citedas} + {} + {\usebibmacro{cite:seenote}}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:seenote}{% + \ifbool{cbx:review} + {} + {\ifbool{cbx:parencitefoot} + {\addspace\mkbibbrackets{% + \midsentence\bibstring{seenote}\addnbspace% + \ref{cbx@\csuse{cbx@first@\thefield{entrykey}}}% + \ifbool{cbx:pageref} + {\ifsamepage{\the\value{instcount}} + {\csuse{cbx@first@\thefield{entrykey}}} + {} + {\addcomma\space\bibstring{page}\addnbspace% + \pageref{cbx@\csuse{cbx@first@\thefield{entrykey}}}}} + {}}} + {\addspace\mkbibparens{% + \midsentence\bibstring{seenote}\addnbspace% + \ref{cbx@\csuse{cbx@first@\thefield{entrykey}}}% + \ifbool{cbx:pageref} + {\ifsamepage{\the\value{instcount}} + {\csuse{cbx@first@\thefield{entrykey}}} + {} + {\addcomma\space\bibstring{page}\addnbspace% + \pageref{cbx@\csuse{cbx@first@\thefield{entrykey}}}}} + {}}}}} + +%% xref +\newbibmacro*{cite:xref}{% + \ifciteseen + {\iffieldundef{shorthand} + {\ifnameundef{labelname} + {} + {\ifboolexpr{ + bool {xrefidem} + and + bool {bbx:edbyidem} + } + {\usebibmacro{cite:xref:idem}} + {\ifbool{xref:inbook} + {\usebibmacro{author}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:editor}}% + \nametitledelim}}% + \usebibmacro{cite:title}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}} + {\ifboolexpr{ + bool {xrefidem} + and + bool {bbx:edbyidem} + } + {\usebibmacro{cite:fullxrefidem}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:fullxref}}}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:fullxref}{% + \usebibmacro{footref}% + \usedriver + {\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}} + {xref\thefield{entrytype}}% + \iffieldundef{shorthand} + {} + {\ifbool{cbx:citedas} + {\addspace\usebibmacro{shorthandintro}} + {}}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:fullxrefidem}{% + \usebibmacro{footref}% + \usedriver + {\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}} + {xrefidem\thefield{entrytype}}% + \iffieldundef{shorthand} + {} + {\ifbool{cbx:citedas} + {\addspace\usebibmacro{shorthandintro}} + {}}}% + +%% falls eine Bibliographie ausgegeben wird, +%% soll kein '(wie Anm. x)' erscheinen +\AtBeginBibliography{% + \renewbibmacro*{cite:xref}{% + \iffieldundef{shorthand}% + {\usebibmacro{cite:editor}% + \iffieldundef{shorttitle}% + {\printfield{title}}% + {\printfield{shorttitle}}% + \ifboolexpr{ + test \ifuseeditor + or + test \ifusetranslator + } + {} + {\ifbool{cbx:omiteditor} + {} + {\ifbool{xrefidem}% + {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem} + {\newunit + \bibstring{byeditor}% + \setunit{\addspace}% + \bibstring[\mkidem]{idemdat\thefield{gender}}} + {\newunit + \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}}} + {\newunit + \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}}}}}% + {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{shorthand}}}}} + +\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkfootnotecite] + {\usebibmacro{prenote}} + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite}} + {\multicitedelim} + {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}} + +\DeclareCiteCommand{\parencite}[\mkparencite] + {\usebibmacro{prenote}} + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite}} + {\multicitedelim} + {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}} + +\DeclareCiteCommand{\footcite}[\mkfootnotecite] + {\usebibmacro{prenote}} + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite}} + {\multicitedelim} + {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}} + +\DeclareCiteCommand{\fullcite}[\mkfootnotecite] + {\usebibmacro{prenote}% + \usebibmacro{cite:full:citepages}% + \booltrue{cbx:fullcite}} + {\usedriver + {\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}} + {\thefield{entrytype}}} + {\multicitedelim} + {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}} + +\DeclareCiteCommand{\footfullcite}[\mkfootnotecite] + {\usebibmacro{prenote}% + \usebibmacro{cite:full:citepages}% + \booltrue{cbx:fullcite}} + {\usedriver + {\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}} + {\thefield{entrytype}}} + {\multicitedelim} + {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}} + +\DeclareCiteCommand{\smartcite}[\iffootnote\mkparencite\mkfootnotecite] + {\usebibmacro{prenote}} + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite}} + {\multicitedelim} + {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}} + +\DeclareCiteCommand{\textcite}[\footnotecheck\cbx@textcite\footcite] + {\gdef\cbx@savedkeys{}} + {\printnames{labelname}% + \ifciteseen + {\global\boolfalse{cbx:textcitefull}} + {\global\booltrue{cbx:textcitefull}}% + \xappto\cbx@savedkeys{\thefield{entrykey},}} + {\multinamedelim} + {\protected@xappto\cbx@savedcites{% + [\thefield{prenote}][\thefield{postnote}]{\cbx@savedkeys}}} + +\newrobustcmd{\cbx@textcite}[2]{% + \def\cbx@savedcites{#1}% + \ifbool{cbx:parencitefoot} + {#2% + \addspace\mkbibparens{\cbx@savedcites}} + {#2% + \cbx@savedcites}} + +\DeclareMultiCiteCommand{\cites}[\mkfootnotecite]{\cite}{\multicitedelim} +\DeclareMultiCiteCommand{\parencites}[\mkparencite]{\parencite}{\multicitedelim} +\DeclareMultiCiteCommand{\footcites}[\mkfootnotecite]{\footcite}{\multicitedelim} +\DeclareMultiCiteCommand{\textcites}[\cbx@textcite\footcites]{\textcite}{\textcitesdelim} + +%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% +%%%%% Unverändert aus verbose-inote übernommen %%%%% +%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% + +\newbibmacro*{cite:ibid}{% + \printtext[bibhyperlink]{\bibstring[\mkibid]{ibidem}}% + \ifloccit + {\global\booltrue{cbx:loccit}} + {}} + +\endinput diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/cbx/standard-dw.cbx b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/cbx/standard-dw.cbx new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..348daefb5d --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/cbx/standard-dw.cbx @@ -0,0 +1,473 @@ +% standard-dw.cbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2016 + +\ProvidesFile{standard-dw.cbx}[2016/12/06 v1.7 biblatex citation style] + +\@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2016/03/11} + {} + {\PackageError{biblatex-dw} + {Outdated 'biblatex' package\MessageBreak + Upgrade to biblatex v3.3 (2016/03/11) or later.\MessageBreak + I found: '\csuse{ver@biblatex.sty}'.\MessageBreak + This is a fatal error. I'm aborting now}% + \endinput} + +\newbool{cbx:authauthxref} +\newbool{cbx:authedxref} +\newbool{cbx:citeauthor} +\newbool{cbx:citeauthorfoot} +\newbool{cbx:citeauthornormalfont} +\newbool{cbx:citeauthornamefirstfull} +\newbool{cbx:citeauthornamefull} +\newbool{cbx:citedas} +\newbool{cbx:edstringincitations} +\newbool{cbx:fullcite}% Test, ob fullcite ausgeführt wurde (wichtig für @review) +\newbool{cbx:idemfull} +\newbool{cbx:noidem} +\newbool{cbx:omiteditor} +\newbool{cbx:rpcited}% wurde der parent des @review schon zitiert? +\newbool{cbx:xrefparent:firstcite} +\newbool{cbx:shorthandibid} +\newbool{cbx:loccit} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:citepages}{} +\newbibmacro*{cite:full:citepages}{} +\newbibmacro*{cite:postnote}{} + +\DeclareBibliographyOption{citedas}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:citedas}} +\DeclareBibliographyOption{edstringincitations}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:edstringincitations}} +\DeclareBibliographyOption{omiteditor}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:omiteditor}} +\DeclareBibliographyOption{shorthandibid}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:shorthandibid}} + +\DeclareEntryOption{citedas}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:citedas}} +\DeclareEntryOption{shorthandibid}[true]{% + \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:shorthandibid}} + +\DeclareBibliographyOption{citeauthor}[namefont]{% + \ifcsdef{cbx@opt@citeauthor@#1} + {\csuse{cbx@opt@citeauthor@#1}} + {\blxdw@error{% + Invalid option 'citeauthor=#1'\MessageBreak + Valid values are 'namefont', 'namefontfoot', 'normalfont'}}} +\def\cbx@opt@citeauthor@namefont{% + \boolfalse{cbx:citeauthornormalfont}% + \boolfalse{cbx:citeauthorfoot}} +\def\cbx@opt@citeauthor@namefontfoot{% + \boolfalse{cbx:citeauthornormalfont}% + \booltrue{cbx:citeauthorfoot}} +\def\cbx@opt@citeauthor@normalfont{% + \booltrue{cbx:citeauthornormalfont}% + \boolfalse{cbx:citeauthorfoot}} + +\DeclareBibliographyOption{citeauthorname}[normal]{% + \ifcsdef{cbx@opt@citeauthorname@#1} + {\csuse{cbx@opt@citeauthorname@#1}} + {\blxdw@error{% + Invalid option 'citeauthorname=#1'\MessageBreak + Valid values are 'normal', 'firstfull', 'full'}}} +\def\cbx@opt@citeauthorname@normal{% + \boolfalse{cbx:citeauthornamefull}% + \boolfalse{cbx:citeauthornamefirstfull}} +\def\cbx@opt@citeauthorname@firstfull{% + \boolfalse{cbx:citeauthornamefull}% + \booltrue{cbx:citeauthornamefirstfull}} +\def\cbx@opt@citeauthorname@full{% + \booltrue{cbx:citeauthornamefull}% + \boolfalse{cbx:citeauthornamefirstfull}} + +\DeclareBibliographyOption{firstfullname}[true]{% aus Kompatibilitätsgründen + \blxdw@error{% + Option 'firstfullname' is obsolete,\MessageBreak + please use option 'citeauthorname' instead}} + +\DeclareBibliographyOption{ibidpage}[true]{% + \ifstrequal{#1}{true} + {\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{loccittracker=context}}% Standard: constrict + {\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{loccittracker=false}}} + +\DeclareBibliographyOption{pageref}[true]{% + \setbool{cbx:pageref}{#1}} + +\DeclareBibliographyOption{citepages}[permit]{% + \ifcsdef{cbx@opt@citepages@#1} + {\csuse{cbx@opt@citepages@#1}} + {\blxdw@error + {Invalid option 'citepages=#1'\MessageBreak + Valid values are 'permit', 'suppress', 'omit', 'separate'}}} + +\def\cbx@opt@citepages@permit{% + \renewbibmacro*{cite:citepages}{}% + \renewbibmacro*{cite:full:citepages}{}% + \renewbibmacro*{cite:postnote}{% + \usebibmacro{cite:postnote:ibidpage}}} + +\def\cbx@opt@citepages@suppress{% + \renewbibmacro*{cite:citepages}{}% + \renewbibmacro*{cite:full:citepages}{% + \clearfield{pages}% + \clearfield{pagetotal}}% + \renewbibmacro*{cite:postnote}{% + \usebibmacro{cite:postnote:ibidpage}}} + +\def\cbx@opt@citepages@omit{% + \renewbibmacro*{cite:citepages}{}% + \renewbibmacro*{cite:full:citepages}{% + \ifboolexpr{ + test {\ifnumequal{\value{citecount}}{\value{citetotal}}} + and + test {\iffieldpages{postnote}} + } + {\clearfield{pages}% + \clearfield{pagetotal}} + {}}% + \renewbibmacro*{cite:postnote}{% + \usebibmacro{cite:postnote:ibidpage}}} + +\def\cbx@opt@citepages@separate{% + \providetoggle{cbx:fullcite}% + \renewbibmacro*{cite:citepages}{% + \global\togglefalse{cbx:fullcite}}% + \renewbibmacro*{cite:full:citepages}{% + \global\toggletrue{cbx:fullcite}}% + \renewbibmacro*{cite:postnote}{% + \ifboolexpr{ + togl {cbx:fullcite} + and + test {\iffieldpages{postnote}} + and + test {\ifnumequal{\value{citecount}}{\value{citetotal}}} + and + ( not test {\iffieldundef{pages}} + or + ( not test {\iffieldundef{pagetotal}} + and + bool {bbx:pagetotal} + ) + ) + } + {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote:pages}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote:ibidpage}}} + \providebibmacro*{cite:postnote:pages}{% + \setunit{\postnotedelim}% + \bibstring{thiscite}% + \setunit{\addspace}% + \printfield{postnote}}} + +\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{ + autocite=footnote, + citedas=true, + citepages=separate, + citetracker=true, + edstringincitations=true, + ibidtracker=constrict, + idemtracker=constrict, + opcittracker=false, + pagetracker=true, + shorthandibid=true +} + +\InitializeCitationStyle{% + \usebibmacro{cite:reset}} + +\OnManualCitation{% + \usebibmacro{cite:reset}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:reset}{% + \global\undef\cbx@lasthash% + \global\booltrue{cbx:noidem}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:save}{% + \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}% + \csxdef{cbx:lastcite@\thefield{entrykey}}{\the\value{instcount}}% + \global\boolfalse{cbx:noidem}} + +% Ausschalten von annotation und library für Zitate im Text +\AtEveryCite{% + \boolfalse{bbx:annotation}% + \boolfalse{bbx:library}% +} + +%% Doppelpunkt nach Autoren/Editoren +%% aus Kompatibilitätsgründen zu früheren Versionen wird +%% \citenamepunct verwendet +\newcommand*{\citenamepunct}{\addcolon\space} +\renewcommand*{\nametitledelim}{\citenamepunct} +\AtEveryCite{% bei jedem Zitat nametitledelim statt labelnamepunct verwenden + \let\labelnamepunct\nametitledelim +} + +%% Slashes zwischen Autoren/Editoren +\newcommand*{\citerevsdnamedelim}{} +\newcommand*{\citemultinamedelim}{\slash} +\newcommand*{\citefinalnamedelim}{\slash} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \let\revsdnamedelim\citerevsdnamedelim + \let\multinamedelim\citemultinamedelim + \let\finalnamedelim\citefinalnamedelim +} +\AtBeginBibliography{% am Anfang des Literaturverzeichnisses umschalten wegen xref + \let\citerevsdnamedelim\bibrevsdnamedelim + \let\citemultinamedelim\bibmultinamedelim + \let\citefinalnamedelim\bibfinalnamedelim +} + +%% Textcite delimiter +\newcommand*{\textcitesdelim}{\addspace\bibstring{and}\space} + +%% Titelformate in Zitaten +\DeclareFieldFormat*{citetitle}{#1} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:name}{% + \printnames{labelname}% + \usebibmacro{cite:edstringincitations}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:idem}{% + \bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}% + \usebibmacro{cite:edstringincitations}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:xref:idem}{% + \bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}% + \usebibmacro{cite:edstringincitations}% + \ifuseeditor + {\ifnameundef{editor} + {\ifboolexpr{ + test \ifusetranslator + and + not test {\ifnameundef{translator}} + } + {\clearname{translator}} + {}} + {\clearname{editor}}} + {\ifboolexpr{ + test \ifusetranslator + and + not test {\ifnameundef{translator}} + } + {\clearname{translator}} + {}}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:edstringincitations}{% + \ifbool{cbx:edstringincitations} + {\usebibmacro{cite:editorstrg/translatorstrg}} + {}% + \setunit{\nametitledelim}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:editorstrg/translatorstrg}{% + \ifthenelse{\ifuseeditor\AND\ifnameundef{author}% + \AND\NOT\ifnameundef{editor}} + {\usebibmacro{editorstringpunct}% + \usebibmacro{editorstrg}% + \clearname{editor}} + {}% + \ifthenelse{\ifusetranslator\AND\ifnameundef{author}% + \AND\ifnameundef{editor}% + \AND\NOT\ifnameundef{translator}} + {\usebibmacro{editorstringpunct}% + \usebibmacro{translatorstrg}% + \clearname{translator}} + {}} + +% Option 'citeauthorname' +\newcommand*{\cbx@seennames}{} +\newrobustcmd*{\cbx@nameseen}[1]{% + \listxadd{\cbx@seennames}{\detokenize{#1}}} +\newrobustcmd*{\cbx@ifnameseen}[1]{% + \xifinlist{\detokenize{#1}}{\cbx@seennames}} + +\AtBeginDocument{% + \ifbool{cbx:citeauthornamefirstfull} + {\DeclareNameFormat{citeauthor}{% + \nameparts{#1}% + \cbx@ifnameseen{\namepartfamily\namepartgiven\namepartprefix\namepartsuffix} + {\ifcase\value{uniquename}% + \usebibmacro{name:family}{\namepartfamily}{\namepartgiven}{\namepartprefix}{\namepartsuffix}% + \or + \ifuseprefix + {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}{\namepartfamily}{\namepartgiveni}{\namepartprefix}{\namepartsuffixi}} + {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}{\namepartfamily}{\namepartgiveni}{\namepartprefixi}{\namepartsuffixi}}% + \fi}% + {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}{\namepartfamily}{\namepartgiven}{\namepartprefix}{\namepartsuffix}% + \cbx@nameseen{\namepartfamily\namepartgiven\namepartprefix\namepartsuffix}}% + \usebibmacro{name:andothers}}% + \DeclareCiteCommand{\citeauthor} + {\booltrue{cbx:citeauthor}% + \boolfalse{citetracker}% + \boolfalse{pagetracker}% + \usebibmacro{prenote}} + {\indexnames{labelname}% + \printnames[citeauthor]{labelname}} + {\multicitedelim} + {\usebibmacro{postnote}}} + {\ifbool{cbx:citeauthornamefull} + {\DeclareNameFormat{citeauthor}{% + \nameparts{#1}% + \ifuseprefix + {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}{\namepartfamily}{\namepartgiveni}{\namepartprefix}{\namepartsuffixi}} + {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}{\namepartfamily}{\namepartgiven}{\namepartprefix}{\namepartsuffix}}% + \usebibmacro{name:andothers}}% + \DeclareCiteCommand{\citeauthor} + {\booltrue{cbx:citeauthor}% + \boolfalse{citetracker}% + \boolfalse{pagetracker}% + \usebibmacro{prenote}} + {\indexnames{labelname}% + \printnames[citeauthor]{labelname}} + {\multicitedelim} + {\usebibmacro{postnote}}} + {\DeclareCiteCommand{\citeauthor} + {\booltrue{cbx:citeauthor}% + \boolfalse{citetracker}% + \boolfalse{pagetracker}% + \usebibmacro{prenote}} + {\indexnames{labelname}% + \printnames{labelname}} + {\multicitedelim} + {\usebibmacro{postnote}}}}} + +%% Formatierung von 'ibidem' entsprechend der Option 'ibidemfont' +\providecommand*{\mkibid}[1]{% + \bbx@ibidemfont{#1}} + +%% pages (wichtig für xref) +\newbibmacro*{pages}{% + \setunit{\bibpagespunct}% + \printfield{pages}} + +%% in manchen Literaturverweisen (wenn nicht fullcite) +%% müssen statt der vollen Namen (Format [byeditor]) +%% nur die Nachnamen ausgegeben werden (Format [labelname]) +\newbibmacro*{cite:byeditor}{% + \ifnameundef{editor} + {\ifnameundef{translator} + {} + {\usebibmacro{bytypestrg}{translator}{translator}% + \setunit{\addspace}% + \printnames[labelname]{translator}}} + {\usebibmacro{bytypestrg}{editor}{editor}% + \setunit{\addspace}% + \printnames[labelname]{editor}}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:author}{% + \ifboolexpr{ + test \ifuseauthor + and + not test {\ifnameundef{author}} + } + {\ifbool{xrefidem} + {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}\AND + \NOT\iffirstonpage} + {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}} + {\printnames[labelname]{author}}} + {\printnames[labelname]{author}% + \global\undef\bbx@lasthash}% + \clearname{author}} + {}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:editor}{% + \ifboolexpr{ + test \ifuseeditor + and + not test {\ifnameundef{editor}} + } + {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem} + {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}\AND + \NOT\iffirstonpage} + {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}} + {\printnames[labelname]{editor}% + \usebibmacro{cite:edstringincitations}}} + {\printnames[labelname]{editor}% + \usebibmacro{cite:edstringincitations}% + \global\undef\bbx@lasthash}% + \clearname{editor}} + {}% + \ifboolexpr{ + test \ifusetranslator + and + not test {\ifnameundef{translator}} + and + ( not test \ifuseeditor + or + ( test \ifuseeditor + and + test {\ifnameundef{editor}} ) ) + } + {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem} + {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}\AND + \NOT\iffirstonpage} + {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}} + {\printnames[labelname]{translator}% + \usebibmacro{cite:edstringincitations}}} + {\printnames[labelname]{translator}% + \usebibmacro{cite:edstringincitations}% + \global\undef\bbx@lasthash}% + \clearname{translator}} + {}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:postnote:ibidpage}{% + \ifbool{cbx:loccit} + {} + {\usebibmacro{postnote}}} + +%% Test, ob author und editor bei xref identisch sind +%% (für xref=true, useeditor=false oder usetranslator=false, +%% edbyidem=true) +\newbibmacro*{authedxrefcheck}{% + \iffieldundef{xref} + {} + {\savefield{xref}{\bbx@tempa}% + \savefield{xref}{\bbx@tempb}% + \entrydata{\bbx@tempa}{% + \savename{editor}{\bbx@tempa}}% + \entrydata{\bbx@tempb}{% + \savename{translator}{\bbx@tempb}}% + \ifboolexpr{ + test {\ifnameequals{author}{\bbx@tempa}} + or + test {\ifnameequals{author}{\bbx@tempb}} + } + {\booltrue{cbx:authedxref}} + {\boolfalse{cbx:authedxref}}}} + +%% Test, ob author des @inbook und author des @book bei xref +%% identisch sind (für xref=true, edbyidem=true); nötig, +%% damit der Herausgeber nicht durch idem ersetzt wird +%\newbool{cbx:autheddiff}% auther of @inbook and editor of @book differ +\newbibmacro*{authauthxrefcheck}{% + \iffieldundef{xref} + {} + {\savefield{xref}{\bbx@tempa}% + \entrydata{\bbx@tempa}{% + \savename{author}{\bbx@tempa}}% + \ifboolexpr{ + test {\ifnameequals{author}{\bbx@tempa}} + } + {\booltrue{cbx:authauthxref}} + {\boolfalse{cbx:authauthxref}}}} + +%% für @review +\DeclareCiteCommand{\bbx@review} + {} + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \ifentryseen{\bbx@reviewparent} + {\booltrue{cbx:rpcited}} + {\boolfalse{cbx:rpcited}}% + \ifbool{cbx:fullcite} + {\usedriver + {\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}} + {\thefield{entrytype}}} + {\usebibmacro{cite}}} + {} + {} + +%% xref +\DeclareCiteCommand{\bbx@xref} + {} + {\usebibmacro{cite:xref}} + {} + {} + +\endinput diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/lbx/english-dw.lbx b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/lbx/english-dw.lbx new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1f61a78583 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/lbx/english-dw.lbx @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +% english-dw.lbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2016 + +\ProvidesFile{english-dw.lbx}[2016/12/06 v1.7 biblatex localization file] + +\NewBibliographyString{% + idemdat,% + idemdatsf,% + idemdatsm,% + idemdatsn,% + idemdatpf,% + idemdatpm,% + idemdatpn,% + idemdatpp,% + inrefstring,% + review} + +\InheritBibliographyExtras{english} + +\DeclareBibliographyStrings{% + inherit = {english}, + thiscite = {{here}{here}}, + idemdat = {{eidem}{eidem}}, + idemdatsm = {{eidem}{eidem}}, + idemdatsf = {{eidem}{eidem}}, + idemdatsn = {{eidem}{eidem}}, + idemdatpm = {{eisdem}{eisdem}}, + idemdatpf = {{eisdem}{eisdem}}, + idemdatpn = {{eisdem}{eisdem}}, + idemdatpp = {{eisdem}{eisdem}}, + inrefstring = {{article\addspace}{art\adddotspace}}, + review = {{Review of\addspace}{Review of\addspace}}, +} + +\endinput diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/lbx/german-dw.lbx b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/lbx/german-dw.lbx new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..99976350ff --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/lbx/german-dw.lbx @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ +% german-dw.lbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2016 + +\ProvidesFile{german-dw.lbx}[2016/12/06 v1.7 biblatex localization file] + +\InheritBibliographyExtras{german} + +\NewBibliographyString{% + idemdat,% + idemdatsf,% + idemdatsm,% + idemdatsn,% + idemdatpf,% + idemdatpm,% + idemdatpn,% + idemdatpp,% + inrefstring,% + review} + +\DeclareBibliographyStrings{% + inherit = {german}, + idem = {{derselbe}{ders\adddot}}, + idemsm = {{derselbe}{ders\adddot}}, + idemsf = {{dieselbe}{dies\adddot}}, + idemsn = {{dasselbe}{dass\adddot}}, + idempm = {{dieselben}{dies\adddot}}, + idempf = {{dieselben}{dies\adddot}}, + idempn = {{dieselben}{dies\adddot}}, + idempp = {{dieselben}{dies\adddot}}, + ibidem = {{ebenda}{ebd\adddot}}, + idemdat = {{demselben}{dems\adddot}}, + idemdatsm = {{demselben}{dems\adddot}}, + idemdatsf = {{derselben}{ders\adddot}}, + idemdatsn = {{demselben}{dems\adddot}}, + idemdatpm = {{denselben}{dens\adddot}}, + idemdatpf = {{denselben}{dens\adddot}}, + idemdatpn = {{denselben}{dens\adddot}}, + idemdatpp = {{denselben}{dens\adddot}}, + inrefstring = {{Artikel\addspace}{Art\adddotspace}}, + seenote = {{wie Anmerkung}{wie Anm\adddot}}, + review = {{Rezension zu\addspace}{Rez\adddotspace zu\addspace}}, + reprint = {{Nachdruck}{Ndr\adddot}}, + reprintof = {{Nachdruck von}{Ndr\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}}, + reprintas = {{Nachdruck unter dem Titel}{Ndr\adddotspace u\adddot\addabthinspace d\adddot\ Titel}}, + byauthor = {{von}{v\adddot}}, + byeditor = {{herausgegeben von}{hrsg\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}}, + bycompiler = {{kompiliert von}{komp\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}}, + byredactor = {{bearbeitet von}{bearb\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}}, + byfounder = {{begr\"undet von}{begr\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}}, + bycontinuator = {{fortgef\"urt von}{fortgef\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}}, + bycollaborator = {{unter Mitarbeit von}{unter Mitarb\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}}, + bytranslator = {{\lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt von}{\lbx@sfromlang \"ubers\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}}, + bycommentator = {{kommentiert von}{komm\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}}, + byannotator = {{erl\"autert von}{erl\"aut\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}}, + withcommentator = {{mit einem Kommentar von}{komm\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}}, + withannotator = {{mit Erl\"auterungen von}{erl\"aut\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}}, + withintroduction = {{mit einer Einleitung von}{eingel\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}}, + withforeword = {{mit einem Vorwort von}{mit einem Vorw\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + withafterword = {{mit einem Nachwort von}{mit einem Nachw\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + byeditortr = {{herausgegeben und \lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt von}% + {hrsg\adddotspace und \lbx@sfromlang \"ubers\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + byeditorco = {{herausgegeben und kommentiert von}% + {hrsg\adddotspace und komm\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + byeditoran = {{herausgegeben und erl\"autert von}% + {hrsg\adddotspace und erl\"aut\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + byeditorin = {{herausgegeben und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}% + {hrsg\adddotspace und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + byeditorfo = {{herausgegeben und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}% + {hrsg\adddotspace und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + byeditoraf = {{herausgegeben und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}% + {hrsg\adddotspace und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + byeditortrco = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt und kommentiert von}% + {hrsg., \lbx@sfromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und komm\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + byeditortran = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt und erl\"autert von}% + {hrsg., \lbx@sfromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und erl\"aut\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + byeditortrin = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}% + {hrsg., \lbx@sfromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + byeditortrfo = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}% + {hrsg., \lbx@sfromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + byeditortraf = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}% + {hrsg., \lbx@sfromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + byeditorcoin = {{herausgegeben, kommentiert und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}% + {hrsg., komm\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + byeditorcofo = {{herausgegeben, kommentiert und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}% + {hrsg., komm\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + byeditorcoaf = {{herausgegeben, kommentiert und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}% + {hrsg., komm\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + byeditoranin = {{herausgegeben, erl\"autert und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}% + {hrsg., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + byeditoranfo = {{herausgegeben, erl\"autert und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}% + {hrsg., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + byeditoranaf = {{herausgegeben, erl\"autert und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}% + {hrsg., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + byeditortrcoin = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt, kommentiert und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}% + {hrsg., \lbx@sfromlang \"ubers., komm\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + byeditortrcofo = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt, kommentiert und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}% + {hrsg., \lbx@sfromlang \"ubers., komm\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + byeditortrcoaf = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt, kommentiert und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}% + {hrsg., \lbx@sfromlang \"ubers., komm\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + byeditortranin = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt, erl\"autert und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}% + {hrsg., \lbx@sfromlang \"ubers., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + byeditortranfo = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt, erl\"autert und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}% + {hrsg., \lbx@sfromlang \"ubers., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + byeditortranaf = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt, erl\"autert und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}% + {hrsg., \lbx@sfromlang \"ubers., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + bytranslatorco = {{\lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt und kommentiert von}% + {\lbx@sfromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und komm\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + bytranslatoran = {{\lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt und erl\"autert von}% + {\lbx@sfromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und erl\"aut\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + bytranslatorin = {{\lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}% + {\lbx@sfromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + bytranslatorfo = {{\lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}% + {\lbx@sfromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + bytranslatoraf = {{\lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}% + {\lbx@sfromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + bytranslatorcoin = {{\lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt, kommentiert und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}% + {\lbx@sfromlang \"ubers., komm\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + bytranslatorcofo = {{\lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt, kommentiert und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}% + {\lbx@sfromlang \"ubers., komm\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + bytranslatorcoaf = {{\lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt, kommentiert und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}% + {\lbx@sfromlang \"ubers., komm\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + bytranslatoranin = {{\lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt, erl\"autert und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}% + {\lbx@sfromlang \"ubers., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + bytranslatoranfo = {{\lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt, erl\"autert und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}% + {\lbx@sfromlang \"ubers., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}}, + bytranslatoranaf = {{\lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt, erl\"autert und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}% + {\lbx@sfromlang \"ubers., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}}, +} +\endinput |